Home

Mackie 8Bus User's Manual

1. Master Fader Bank Select Section This section consists of e The four buttons used to select the four Fader Banks e The SHIFT button which is primarily used to select and deselect multiple channels The Master L R Fader which controls the signal level going to the L R stereo bus All 96 channels are always active However only 24 are available at a time from the control surface up to 48 are available through the on screen interface The buttons used to select the active fader set are e MIC LINE TRACK e TAPE IN MONITOR ae EFFECTS V Pot Select e MASTERS D MIC LINE TRACK o Solo Studio e Fader Bank 1 Master V Pot Phones 1 amp 2 e Selects channels 1 24 Zk an Combination of Microphone Bus Assignment comete inputs 1 12 and line inputs Control Room OG Olo Automation 1 24 C G Slaa y e Setup Master Fader TAPE IN MONITOR Bank Selection o CO e Fader Bank 2 1 1 ls 25 48 Transport e Se ee annels 25 48 Clipboard Master L R 1 e Requires 1 3 Tape 0 Shortcuts ER cards installed in the card cage for input signals
2. Channels 1 24 IO Channels 25 48 a Channel Assign Tracking Mixer Tape Returns Routed fc Fader Bank 1 Fader Bank 2 L R Mix D8B Manual e Chapter 1 gt page 11 Figure 1 4 Basic Mixdown Setup This is a basic mixdown setup Live Mic Line input source might be used for any audio source live vocals instruments or effects returns From Tape to Channel Ti 25 48 Inputs From Mix Playback to 2 Track Input Analog Room Mics etc From Master Out to or Digital Monitor Outs Mixdown Recorder to Speakers Channels 1 24 Channels 25 48 Monitor Mixdown Machine Tracking Mixer Monitor Tape at CONTROL ROOM in the Fader Bank 1 Fader Bank 2 Master Section Use this diagram for troubleshooting Signal Flow 3 B The previous diagrams help create an accurate Em mental image of how the D8B functions The signal flow diagram in Figure 1 5 on the next page looks 0 6 more closely at the actual path the
3. waw nA 6 waw e wa waman gp s n Oaa 2 onemeirom n e D8B VFD Display Displays Plug in Insert settings for selected Insert Channel There are two main views Plug in Edit View and Insert Assign view Changes the assigned Plug in chooses a Plug in Preset or adjusts a plug in parameter listed in bottom line of VFD eA Buttons Pesne 22 Assign 2 Kurs uu war rrr s messe Tu mesa Wee 5 7 24 SavePatch WindowMemtoc Opens Closes Logic Marker List Window alka rc sOra i ar rfassarrn 5 Auto Mode Read Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to put the Logic channel into Auto Read Mode 0277 Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to put the Logic channel into Auto Latch Mode Bey eee Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to put the Logic channel into Auto Write Mode EHE Assign L R Shift Add Shifts to second function of some buttons Used to select multiple values of some parameters m Toggles the VFD display between track name parameter n
4. c c O G C G O c c lt 0 00000 00000 0 gt 57 6 955 eso 10 exo 0 00 oy jo o GEE o c L 17 25 43 8cm GO GO gt G WEIGHT 50 lbs D amp B CPU SHIPPING E VU VU VU q VU pm 0 UW J VU E m p J J J 6 GO I CI CI I OO O0 O O 0O 6
5. u1 amp 4 eubig otpny 6 4941 e XNV Xnv vxnv Sxnv 9 LXnv 8xav Vocal Enhancer 1 pues jeqibip jeuse4qui nnn u4n324 4101 nnn 4no opne ul 6xnv ejduuex3 Bupe gt 3ojeuy sngeg 23181 eJayeoade 4o41uow TH 5 Nd A 2 Ki L 4 L INO SNHd L SNHd V gt DV4l Z 331690 3dV 1 1 3dVl OL 3dVl OL 3d Stereo Effects Procesor spied SOTVNV e0lV 8 1 110 sna 6 Sa 1096 x w w w m m mw 2402Y 40 0 1 IAIN D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 109 Mixdown Setup This simple checklist will help get the mix started Notice that each time we follow the signal path from its source to its destination 1 Be sure the multitrack recorder is connected properly to the Tape In card s Roll tape to verify signal at TAPE IN Fader Bank LJ If any track reads excessively hot or cold on the D8B meter bridge adjust the Digital Trim for a reading around 15 with no peaks
6. A 69 lir il 70 Q e ER The Snapshot Window COU C 7 The Surround Window 73 Th Locator 77 The Mix Editor Window 79 The 7 9 84 01005 U u 89 The Faders 21 21 NN Rm 90 Event lt 90 92 The History eter edu 92 The MIDI Map Window Curl c 93 UE 1210 94 oa CITUR 94 D8B Manual Table of Contents page ii e e Chapter 4 A ications 95 o 4 2 Ew 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OE 96 Listening ciae u NEHMEN THEO PERUENIRE 96 Channel ConfigurationZPla ingu T 96 96 Figure 4l Power up Procedure u i 96 Figure 4 2 Basic Connection for Multitrack Recording ennt 97 Setup VV roni 97 Installation and Connection of Optional I O and Effects Cards 99 Iistallation Gr s tento E nier 100 Installation of
7. Commit until End With this option checked automation is written from the time of the event until the end of the session Note When committing snapshots the snapshot filter settings taken into account For example if the snapshot has Mutes Faders filtered out then no automation nodes will be written to fader or mute automation tracks for all channels Do not overwrite existing automation With this option checked automation will not be written to parameters with existing automation Automation will only be written to empty parameters In the example below notice that automation is only written on channel 1 and 10 because they are the only channels that did not contain automation before the commit D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 83 The Fat Channel Window Ctrl 6 File Edit Channel Options Plugins Windows HUI Mode ON Memory 51491K Session Startup 3 00 PM 01 00 13 21 VIEW CHAN SELECT AU SENDS DIGI TRIM 0 0 BritishH P British EQ E ara 20 20 EQ CHANNEL Ch 25 0 0 dB 1 77 Hz ASSIGNMENT 1 77Q 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 4 3852 Hz 136 5071 Hz 1 77Q Q 1 77 Q ACTIVE MORPH 2 0 sec MENU MEM A US OUTPUT OUT 0 0 PRE DSP INSERT PATCH ACTIVE none SFF MENU MEM B 4 POST DSP INSERT AUR 9 10 none KEY INPUT none DYNAMICS EQ KEY EQ IN THRESHOLD ATTACK RELEASE RATIO THRESHOLD ATTACK RELEASE RANGE Plugi
8. III 0000 eooo III III eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 0000 III III III eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 III eooo III 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 eooo 0000 III eooo 000 eooo 0000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo 0000 III 00000 0000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 Set Set Default Levels Set Time Button Setting Up for a Session Setting Up Plug ins Setup Button Setup Window Ctrl 1 Digital 1 0 Alt I O Stereo 1 Tape Banks FTP Server Allow FTP Clients Apply Gateway IP Address Subnet General Advanced Graphics Date and Time Display Intensity Mouse Speed Smart Save Licensing Locator MMC MIDI Active Tempo Default Tempo Device ID selection MIDI File Tempo Map Pre Roll Song Offset Mix Options Aux Select Pre Post Calibrate eooo 00000 III
9. Mona EG Mona EG MDW Mone Channel Patch 3 0 PO 5 0 POS 5 0 04 empty POS Mono EQ Hono EQ Card slot _ Input Source Plugin Select Aux 4 default Mix L Mix R X 9 9 m 8 1 POY MDW Mono POS MDW Hono POS TC Level F10 empty FOS TC Level F10 empty F11 Crawmer Dyn P12 Drawmer Dyn F13 DelayFactor F11 Drawmer Dyn F14 DelayFactor F15 Antares Autotune P1 amp 31 12 Drawmer Dyn F13 DelayFactor P14 DelayFactor F15 Antares Autotune F16 1 Post DSP Inserts Plugin Chain KI 1 AAN Ch 44 Pre 7743 4 Fost DSP Pull down Ch 48 Pre Track Sheet Desktop Plug in Configuration Window Pre DSP Pull down This assignment can also be made from the control surface and VFD by holding the desired channel s SELECT button for two seconds then paging over to Plug Pre or Plug Post selecting the input source then selecting the desired plug in slot from the follow on menu D8B Manual e Appendices page 155 Using an Aux Send with a Plug in e Click the associated INPUT SOURCE button and select an Aux input source In the example below we have chosen the Aux 4 Bus ag CONTGUratiOn Card Slot Input Source Plugin Select Aux 4 default Mie Auxes Pre DSP Inserts
10. 0 ol Pt Pt Pd Pt Pd Pt Pd Pt Pt Pd oo Se Pt Pt Pt Pd Pt Pd Pet Pt Pe Pt 5 e9e20292026202020202620202020202020202 5555554 Pt Pt Pet Pt PE PE Pt Pet Pt PE PPE et PEt et Pet Ped PE PS Pet et Pd PE PS et et 1 0 00 0 09 0 0 00 0 09 0 0 0 29 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 tt et Pt Pt Pt Pt tt Pt Pt et Pt Pt Pt Pt Pet Pt PE PT Pt Pet Pt et Pet Pt PE Pt et Pt Pt PE PS et et kD 20202020202020202020202020202020202020 dt bt Pt Pt Pt Pt 5 Pt bt bt bd Ht Pt bet bt Ht Pt Pt bt Pt dt bt Ht Ht Pt Pt bt bd Ht Ht bt bet hd Pd PITTS 2 Pte Pt Pt Pt Pee Pet Pt PE PT Pt Pt PE PE Pe Pt Pe et Pet PE Pt Pe et Pet PE PT Pe et gt 2 02 202020202020 01020202020202020202020202020201095202020202020202020202020202 Ht bt bt Ht Pt Pt Pt Pt Ht Ht Ht Ht Pt Ht St Ht Ht Pt Pt Ht Pt eee e lt e eo eo o oo oo oe ed e ee eo eo eo eo eo Q 8 83
11. 0000 III eooo 0000 III eooo eooo III 00000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 eooo 0000 III 0000 eooo 0000 eooo 0000 00000 eooo III eooo 6000 eooo eooo III eooo 0000 III eooo III eooo eooo D8B Manual e Appendices page 187 III eooo 0000 00000 III Route to Tape 36 88 Rude Solo Light Run Run Event Alt R 00000 III eooo 0000 III III eooo eooo 91 000000 000000 000000 000000 23 35 68 23 68 108 51 38 38 57 33 51 6 D1 137 138 eooo eooo eooo III S PDIF Digital 1 0 Sample Rate Sample Rate Conversion Sample Tracking Setup Save As Template Save As Button Save Button Save Channel As Save Patch Button Save Session Ctrl S Save Session As Save Snapshot For Safety Save Surround As Scribble Strip SDDS Select Select All Select Ctrl A Select All Faders Alt Shift A Select Butto
12. eooo III eooo 00000 eooo eooo eooo 6000 eooo eooo eooo III 0000 III III III eooo eooo 00000 Quad Quick EQ Box Quick Select Fat Channel we 74 s 45 43 0000 III eooo eooo III eooo III III eooo III eooo 00000 III 39 as 22 26 40 44 44 62 69 78 54 99 25 12 142 0 60 60 2 3 158 40 we 40 w 69 107 137 eooo 0000 eooo eooo 00000 Range Display Rear Panel Description Rec Rdy Record Record Safe Redo Ctrl Shift Z Relative Offset Remote CPU Description Renumber Repair Reset Channel Delay Reset Channel Layout Reset Selected Channels Reset Template Returns Reverb Rewind Button Rotary Dial Encoder Rough Mix 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 00000 III 0000 III 00000 III IIl III III 0000 00000 III eooo III 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III eooo 00000
13. 32 Studio SB 33 Phones M 34 D8B Manual gt Table of Contents page Control ROOM Section 34 tuse ionge PauU 35 Master EsRZ Shortcuts Section uuu 36 36 Bus AS SSN A ltomatio Section 36 38 SESSION 39 gt What s On TV 4 Chapter 3 909 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 Using the Graphic User Interface 97 42 42 The a 47 6 49 May See A Menu PIedse 51 The File 0 NR m T 51 3 TheChan el Men NERO TM 56 The Options MENU 7 60 PUTO RM AION 6 Md 6 ua uum uae made PU Pu HUNE 62 The 63 The 65 The Desktop Window MILD u uuu uu uu ane iar 66 The Soup Window 05 66 C l M HH 66 I OI NER sasa 66 L u a H e Q 67 68 Viae
14. e a 8 5 a IN Um D 8 s Ba m EE o gt AG e DATA CABLE to Console 4 MOUSE ICEIVED DESIGNED AND MANUFACTURED BY MACKIE DESIGNS INC WOODINVILLE WA USA DESIGNE THE FOLLOWING ARE TRADEMARKS OR REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF MACKIE DESIGN INC DIGITAL The DA 88 should have firmware version 4 01 To determine the firmware version MMC 38 Internally marked on EPROM 88 Hold down the STOP PLAY REC buttons while powering up the DA 88 to display the DA 88 ROM version SY 88 Hold down the PLAY REC FF buttons while powering up the DA 88 to display the SY 88 ROM version by contacting our parts department at 800 258 6883 lt MADE IN USA FABRIQUE AU USA SYSTEMS 088 AND THE RUNNING MAN FIGURE MIDI IN DIGITAL 5 ZA IN la lax ne e ee MIDI OUT If using any of the newer 24 bit DTRS machines you should have version 2 1 EPROMs installed in the DIOe8 cards 01098 cards shipped after 7 2000 have version 2 1 EPROMs installed If the label on the socketed IC located on the bottom left corner of the DIO 8 card near the edge connector has anything but v2 1 printed on it you should get the free upgrade REMOTE CPU v co d A fe de v
15. eooo eooo eooo 0000 00000 III DII eooo eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 4 0000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Route To S en 0 Save MIDI Map As inn T Selection nb ns 94 000000 000000 000000 000000 MIDI Snapshots MIDI Status Min 0 Mix Editor Window Ctrl 5 Auto Follow Auto Scroll Channel View Commit Event Cue Points Edit Tools Eraser Tool Highlighter Tool Crosshair Magnify Tool Pointer Tool Hand Tool Enable Snap Event Markers Flip View Icon Insert New Cue Insert New Event Mute All Events Nudge Arrows Page and Back Pull downs Snap Grid Snap To Cues Snap To Grid Time Code Displays Unmute All Events Loom Arrows Mix Options Mixdown Recorder Mixdown Setup Mixdown Solo MMC MMC DEVICE ID Modify Levels Alt M Monitor Speakers Monitoring Mono Button Mono Delay Morph Mount Refresh Drives Mouse Mouse Speed MTC MTC OFFSET Multi sync Monitor Multitrack Direct Outs Multitrack Recording Multitrack Tracking Checklist Mute Mute All Events Mute Mutes 69 116 94 55 79 81 81 80 e 19 82 82 80 81 80 81 80 81 82 80 82 82 82
16. Select Destination example with an MFX card installed in mixer card slot 1 and selected the Plugin ul Configuration window INPUTS are available at slots 1 and 2 If Aux 1 is selected for SLOT 6 Aux 1 send feeds the input to Stereo Effect 1 whereas the returns enter the mixer at EFFECTS bank faders 1 and 2 e Once the plug in is selected 1116 0 input options appear in the INPUT menu e naddition to an aux send a plug in can also receive its input from a channel pre or post DSP insert the main stereo left and right bus or a Bus 1 8 When a plug in is inserted in line in this manner its output is routed directly back into the channel or bus by default e A plug in can also receive its input from an FX Return This allows two or more plug ins to be chained For example assign a plug in output to its default FX Return and assign the input source of the next plug in to the FX Return of the previous plug in e naddition to an FX Return a plug in output can be routed to a channel pre or post DSP insert the e This command opens the Plugin Configuration main stereo left and right bus or a Bus 1 8 window It is here that plug ins are selected input sources are chosen to feed plug ins stereo or mono modes are selected and plug in output destinations are selected e There are sixteen plug in slots four dedicated to each FX card Card one is allocated plug in slots 1 4 Card 2 is allo
17. 1 AY er e DIGITAL 8 BUS E EA 530060 BY POGEE e e e 8 Y 3 4 lt 23 OUT e a SF QA IAIN STUDIO IGITAL ZZ L RA S PDIF co SY IN 052 CR 20 FIELD PUNCH I 69 R Z 4 OUT St 2 6 Ie IE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITK CTS CARDS Vo SYNC MUST ACCEPT INTER TERENCE eve IAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED TIO DATA CABLE to Console REMOTE CPU MIDIIN MIDI OUT co eo U 25 lt e v lt vo P O 0 O Y D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 127 Connecting the Digital 8eBus to ADATS Using an External Sync Box Cabling and Hookup 1 Connect a fiber optic lightpipe cable between the DIGITAL IN and the 10 8 card s ADAT OPTICAL OUT Likewise connect the DIO 8 cards OPTICAL IN to ADAT s DIGITAL OUT 2 Connect the 9 pin D sub sync cables between the Sync Box SYNC OUT and the first ADAT s SYNC IN connector Then connect the sync cables in a daisy chain fashion between the remaining ADATs Connect the SYNC OUT on the last ADAT to the SYNC IN on the Sync Box to complete the lo
18. eooo III eooo 00000 III 0000 eooo eooo III eooo eooo 0000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 00000 III III III III 0000 III eooo III eooo eooo eooo 00000 III III 000000 4 000000 eee 000000 eooo eooo III eooo 0000 0000 eooo 0000 eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 III 00000 III 0000 eooo eooo eooo III eooo 0000 eooo 00000 000000 000000 eee 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III III eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 III eooo 0000 III 000000 eoo 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 III eooo 00000 III Fader Bank 1 Fader Bank 2 Fader Bank 3 Fader Bank 4 Fader Bank 5 Fader Bank Select LEDs Fader Bank Selection Fader Banks EFFECTS HUI Layer MASTERS MIC LINE TRACK TAPE IN MONITOR Fader Motors Off
19. 7 tape out 4 ch 22 tape nut 5 ch 29 tape out 5 ch 36r tape out ch 317 tape outs 51 52 tape out 28 55 tape out 10 ch 34 tape out 11 51 55 tape out 12 51 56 tape out 15 ch 3 7 DIT 1 Assign MIC LINE bank channels to desired tape tracks tape out 16 ch 407 tape aut 17 51 411 tape out 18 51 42 tape out 19 ch 4 3 tape aut 20 447 tape aut 21 51 45 tape out 22 ch 46 tape aut 25 ch 4 r tape nut 24 48 7 Set Channel to Reset Channel Only Reset 4 LJ If you want to monitor from the multitrack remove the MIC LINE Bank from the L R mix This has no effect on the output to tape L F 122 11 Adjust control room monitor mix from TAPE IN Bank Verify channel assignment to the L R bus tape out 14 51 58 tape out 15 51 59 Bank Outputs r r SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT BELECT ELECT 50 SOLO 50 500 SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO 50 more morte Mure mote mute MurE Mure Mure Ch 40 Ch 41 Ch 42 Ch 43 Ch44 Ch 45 Ch46 Ch 47 Ch 48 1 Place tape inputs record ready to verify signal at machine It s typically best to monitor signal from the multitrack rather than from the channel input 0 0 0 0 0 0 Modulaf Digital Multitrack 0000000 oOo o 7
20. Copy Button Copy Channel s Ctrl C Copy Mix To Bus Copy Mix to Cue CR Main CR Near Field Cue Level Cue Pan 1 and 2 Cue Points Cut Channel Ctrl X Cut Copy Paste Rename Duplicate Files Cut Zero Set Button 6000 eooo 00000 III III III 000 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo III III III eooo 0000 00000 000 000 eooo 00000 III eooo eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III III III eooo III eooo 0000 III III 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 0000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo III 0000 III eooo 000000 000000 000000 0000000 eoo 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III eooo 00000 00000 eooo eooo 0000 eooo 0000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000
21. D8B Manual e Chapter 2 page 28 MASTERS SHIFT 1 24 25 48 MIC LINE TAPE IN TRACK MONITOR 49 72 EFFECTS BANK SELECT MASTER EFFECTS e Fader Bank 3 e Selects channels 49 72 e Effects bank controls sixteen internal effects returns and eight ALT I O returns MASTERS e Fader Bank 4 e Selects channels 73 90 e Faders 1 8 control the virtual group levels e Faders 9 16 are assignable MIDI controllers e Faders 17 24 control the eight bus or surround outputs BUS 1 8 which are output via the 25 pin D sub connector labeled BUS OUT 1 8 amp SURROUND OUT on the rear of the console The BUS 1 8 outputs can also be assigned to the 24 tape outputs or the ALT I O slot SHIFT Button The SHIFT button serves multiple functions It provides a way to select multiple channels and multiple solo buttons It also serves as a fine tune selector for Aux levels and Pan adjustments Try adjusting an Aux level with and without the SHIFT button depressed notice the difference in numerical scrolling speed Use to access the HUI layer when HUI mode is active SHIFT MASTERS Allows more than one channel SELECT button to be engaged simultaneously Allows more then one SOLO button to be en gaged simultaneously Allows fine tuning of Aux send levels and pan adjustments Allows independent control of channel param eters with linked channels Double clicking selects all channels on the ac ti
22. III eooo 00000 III eooo 000 0000 III eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo eooo 00000 III 0000 III 0006 III III eooo III eooo 0000 III eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 eooo eooo III 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 III eooo III eooo eooo 0000 III eooo 0000 III eooo eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 00000 III III 00000 III 000 eooo 0000 III III III 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 III III III III eooo III eooo eooo III 0000 III eooo eooo 0000 00000 00000 0000000 000000 000000 0
23. eooo 00000 III eooo III eooo eooo 000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo III 000 III eooo 00000 III 0000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 0000 eooo III eooo 137 138 wee 114 89 eooo eooo 00000 0000 III eooo 0000 Edit Menu Clear Automation Clear Edit History Copy Channel s Ctrl C Copy Mix To Bus Cut Channel Ctrl X Delete Events DEL Delete Global Time Delete Time Insert Global Time Insert Time Modify Levels Alt M Paste Channels Ctrl V Play From Selection Ctrl Space Redo Ctrl Shift Z Select Ctrl A Set Default Levels Undo Ctrl Z Edit Playback Filter Alt l Editing Automation Effects Enable Snap 53 50 e 54 eres DD we 54 54 eesse DD D 55 s 55 4 4 i DO 54 eesse DD 54 54 an 12 140 0 8 26 29 47 112 cs 81 eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo III 0000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 III 00000
24. 00000 000 eooo eooo 00000 00000 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 eooo 0000 eooo 00000 26 36 37 44 48 57 89 00000 III III 000000 000000 000000 61 69 78 61 139 000000 0000000 000000 Zoom Arrows 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 D8B Manual Appendices page 190 Colophon This manual was a collaborative effort created in part from the original Digital 8eBus Owner s Manual with additional text and contributions from Bill Gibson Brian McCully Craig Chastain and Trent Wagner Final proofreading and final editing pro vided by Ben Olswang and Dave Franzwa All production work was performed on various Macintosh computers using Adobe PageMaker 6 5 and Adobe Illustrator 8 0 and 9 0 ADAT is a trademark of Alesis Corporation TASCAM is a registered trademark of TEAC Corporation Apogee and UV22 Super CD Encoding are trademarks of Apogee Electron ics IVL is a trademark of IVL Ltd Etch a Sketch is a registered trademark of the Ohio Art Company The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mackie Designs Inc The Mackie Logo
25. 000000 000000 III eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo III III 0000 III III 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 00000 III III eooo eooo eooo 0000 00000 III III III eooo eooo eooo 0000 III 00000 III 0000 00000 eooo III eooo eooo eooo 0000 eooo 0000 00000 III III eooo eoo 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo III III eooo eooo 00000 III 0000 III III III 0000 eooo eooo eooo 000000 eooo eooo eooo eooo III III III 000000 eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 III eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 III III 0000 III eooo 0000 eooo III III eooo 0000 00000 III
26. 000000 000000 000000 40 000000 000000 000000 000000 Jog amp Shuttle Button 89 6 25 0000 eooo III eooo Key Input Keyboard eooo 0000 III 00000 36 90 wee 47 42 14 48 62 106 68 47 22 60 70 96 134 38 cnn 33 91 39 39 m Ei TT 78 dH 78 78 78 78 18 18 e 18 78 78 78 18 weve 78 18 78 78 78 78 an TT s11 L R Button L R Output Assignments Label Fader LCRS Level to Tape Licensing Line Line Input Link Speakers Listening environment Live Setup Live Sound Live Recording Setup Load Button Load Patch Button Load Target Locate Locator Button Locator Window Ctrl 4 Automation Parameters ALL BYPASS FADER MUTE PAN TOUCH TRIM LOCATOR Parameters Delete Cue New Cue Renumber Store Cue Mix Options Record Safe Single Button Record Solo Latch Use PreRoll Use Write Ready Write Flyback Numeric Transport Position Indicator Transport Controls 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 00000 III III eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo
27. 000000 000000 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 n 27 30 42 89 27 43 57 60 70 78 34 27 62 75 10 10 89 17 115 68 68 14 158 38 68 119 0000 III eooo 0000 eooo III III eooo III 0000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo 6000 eooo eooo III III eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 III 000000 000000 000000 0000000 eooo III III III III eooo 0000 eooo 00000 III eooo 0000 III 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 00000 III III eooo 00000 eooo 0000 00000 III eooo eooo 00000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 III III III eooo eooo III 000 III eooo 0000 III III 0000 eooo eooo 00000 eo
28. III 00000 III 0000 eooo eooo 000 eooo 000000 0000000 000000 000000 III III eooo III III eooo eooo 00000 0000 III eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo III II III III III III 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 00000 III III eooo 00000 III III eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 III 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 0000 00000 III eooo III 0000 0000 III eooo 0000 eooo 0000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 III eooo 00000 III eooo 0000 00000 000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 000000 0000000 000000
29. e MODE toggles between STEREO and MONO The Plugins Menu when using the UFX card Each UFX card is divisible into two halves Either half can be selected as stereo or two channel mono In other words each UFX card can be configured as two stereo 7 four mono or one stereo and two mono plugins e The MODE selection is not applicable to the 3 cards Pa Alva e MODE selection determines the plug in options 5 MDW Mono EQ Als from the UFX card 6 MDW Mono EQ 6 e Select the desired plug ins in the PLUGIN column 7 MDW Mono EQ Alt The available options are dependent on the 8 MDW Mono EQ Alt 8 installed plug in card s 9 TC Level l Alt 9 e Each of the four card slots is allocated four pos P10 0 sible inputs and four possible outputs MFX cards are automatically configured with two mono inputs each feeding a separate user selected effect Each te MFX effect has a stereo output automatically re P14 Alt Shift 4 15 Antares Autotune Alt Shift 5 apo UNE faders in the control surface EFFECTS bank UFX cards offer a potential of 3 3 5 four discrete inputs and outputs configurable into plugin specific stereo and mono configurations e When using the MFX card each mono input feeds a stereo effect each stereo effect returns to two faders on the EFFECTS bank by default For Lard ot Input Source
30. GENER E 2 lo lo 10 10 lt Data Cable INS DENCE MAY NOT Cue HAUL E Ano 2 THs DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEMED THAT D8B Manual e Chapter gt page 4 Let s Get It Working This is a step by step guide to get the Digital 8eBus working We assume you ve pulled everything out of the box and are ready to start working First you ll need e 1 Stereo Power Amplifier e 1 pair of Monitor Speakers you can substitute a pair of powered monitors for the power amplifier monitor speaker combo or some stereo headphones e Miscellaneous cables 1 cup of coffee we think any native Seattle based beverage heightens the Mackie experience Hooking Stuff Up First connect the Remote CPU to the console 1 Connect the DC power cable between the Remote CPU and the console Rotate the outer sleeve of the connector clockwise until the sleeve is snug and finger tight Caution The Remote CPU weighs 42 pounds so we recommend that if you mount it in a rack you place it at the bottom of the rack and provide additional support at the rear of the unit O 0 0 PC Compatible Keyboard Multi Sync Video Monitor PS 2 Mouse a 3 72 z 0 KEYBOARD 2 Connect the data cable between the Remote CPU and the console Rotate the thumbscrews on each connector clo
31. III 00000 eooo III III eooo 00000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 00000 10 0000 eooo III eooo 00000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 III eooo 000000 000000 000000 eooo III III III eooo 000 eooo eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 0000000 eooo eooo 0000 eooo III III eooo 000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 D8B Manual e Appendices page 183 Enabled Enter Button EQ EQ to Dynamics Erase UFX Memory Eraser Tool ESN Electronic Serial Number Ethernet Ethernet Port Event Automation Track Ctrl 9 Capture Event Time Alt T It T Commit Events Alt M Current List Item Arrow Delete Events Alt Delete Duplicate Event Mute Icon New Event Alt N Load Target New Event Type Run Event Alt R Select All Ctrl A Synchronize Events Events Markers External Sample Rates 57 39 45 84 158 33 94 81 68 67 26 90 91 92 92 92 91 92 91 91 91 91 92 91
32. Q lt bo 5 O v O D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 131 Digital Audio Workstation Setup Connecting the Digital 8eBus to a Digital Audio Workstation Digital Performer Studio Vision Pro Cakewalk Pro etc shares considerations with the ADAT and TASCAM hookups Word clock synchro nization must be addressed the master and slaves must be established the clock rate must be consis tent throughout and the audio path into the console must be intelligently configured Note A Pro Tools system works best when referenced to Superclock sync source or when connected to a PDIe8 card through AES EBU with SRC engaged Let s consider a common computer based setup utilizing e A combination digital audio MIDI software package e A MIDI interface e A digital audio interface with lightpipe audio connections Cabling and Hookup 1 Connect the Digital 8eBus lightpipe output from the 1096 or OPT 8 card to the digital audio interface lightpipe input Likewise connect the lightpipe output from the digital audio interface to the D8Bs lightpipe input 2 Connect the digital audio interface to the computer per the manufacturer s specifications Settings D8B 1 Open the Setup window 2 Click Digital I O to open the Digital I O dialog box 3 Click each Tape Input and Output box and select the appropriate setting for each card installed General Network Digital O Licensing Mix Opt Surround M
33. eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo 0000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 00000 eooo 0000 III 00000 eooo eooo eooo III eooo eooo eooo 0000 00000 000000 000000 eoo 000000 000000 0000 III eooo eooo III eooo III eooo III III eooo eooo 0000000 000000 eoo 000000 000000 35 158 85 53 25 0 6 39 40 71 77 115 116 125 126 137 8 115 6 6 8 104 105 27 42 89 82 si 92 37 61 78 III 10 0000 III 0000 00000 eooo III III eooo III eooo 00000 III eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 00000 III 0000 000000 III III III 0000 III eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 0000000 III eooo 0000 eooo 0000 III eooo III eooo eooo 000 III
34. eooo 0000 III 00000 00000 eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 00000 III III III III III eooo III 0000 III III III eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 III III IIl eooo 0000 eooo 00000 III III III eooo 0000 eooo D8B Manual Appendices page 184 Release Soft Threshold Digital Trim Dynamics EQ EQ 20 20 EQ 4 band Parametric British EQ British MEM MENU MORPH Fader Gate Attack Expand MEM MENU MIDI Range Ratio Release Threshold Key Input Mute Pan Phase Post DSP Insert Pre DSP Insert Route to Solo Write Feedback Loop Fiber Optic Figures ADAT Optical Hookup to HDR24 96 8 AES EBU Hookup to HDR24 96 PDIe8 Analog Hookup to HDR24 96 8 Analog Recording Mixdown Hookup Example Connecting ADAT Lightpipe Connecting TDIF Digital Connecting the Analog Multitrack Connecting the D8B to ADATs Using an External Sync Connecting the Digital 8 for Live Sound Live R Connecting the Digital 8eBus to a BRC and Connecting the Digital 8eBus
35. 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 III eooo eooo 10 8 9 35 36 36 36 36 36 29 23 30 28 30 47 48 8 48 48 47 000000 IIIIII 000000 eee 0000 III eooo eooo 0000 eooo 0000 000 0000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo III 0006 eooo 0000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 eooo 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 III eooo 0000 eooo III eooo III eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 000 III III eooo III eooo eooo 0000 III 00000 000000 4 000000 000000 000000 47 48 48 47 48 47 48 48 29 7 8 26 29 47 55 33 62 62 62 6
36. Auto Follow Auto Scroll Auto Touch Automate EQ Dynamics and Effects Automation In Bypass Automation Parameters Automation Procedural Checklists Automation Section ALL AUTO TOUCH BYPASS FADER MOTORS OFF FADERS MUTES PAN TRIM LEVELS Automation Sub menu All Auto Touch Bypass Faders Mutes Pan Trim Levels Write Flyback Write Ready Mode eooo 0000 eooo 00000 III 12 17 0000 III eooo III 71 99 102 116 125 126 128 22 23 68 99 132 122 59 66 116 180 T 23 23 35 68 124 27 33 27 22 23 68 99 120 180 37 61 78 36 23 38 67 68 152 180 nas 120 22 120 114 12 4 181 pe 22 26 36 88 10 68 70 81 81 37 61 138 140 137 eooo 000000 00000 00000 0000000 0000000 0000000 III eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo III eooo 0000 III eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 0000 III eooo III III 0000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo I
37. Cables amp Hardware 3 PDIe8 cards for HDR24 96 3 PDIe8 cards for 9 1 Clock I O card for D8B 3 DB25 to DB25 AES EBU snakes 1 750 BNC word clock cable Hookup 1 Connect the three AES EBU cables between the corresponding AES EBU connectors on HDR24 96 and 8 2 When AES EBU is used the 2 must have a Clock I O card installed To make the D amp B the clock master connect its Word Clock Out to the HDR24 96 Word Clock In To make HDR24 96 Settings 1 If the HDR24 96 is the clock master set the Sample Clock to Internal if it is a clock slave set the Sample Clock to Word Clock and depress the 75Q termination switch on the Sync card 2 Set the Sample Rate to 44 1kHz or 48kHz according to your preference Console Settings 1 If the D amp B is the clock master set the Sample Rate to either 44 1kHz or 48kHz and set the Apogee Clock to Internal in the Digital I O Setup window If itis a clock slave then set the Apogee Clock to Word Clock Set the Sample Rate to match the Sample Rate selected on the HDR24 96 the HDR24 96 the master connect its Word Clock Out to the D8B Word Clock In AES EBU Hookup with PDle8 Apogee Clock I O Card Word Clock Out APOGEE SYNC APOGEE Word Clock In Word Clock Out HDR24 96 as Master Use Depress the Termination button if the 24 96 is set to Slave only
38. Connecting a Mouse Keyboard and SVGA Monitor Other Connections Control Surface Functions Channel Strip Section Master Section Description Master Fader Bank Select Section D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 65 Hot Keys The more of these key commands you learn the faster and more efficient you ll be at recording Some adjustments are necessary on the control surface or with the mouse but many control settings flow very quickly from the keyboard Once you begin to incorporate these into your routine you ll quickly realize the power and creative freedom they offer See Appendix D Shortcuts for a more comprehensive list of hot keys and shortcuts Specialty Key Assignments F1 r2 F3 F4 FS Shift F5 Space Ctrl Space Shift gt Shift gt Shift 1 Home Ctrl M whe o amp p m amp z d Arrows Shift LAR Arrows Alt UpzDn Arrows Ctrl Arrows Alt Arrows F Fi 8 F10 iew Ch 1 24 iew Ch 22 48 iew Ch 49 72 iew Masters iew HUI Bank Toggle HUI Mode Play Stop Flay From Select Rew ind Fast Forward Record Set Selection Start Set Selection End Goto Zero Next Previous Cue Mew Cue Ch Write On amp Off Ch Solo On amp Off Ch Mute On amp Off Dive MixEditor Drag MixEditer Screen Move Channel Selection Multiple Channel Selection Mudge Selected Faders coom Mix Editar Soroll Mix Editar Meters to
39. Event Based To automate the loading of a plug in preset e Use the Event Automation Track available under the Windows Menu as Event Track to load plug in user previously stored or factory preset patches at a specific time during automation playback General Note Plug in settings are recalled as part of a console Snapshot but may also be recalled as Presets patches If you are recalling snapshots and presets be aware that one may override the other VERY IMPORTANT FX Routing The Plug in Configuration Window Input Source Plug in Assignment Assignment Card Slot Column Column Column Stereo Mono Mode Column Close Window Plug in display toggle Destination Card Slot Input Source de Plugin Select Destination Assignment COE Column Card A B Fe Card D Stereo Mono Toggle Button Inserting a Plug in into a Channel A pre or post DSP channel insert can also be used as the input source for a plug in When a channel insert point is selected the plug in output returns to the channel by default The FX return path is disconnected although the plug in output is still displayed on the FX return channel meter A plug in channel insert assignment can be made from the Plugin Configuration window or from a pull down menu from the mixer screen Post Frost Post F F 1 5 0 PO MFR 5 0 POS MFR 2 0 PO4 empty POS MDW Mona
40. III III eooo 00000 III III III eooo 63 69 22 0000 III 0000 III 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 123 124 120 m 102 103 102 129 135 127 133 13 eooo III eooo 0000 III eooo 000000 000000 eooo 0000 III 00000 III eooo eooo eooo 00000 eooo 000000 eooo III III eooo 00000 000000 III III 0000 eooo eooo eooo III eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo 0000 eooo 0000 000000 100 101 eooo 0000 III 00000 eooo eooo eooo III eooo III III eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 109 49 121 III III III eooo eooo 0000 III 00000 eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 III eooo III eooo 00000 eooo eooo eooo 00
41. Word Clock In Word Clock Out D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 124 PDIe8 1 0 Cards Digital 8eBus AES EBU Cables DB25 HDR 24 96 PDI0e8 I O Cards OK so we fibbed a little You can 4 Set Samplerate to match the sample rate of use PDIe8 cards in the D8B the formatted ADAT tapes typically 48kHz or e without a Clock I O card 44 1kHz installed but doing so requires that you enable sample rate ADATs conversion on both the D8B and 1 Select DIGITAL IN on the ADAT front panel the HDR24 96 in lieu of word clock synchronization sample rate conversion results in a 4 bit loss in sample resolution that may degrade the quality of the sound slightly On the positive side you don t need a Clock I O card Using the Digital 8eBus with ADATs This is a simple setup It works well and is easy to configure However it has some limitations Without a MTC sync source there s no way for the Digital 8eBus to time reference snapshot or dynamic automation As long as automation isn t a consideration this setup is clean and efficient 48K on 0 INPUT Cabling and Hookup 1 Connect a fiber optic cable between the ADAT s lightpipe output and the D8B s lightpipe input Likewise connect the D8B s lightpipe output to the lightpipe input A 10 8 or OPTe8 lightpipe card must be installed in the D amp B to gain access to the ADAT digital tape inputs and outputs 2 W
42. f Adustine plugin parameter displayed above Aa Seon N __ Shitonextprevious Buttons D a 17 Memory Bypass _ Bypasses the currentiy selected Pugin OO OLS s Ge wear Ww OO zi Compressor z2 Pigs 24 WmdowMemlo NA 25 AssignBus2 Autotnabiesend NA 26 Assign Bus Piwgin lt a j j x 27 Assign uss TN 28 Assigntuss NA Assign Bus 8 Auto Mode Write Mode Write a sa ee es pred Auto Enable Fader N A D8B Manual e Appendices page 176 MACKIE D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For Soundscape D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments Soundscape Function Automation Mutes gg Automation Auto Auto Mode Touch 37 Automation Pan Auto Enable Pan 38 Tnm Auto Mode Trim D 35 Auto Enable Mute N IA N N A N A N A gt 5 gt Toggle Loop button o Go to R locator 4 Stop Press again to return to L Locator Press again to return to beginning 4 5 Play Also punches out of recording gt Won t work with snap Press to set the c
43. 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo 00000 III 00000 0000 eooo eooo eooo 000000 0000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 III III 00000 00000 eooo eooo III 00000 eooo eooo eooo UFX UFX Effects Card Undo Ctrl Z Undo Button Ungroup Unity Gain Unlink Ctrl U Unlock Procedure ESN Electronic Serial Number Unlock Code Unlock Snapshot Unmute All Events Updating Software Upgrade UFX Cards UPS Use Nine Pin Control Use Pre Roll Use PreRoll Use Write Ready Using Basic Automation Using the Digital 8eBus with ADATSs Using the Graphic User Interface GUI UV22 23 24 64 112 wa 99 3 35 58 42 44 47 48 75 88 90 59 8 68 68 72 82 ies 19 94 e 62 69 78 69 78 137 5 in A2 68 119 III III eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 0006 III III III III 00000 eooo III III eooo 0000 III 0000 eooo 0000 000000 000
44. 000000 000000 000000 III 00000 III eooo 0000 III eooo eooo III III eee 000000 000000 000000 III IIl eooo eooo 0000 III 00000 eooo III eooo 00000 III III III III 00000 000000 000000 eee 000000 0000000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo 00000 III eooo D8B Manual e Appendices page 189 137 181 19 5 5 6 6 4 90 90 84 92 66 77 III 00000 What of Data Can Automated Whirlwind Windows Windows Menu About sats Close All Ctrl Desktop Ctrl D Erase UFX Memory wits Event Automation Track Ctrl 9 Faders Ctrl 8 Fat Channel Ctrl 6 History List Ctrl Y Hot Keys Locator Ctrl 4 Locator Window Ctrl 4 Mix Options MIDI Map Ctrl Mix Editor Ctrl 5 Panning Ctrl 7 Setup Ctrl 1 Digital 1 0 FTP Server General Licensing Locator MMC MIDI inn Mix Options Network Surround Snapshot Ctrl 2 Surround Ctrl 3 Track Sheet Ctrl T Upgrade UFX Cards Word Clock Write Write Flyback Write
45. 000000 0000000 000000 III 0000 III 0000 III 0000 eooo eooo 00000 eooo III III 00000 III III 000000 000000 0000000 000000 III eooo 0000 eooo 0000 III III III 0000 III eooo III 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo 00000 III 0000 III 0000 III eooo 0000 00000 III eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 eooo 0000 III 00000 III 000 III eooo 000 III eooo 0000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 00000 III DII III 0000 III eooo 120 e 25 66 132 and well 2n 92 54 95 55 53 vees 53 53 53 s 53 552 66 ins 53 eeen 52 71 115 e 132 3 ee D7 e 22 38 67 idi 5 35 132 165 31 46 4
46. 31 enn 47 90 38 7 8 26 28 12 22 4 22 103 130 132 121 38 51 52 57 96 1 een 39 40 54 56 61 71 77 81 91 92 115 116 126 137 sisi 138 22 18 22 48 106 10 40 77 eooo eooo III III III III 00000 III eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo III III 0000 III III 00000 III 00000 III III 0000 III IXIIII 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 6000 00000 00000 III III eooo 000000 000000 0000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 eooo III III 0000 eooo III 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 III III eooo eooo 00000 III III 0000 eooo III eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo 39 39 s 39 39 s 39 39
47. III eooo eooo eooo 00000 III 00000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo III 00000 III eooo 0000 eooo III 0000 III eooo 000000 000000 0000000 000000 32 33 33 32 33 33 33 32 33 33 32 33 33 32 84 88 88 88 88 85 86 87 87 87 86 86 III eooo eooo eooo III eooo 0000 eooo eooo III III III eooo eooo eooo 0000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 eooo 00000 III III eooo 00000 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 eooo 0000 0000 III 00000 0000 III III 00000 III 000 eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 III eooo III III III III eooo eooo eooo 0000
48. JE TE HET Undo Reset EQ Ch 1 Ctrlez B Reda Ctrl Shift 2 Eezet Ch 3 1 E Open Save As Cut Copy Paste RECORD Note Right click in the box to open an edit menu This menu provides options to Undo Redo Open Save Cut Copy Paste and Reset the channel EQ status YY Compressor On Off e Highlight the Compressor button C to turn the compressor on Ch 1 Gate On Off e Highlight the Gate button G to turn the gate on Phase e Highlight Phase button to invert the channel polarity 180 D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 45 Digital Trim The digital trim is a gain stage that allows you to adjust the input level to the channel before the channel DSP This can be useful for tracks that were recorded at a very low level The blue bar above the Compressor Gate EQ and Phase buttons graphically indicates the digital trim level While adjusting digital trim the track number window below the Auxes displays the digital trim level MERTE METERS TRACK IMG AUSES 1 1 1 5 5 CUE LEVEL 1 GUE PAN ECORD MRTE Click and drag left or right to change the trim level Control click to set trim level to unity Right click and drag to copy trim level across multiple channels Level To Tape The red bar above the Digital Trim indicates Level To Tape Click
49. OO OOO D amp B CONSOLE SHIPPING D8B Manual e Chapter 1 page 18 Updating Software Software upgrades can easily be downloaded from the Mackie website at www mackie com Find the D8B section and select Downloads Always read the Release notes that accompany the software downloads They contain valuable infor mation specific to the current software revisions and install procedures Windows based Computers Follow these steps if you are downloading onto a Windows based computer 1 Download the ZIP files d8b5xxxx PC zip for the operating system installation and the 2 Plug in Demo Kit ServicePack2 zip for the plug ins installation 2 Werecommend that you update the operating system first Double click on the d8b5xxxx_PC zip file This will launch the WinZip self extraction utility 3 The default Unzip To directory is set to CX If you prefer to have the files extracted to a different location type the path into the provided text box and then press the Unzip button Quit the WinZip self extraction utility 4 Locate the three extracted files labeled d8b5xxxx Install 1 d8b5xxxx Install 2 686 and d8b5xxxx Install 3 exe on your hard drive 5 Double click on the first file d8b5xxxx Install 1 exe and you ll see WinImage Self Extractor dialog box 6 Ensure that the Writing On Floppy check box is selected then click the OK button in the upper ri
50. procedures under Windows in the upper menu bar to upgrade the UFX cards that are installed in the 1282 see page 86 Macintosh Computers Follow these steps if you are downloading onto a Mac OS computer 1 Download the self extracting file d8b5xxxx Mac hqx for the operating system installation and the D8B Plug in Demo Kit Plugin Service Pack2 sea for the plug ins installation 2 We recommend that you update the operating system first Double click on the d8b5xxxx Mac hqx file to extract the three disk images 3 Launch Apple s DiskCopy utility you may need to download the DiskCopy utility from http www apple com or check the system installations disks that came with your system 4 Depending on your version of DiskCopy either click the Load Image File button or choose Make a Floppy from the Utilities menu 5 Locate the image file labeled d8b5xxxx Install img that was extracted onto your hard drive 6 DiskCopy will prompt you depending on your version of DiskCopy to insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive With older versions of Disk Copy you may need to click the Make a copy button first 7 Oncethe disk has been ejected from the computer be sure to label your disk so you know which is 1 2 and 3 Then follow steps 4 through 6 to create the second and third installation disks from the second and third disk image files d8b5xxxx Install 2 img d8b5xxxx Install 3 img 8 With the
51. 0000000 eooo eooo 000 eooo 000 eooo eooo 0000 III 00000 III III III eooo III III 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo III eooo 0000 III 0000 III eooo 0000 III eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III III eooo eooo 00000 eooo eooo 0000 III 0000 0000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000 000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo 0000 III III 000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eins 23 2B sse enn 11 16 77 en 76 s 16 suns I5 e 16 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 eooo 0000 eooo III III III III 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 0000000 4 eooo eooo 0000 eooo 0000 III DII III III
52. 044402 94041U0 A P 9U 4E N Lxnv zxnv Xnv vxnv sxnv 9xnv SOIL naa eav 0 1 z O R gt Olan 5 ane 021946 RIPEIDE R 20840988 ovali 3dVl OL 3dVl OL 3dVl OL eco _ ul oipne lt E 1no 81110 sna Optional AlO Cards 49p4022 49 Z pZ 9299999999999 OOOOOOOOOOOO 111 fi Wa 2060090060080 GY GD NE 501 LL 4 ae oo w 149 24002 Jo 42a IdIN 088 Manual e Chapter 4 e page 111 1 a E 4 5 E 4 4 E 4 E E L E L 4 4 1 4 4 4 L 5 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 E 4 4 E L E i 5 1 4 E 5 Effects Plug ins MFX UFX Before we look at more setup examples lets cover some quick tips on efficient use of the Digital 8eBus plug ins Follow these easy steps to use the Digital 8eBus internal plug ins No
53. 5 Compr Gate Busses Phase 2 Entire Channel Cancer kan Removes all automation data globally for the selected channels and the selected categories This action can be undone as long as it remains avallable in the History List Plug in automation is cleared by removing the plug in from its assigned slot Clear Edit History Removes all items from the History window This action cannot be undone Copy selected channels LE mix to 2 Bus 1 amp 2 e Bus 3 amp 4 e Bus5 amp 6 e Bus 7 amp 8 Unassign from LR Mix Copies the current L R mix to a pair of buses Selections include Bus 1 amp 2 Bus 3 amp 4 Bus 5 amp 6 or Bus 7 amp 8 Check Unassign from LR Mix to remove the selected channels from the L R Mix and copy to the selected bus pair Play From Selection Ctrl Space This action starts playback of the onboard D8B transport from the start time entered in the Mix Editor start time window Select All Ctrl A Operates on list type windows Snapshot Locator MIDI Map etc to select all list items for deletion D8B Manual gt Chapter 3 gt page 55 The Channel Menu The Channel menu contains e Channel List Ctrl B e Open Channel e Save Channel As e Group Ctrl G e Ungroup e Channel Link Ctrl L e Unlink Ctrl U e Faders to Unity Ctrl e Faders to Off Ctrl e Adjust Channel Delay e Reset Channel Delay e Reset Selected
54. Cards u eai 101 Checklist for Basic Operational Functionality 102 Connecting Analog Multitrack s 102 Connecting ADAT Lightpipe Multitrack s 102 Connecting TASCAM TDIF Multitrack s 103 Multitrack Recording 104 105 Sample Tracking 108 SSC esos atero E 110 lo Tia 112 Dynamics and EQ Applications 114 MIDI and the 115 Word Clock and the D8B The Kitchen 116 Dither To UV22 or Not to UV22 That Is the Question ssssssssssscsssssesssnssesesssssssssssssescersesssnnsscessesnsssssssesesesn 119 ap VP S 120 125 Connecting the Digital 8eBus to BRC and ADATS 126 Connecting the Digital 8 to Using an External Sync Box 128 Connecting the 130 Digital Audio Workstation Setup 132 134 O
55. Combines the left and nght channels to a monaural signal and sends it to the left and nght Control Room outputs Near Field or Main This provides for a quick check on the sound of the mix in mono NEAR FIELD button Turns on the Control Room Near Field output MAIN button Turns on the Control Room Main output Note The Near Field and Main speaker selections cannot both be on at the same time SPEAKER LEVEL V Pot e Adjusts the individual level of the selected Control Room output Near Field or Main e This control does not affect the level sent to the Phones Cue or Master L R mix outputs e Near Field and Main levels are completely independent of one another unless linked to gether in the Mix Options of the on screen Setup window Link Speakers 6 When linked the level control is identical for Near Field and Main The link can be temporarily broken by pressing the Shift key and adjusting the Speaker Level V Pot This is an excellent way to set a fixed level offset between monitor sets e Controls the Master Surround Monitor output when in Surround mode DIM button Quickly attenuates the control room monitors This is very useful for phone calls or visits from the neighborhood volume cop Note The amount of attenuation for the DIM button can be changed in the GUI by selecting Mix Opt in the Setup window Selection choices include 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB and inf dB Cut TALKBACK button Routes th
56. Gate MIDI Enable can also be turned on and off via external MIDI note commands ACTIVE e Click the ACTIVE button to turn on the gate for the selected channel MENU e Click the MENU button to Open Save Reset Undo Cut Copy and Paste a Gate patch MEM A B e Each MEMory stores the most recent MEM A or MEM B EQ settings made for the selected channel e Click either of these memory positions to instantly recall the stored settings e deal for making quick A B comparisons between gate settings Note Meter View and Meter Mode are not stored in the MEM A or MEM B settings Additional Fat Channel Controls CHANNEL SELECT gt Use the arrows on either side of the channel number or the arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll up or down through the D8B channels e Click in the Chan Select window for a pull down of all the channels CHANNEL NAME e This displays the channel name gt Double click on the name to highlight it then type in the new channel name up to 16 characters Press Enter or click elsewhere to complete the operation ASSIGNMENT e Assign the channel to the main L R bus or any of the 8 bus outputs D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 88 CHAN SELECT ALI Dll TRIM CHANNEL NAME ASSIGNMENT PHASE PRE CSP INSERT FRTCH POST DSF INSERT PATCH INPUT DYNAMICS KEY EQ IN ROUTE TO TAPE e Assign the channel to a tape output e Highlight the desired numbers to send the c
57. LJ If levels on the multitrack appear too hot or cold adjust level with the LEVEL TO TAPE control Select TRACKING LEVEL This sets the channel V Pots to adjust the D8B output level to tape Set levels in headphone system for musicians Aux 9 10 and 11 12 are perfect for stereo headphone sends It s often convenient for the musicians to at first monitor the L R mix in the cue section PHONES CUE MIX 1 and 2 Once the initial L R mix is established copy it to the appropriate cue then customize for individual monitoring needs 45 46 47 48 RECORD kEcoRD RECORD EOLO Mure m MUTE Ch45 0846 Ch4 Ch 48 I METERS m m E 0 ni n us n Tow D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 106 Adjust headphone monitor volume in the PHONES CUE MIX section PHONES CUE MIX 1 PHONES CUE MIX 2 8 0 AUX 9 10 COPY MIX TO CUE AUX 9 10 COPY MIX TO CUE C AUX 11 12 CONTROL ROOM AUX 11 12 CONTROL ROOM LEVEL LEVEL Adjust channel aux levels to onboard or outboard effects from Fader Bank 2 TAPE IN Fost frost Fost Fosr Verify that Master Output is connected to the mixdown machine The mix should be arriving at the mixdown recorder It s good to check this as part of your tracking process At the conclusion of a session the artist will probably want to take a rough mix for evaluation yo
58. Post DSP Inserts Plugin Chain Bus Send the Input Signal to the Aux Bus 1 Send a signal to a D8B mixer input channel MIC LINE or TAPE IN 2 Assign the input channel V Pot GUI Control Pot to an aux send We have chosen AUX 4 according to the example above 3 Use the AUX 4 control to adjust the input level to the plug in GUI Control Fot Assigned to AUX 4 Remember to select an aux send before using the V pot or GUI Control Pot on the mixer input channel MIC LINE or TAPE IN You will see the plug in s input meter become active as you raise the mixer input channel s aux send Set the plug in input output signal levels as you would with any effect so the meter reaches its upper most range every so often always trust your ears first This can be accomplished from the console or GUI 2 gt D8B Manual e Appendices page 156 Pre Fader and Post Fader Auxiliary Sends Normally effect sends are post fader so the signal sent to the effect follows the program level in the mix Occasionally you may wish to feed an effect from a pre fader source so that the signal level from the aux control is independent of the channel fader position Aux sends are selectable pre or post fader globally all Aux 1 s for instance from the Mix Options screen in the Setup window or individually on a channel by channel basis either from the channel strip or the Fat Channel In the channel str
59. e MEX Mackie Effects card with two stereo processors e UFX Universal DSP engine with functions dependent on specific plug in effects Each card is capable of four discrete mono two ste reo or one stereo and two mono effects 5 gt gt L R Mix Channel Pre or Post Insert Buses 1 8 and Plugin Chain in addition to the Aux sends 1 12 internally route to the four card locations Using the configurable plug in architecture insert plug in capability is available for chan nels 1 48 Pre and Post DSP Buses 1 8 and Main Mix L R Effects return to the main L R mix at Fader Bank 3 via FX 1 16 Reminder Power down the system before installing any cards Master Input Output Section BUS Ed SURROUNL J MASTER OUT 74 2 TRACK IN A PHONES 2 e e e e SS SS 0 T lt ZN ZN 14 iw MASTER OUT 9 MASTER OUTputs 1 4 TRS and XLR e Fed from the Master L R fader on the console surface e Both sets deliver balanced line level signals However the TRS Master Outputs also pro vide unbalanced line level signals e Post fader DSP and D A converter BUS OUT 1 8 SURROUND OUT e 25 pin D sub connector provides eight bal anced line level outputs Any channel 1 48 internal effects return or ALT IN can be assigned to one or more bus outputs In Stereo Mode Output level is controlled by the BUS 1 8 MASTERS
60. e When this option is checked source channel faders control the level to the tape outputs 1 24 When this option is not checked level to tape outputs 1 24 are adjusted by selecting LEVEL TAPE in the V Pot Assign section and adjusting the channel V pots Use V3 Style EQ e When checked the D8B uses the version 3 0 EQ algorithm for channels 1 48 This allows complete backward compatibility with 3 0 sessions e When not checked the new and improved v5 1 EQ algorithm is used Calibrate e This operation resets the minimum and maximum fader values for the OS e For optimum performance and positioning response the fader calibration may be used periodically The calibration takes a few minutes to perform its routine so take a break will ya Caution Do not touch the faders during the calibration procedure Doing so could damage the servo motors Note This procedure is only available from the Mix Options Setup window on the screen D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 70 Dim Amount e This sets the amount of attenuation for the DIM button in the Control Room section e Choose from 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB and inf dB Cut Surround ET MI PIT Surround FTP Server Surround Mode Bus 1 8 Assign Macros Stereo Mode Setup Options mute surround monitor outputs E enable surround monitor outputs Surround Mode e This pull down list provides access to the various surround Sound mode
61. with a range from 100 Hz to 10 kHz Mid Q This adjusts the bandwidth of the frequencies affected by the parametric EQ It is a unit less measure with a range from 0 1 to 10 A low Q setting provides a very tight bandwidth less than an octave and a high Q setting provides a very wide bandwidth covering several octaves Effects Type Click on the TYPE control to select the type of effect you want to use Reverb This uses a room reverberation algorithm that provides the following controls Size This adjusts the time between reflec tions to simulate different room sizes It is cali brated in meters m with a range from 3 0 m small to 40 0 m large Decay This adjusts the amount of time that reflections continue to propagate A live room will have a longer decay time than a dead room It is calibrated in seconds s with a range from 0 0 seconds to 2 0 seconds PreDelay This adjusts the amount of delay between the dry audio signal and the start of the D8B Manual e Appendices page 158 wet reverberant signal Adjusting this control can provide better separation and definition to the dry signal It is calibrated in milliseconds ms with a range from 0 ms to 299 ms 0 3 seconds Diffusion This controls the increase in echo density over time in the reverberant signal The higher the diffusion setting the higher the echo density This is a unit less measure with a range from 0 to 10 Damping This contro
62. 00000 eooo eooo 00000 III 000 eooo 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 1 0 Cards Include Automation Insert Insert Global Time Insert New Cue Insert New Event Insert Time Installation and Connection of Optional 1 0 and E Installation of FX Cards Installation of 1 0 Cards Intelligent Harmony Internal Sample Rates Inverse Pan Linking Inverse Switch Toggling IP Address IVL Vocal Studio Control Mode Manual Pitch Shift Reverb SmartChord SmartKey Edit Harmony Ensemble Detune Envelope Gender Interval Key Scale Pan PitchBend Range Portamento Scoop 22 99 55 22 23 48 49 68 89 108 114 137 155 9 82 seis 82 55 99 100 101 144 sadi io 99 san 144 145 145 149 145 150 150 145 149 145 149 145 145 147 145 145 147 145 146 145 148 145 147 148 148 145 148 00000 eooo III III III 00000 III eooo 000000 III eooo 00000 000 III eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 00000 0000 0000 eooo eooo
63. 000000 00000 0000 III 0000 III III III 210 eooo 0000 eooo 0000 III eooo eooo 000000 0000000 000000 4 eooo eooo 0000 III eooo 0000 III 0000 III III eooo 0000 III 0000000 000000 eoccee 000000 eooo 000 III eooo 0000 D8B Manual e Appendices page 185 Lock Error 118 Lock Snapshot Locked Loop Button Low Freq Effect Low Frequency Effect eooo eooo 0000 III III eooo III 57 118 III eooo 0000 III eooo eooo 000000 eee 000000 000000 000000 eooo III III III 0000 III 0000 III 00000 Macintosh Mackie Effects Mackie Real Time OS About Magnify Tool Main Button Marshall Electronics Massenburg Master Fader Master Fader Bank Select Section EFFECTS Master L R Fader MASTERS MIC LINE TRACK SHIFT TAPE IN MONITOR Master Input Output Section Master Insert L R Master L R Button Master L R Shortcuts Section
64. 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000 00000 eooo III III 10 eooo 0000 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 00000 eooo 0000 00000 III III III eooo eooo 0000 eooo e 62 2 2 60 uin 62 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo III eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 37 61 78 89 13 90 89 90 e 90 90 iun 89 e 158 35 68 99 180 27 ina 33 8 22 45 88 24 ev 34 M dns 34 sss 34 4 Pan Pan Ball Panning Window Ctrl 7 Divergence Low Freq Effect Pan Ball Speaker Select Parametric EQ Paste Button Paste Channels Ctrl V PDIe8 PFL PFL Solo Button Phantom Power Phase Phones 1 and 2 Phones Cue Mix Section Aux 9 10 and 11 12 CONTROL ROOM button COPY MIX TO LEVEL V Pot 00000 IIl III 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo III 00000 III
65. 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 00000 III 0000 Hard Disk Hard Drive HDR24 96 Highlighter Tool History List Window Ctrl Y Hooking Stuff Up Horizon Music Inc Hosa Technology Inc Hot Keys HR824 HUI Layer HUI Layer Control Mapping Cubase SX DP3 Nuendo Pro Tools Soundscape HUI Mode 80 52 38 51 52 57 wo 120 80 92 m 180 180 e 66 ee 96 29 168 aso 172 e 174 170 168 116 62 4 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo III eooo III eooo 00000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 000000 0000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000 0000 III III eooo 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 00000 III eooo III eooo III eooo 00000 eooo 0000 eooo 0000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 00000 III 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo
66. 2 99 39 39 40 40 40 40 40 40 woe 40 40 40 40 61 wee 62 62 62 9 55 78 37 61 139 142 III III III eooo Transport Section ENTER LOCATOR LOOP Number Buttons 0 9 POSITION display RANGE display SET TIME SMPTE VIEW SNAPSHOT STORE Transport Controls FAST FWD JOG amp SHUTTLE PLAY RECORD REWIND Rotary Dial Encoder STOP Transport Sub menu One Button Punch Record Safe Use Pre Roll Trim Trim Levels Troubleshooting Guide III 0000 III eooo III II 0000 III eooo 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 00000 0000 eooo eooo 00000 eooo 0000 00000 III III eooo eooo eooo III eccee 000000 eee 000000 eooo eooo 00000 0000 III III eooo eooo 0000 III eooo eooo 0000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 III III eooo eooo eooo III III eooo 0000 eooo III 000000 000000 000000
67. 81 79 82 81 81 81 82 saniar Bl 69 78 0 0 2 3 44 77 115 III 00000 0000 eooo 0000 00000 0000 III III III eooo 000000 0000000 4 000000 4 0000 III III 0000 III III III III III III eooo 0000 eooo IXIIII 000000 0000000 000000 000000 III III 00000 III 00000 eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo III III 0000 III 000000 000000 000000 eooo III eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 00000 III IIl IIl III eooo 0000 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 0000 00000 eooo 0000 III 00000 eooo III 00000 0000000 000000 000000 eoo 000000 eooo III eooo eooo 0000 III eooo III 00000 III eooo III
68. ADATs 1 On the front panel of the ADAT select DIGITAL IN BRC 1 Set the External Sync parameters to the following a Press the EDIT button b Set the Clock Source to 48KHz Input c Set the Locate Reference to Internal d Press the EDIT button to exit the Edit External Sync page e Make sure the EXT SYNC button 15 still lit 2 Press the EDIT button and the GEN SYNC button twice to bring up the MIDI page Set the parameter to MTC Press the EDIT button to exit out of the Edit Generate Sync page Leave the GENERATE SYNC button lit Notes 1 You must turn on the Digital 8eBus first then turn on the ADATS 2 Make sure the DIGITAL 1 0 button on the BRC is not lit 3 Underthe MIDI UTIL button on the BRC make sure 1 MIDI Echo is off and 8 Output Rew FF is off This is so the faders don t run at high speed when shuttling around on your 48 KHz IN 22 with lt REMOTE OUT termination MIDI OUT TO ADAT ADAT XT MASTER DECK TRACKS 1 8 ADAT XT SLAVE DECK TRACKS 9 16 1 99 999 LOCATE PL Y DIGITAL E IN OUT IN OUT W ADAT XT SLAVE DECK oo TRACKS 17 24 e9o9o999909090990909099099090909909909099999 94 09909090909909 9 9 9 9 9 9090909090909090990909 99 0 ooo oP ot ooo oo o oo o
69. Basic UFX Use Procedure Open the Plugin Configuration window select the desired Stereo or Mono MODE status Change status by simply clicking on the current MODE status button Click and hold in the plug in list to open the drop down list of available plug ins Drag to select the desired plug in from the PLUGIN menu Once a UFX plug in is selected the plugin specific inputs become available in the INPUT menu Click and hold on the input to open a drop down menu Drag to select the desired input Open the selected plug in window by clicking the SLOT buttons to the left of each active input Verify audio send to the plug in at the input meter and that the plug in is ON Manually set up the desired effect or select from effects presets Click and hold on the Destination box to open a drop down menu Drag to select the desired output See Appendix C Plug in Configuration and Routing for more information and examples Shortcut to Plug in Windows Plug in windows can be opened and closed from the keyboard by using a combination of the shift number and Alt keys Plug in windows correspond to the active input slots in the Plugin Configuration window To open and close plug in windows for SLOTS 1 9 press Alt 1 9 To open and close plug in windows for SLOTS 10 16 press Alt Shift 0 6 Plug ins Selector Toggle between Windows menu selections and Plug ins menu selections by clicking the 1 4 TRS icon on the far left
70. Channel display Enables the Master Fader and Aux Masters status to be included in the Set Default Levels prompt or in the clipboard operations Master INSERT L R Allows any plug in to be patched into the main mix outputs simply choose the desired plug ins from the list that pops up when mouse clicking the INSERT icon This is a post master fader insert Finali INSERT L Finali INSERT MASTER HRITE RECORD 127 SOLO HUTE Ch 25 RECORD leil EELECT Ch 5 Signal Path Flexibility The D8B v5 1 software provides extremely flexible routing options Selecting an insert on screen is exactly the same as patching from the signal path into an external effect then back through a patch bay or dedicated physical insert point Of course digital patching induces no extraneous noise crackles or degradation so in that way it s not like a patch bay at all A review of the signal path is helpful at this point Tape Line Mic Input A D Converter Pre Insert Channel Delay Digital Trim Phase Dynamics Inout Meter Gate Compressor Dynamics Output Meter EQ Post Insert yy Channel Metering nal Path INSERTS PRE Insert e Patch any plug in through this insert This is a great place to insert dynamic controls since the level is constant and unaffected by EQ dynamics or fader adjustments e S
71. DIGITAL OUT LEFT R D amp B OUTPUT SECTION X2 LEFT AND RIGHT MAIN INSERT R L MIXDOWN SOLO SENDS ONLY SOLOED CHANNELS lt ANAS XNV GNAS OL aNae 6 ANAS 9 1 UNAS 9 NIVIA J441 30106 10109 0105 144 YZ AdVL 01 6 AdVL 8 1 3dV 1 AES EBU DIGITAL OUT LEFT vl xw 7 MASTER FADER TO MAIN L R BUS R MAIN OUT LEFT R MAIN OUT LEFT R AUX 9 10 PHNS 1 LEFT PHNS 2 LEFT AUX 11 12 STUDIO OUT LEFT R NEARFIELD SPKR LEFT R MAIN SPKR LEFT R BUS 1 8 TAPE 1 8 TAPE 9 16 TAPE 17 24 ALT I O L 25 lt PH 1 LEVEL lt 2 LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL gt lt 0 lt 0 1 MONO LEFT TO SOLO BUS 1 12 CTRL RM PH2 1 12 PHONES SELECT CTRL RM TALKBACK TO STUDIO TALKBACK CONTROL ROOM SOLO CONTROL SURROUND MONITOR LEVELS MASTER DIG IN 1 co co LN p a C D a o 002 A E a lt 000000000000 0 I 220 TALA gt p A 2 1 n D 2 2 Q o o G oji 9 0 0 0 gt 2 ajo Y gt lt d gisis V N O 5 2 5 Q 5 2 p X X OE v Si ue A gt 5 Ix gt iu SH Oir a y gt 8 5 amp 2 5 S xi o gt e z S gt
72. Fader Bank 4 In Surround Mode Output level is controlled by the Surround Monitor Level controls in the surround window D8B Manual e Chapter 2 page 23 CR MAIN and CR NEAR FIELD Pairs of 1 4 TRS stereo line level outputs for sending signals to control room speakers Both outputs carry the same signal as selected in the Control Room section Levels can be adjusted independently or linked together Post DSP Master L R fader and D A converter The signal fed to these outputs is selected in the CONTROL ROOM section of the control surface PHONES 1 and 2 Each jack carries an unbalanced stereo signal through a 1 4 TRS jack Designed to connect to virtually any stereo headphones Phones 1 and 2 V Pots adjust to compensate for headphones with exception ally high or low impedances The signal at these outputs 15 determined by the PHONES CUE MIX 1 and PHONES CUE MIX 2 source selection on the control surface Aux 9 10 Aux 11 12 or the CONTROL ROOM selection can feed either or both Phones Cue outputs The Master L R mix can be copied to either or both Aux 9 10 or 11 12 Cue Mixes STUDIO OUT L R signal at these outputs is determined by the CONTROL ROOM source selection Balanced analog stereo paired outputs for sending signals to the studio 1 4 TRS outputs can drive a balanced or un balanced input Level controlled by the V Pot in the SOLO STUDIO section of the control surface when STUDIO LEVEL is
73. If you are using the Vocal Studio in Stereo output mode you will want to mix your voices using the Vocal Studio volume controls Pan Now the sliders are going the other way The pan controls are used to place your harmony voices in a stereo field Just as with the volume controls you will want to set your pan controls differently depending on which output mode you are using When in QUAD output mode PAN is not available to edit Instead you control the pan on their dedicated aux returns D8B Manual e Appendices page 147 Styles VOCAL STUDIO Harmony Pitch Correction amp Reverb ELI e ae CONTROL MODE Menu Vibrato adds another level of human quality to the harmony voices The majority of singers use some amount of vibrato Basically Vibrato is like the modulation wheel on a keyboard which modulates a harmony voice s pitch by a small amount The Vibrato presets are based on the amount of modulation the rate of the modulation and when the 1 modulation starts no vibrato low depth medium rate with onset delay Medium medium depth medium rate with onset delay Heavy high depth medium rate with onset delay Light amp Fast low depth fast rate with onset delay Med amp Fast medium depth fast rate with onset delay PitchShift ON 517 SmartChord SmartKey HARMONY ENSEMBLE Ensemble Interval dd 1 PROCESSOR MODE Gender Timing Scoop Harmony Off Off i Detune
74. Punch only the parameter that moves according to automation filter settings Punch Faders Mutes and Pans according to automation filter settings everything else punches as Auto Touch if automation filter ALL is enabled Punch only the parameter that moves according to automation filter settings but no automation is recalled during playback punch run Punch Faders Mutes and Pans according to automation filter settings everything else punches as Auto Touch if automation filter ALL is enabled but no automation is recalled during playback punch run D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 140 Appendices D8B Manual e Appendices e page 141 Appendix A Service Warranty Service Details concerning Warranty Service are spelled out on the Warranty Card included with your console if the card is missing let us know and we ll rush one to you If you think your console has a problem please do everything you can to confirm it before calling for service including reading through the Troubleshooting section of this owner s manual Doing so might save you from deprivation of your console and the associated suffering Of all Mackie products returned for service which is hardly any at all roughly 50 are coded CND Could Not Duplicate which usually means the problem lay somewhere else in the system Repair Service for the U S versions of our digital consoles is available only from our factory located in sunn
75. _ w iar a n I mem 8 M LLL MA p senes ase MENSIS neon n Assign L R Shift Add eo Route To Shifts to second function of some buttons Used to select multiple values of some parameters Save Nuendo Session Automation auto Enable Fader N A D8B Manual Appendices page 170 e D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For Nuendo D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments Nuendo Function 38 m Tim Auto Mode Trim Won t work with snap Won t work with snap The key pad works Nuendo Locate point number on Keypad Press enter to store the number as a new locate point with D8B with snap Press Locator to recall the numbered located point shot button pressed The Enter key works Enter B with D8B WR inan Press to set L Locator to current position shot button pressed 40 41 D8B Keypad HUI D8B key pad Enter Loop Loop Won t work with snap shot button pressed Toggle Nuendo Loop Playback The Store key works with D8B with snap shot button pressed Store gt lt Alt Store Won t work with 45 Locator Decimal Bi Type Nuendo Locate point number on Keypad Press Locator to recall the numbered
76. adjustable feedback path for a multiple echo effect The stereo delay has the following controls Left and Right Delay This adjusts the amount of time between the original signal and the delayed signal It is calibrated in milliseconds ms with a range from 0 ms to 799 ms 0 8 seconds Notice that the stereo delay effect has precisely one half the amount of delay available per channel as the mono delay Left and Right Feedback This adjusts the amount of signal that is fed back to the input of the delay It is calibrated in percent with a range from 096 to 9996 Rolloff This adjusts the cutoff frequency for rolling off the feedback signal It is calibrated in Hertz Hz with a range from 500Hz to ZOkHz It also has a Flat position which bypasses the control Ping Pong This effect is the same as stereo delay with the exception that the left feedback is directed to the right delay input and the right feedback is directed to the left delay input In this way the delayed signal echo bounces back and forth between the left and right channels Chorus The chorus effect generates a mono or stereo simulated chorus of voices It has the following controls Depth This adjusts the depth of the chorus modulation for all the voices It is calibrated in milliseconds ms with a range from 0 ms to 10 0 ms Delay This adjusts the amount of time between the original signal and all the generated chorus voices It is calibrated in mil
77. aux send levels e Assign the channel V Pots to control individual channel trim or tracking output levels 1 24 Ji LEVEL TO TAPE DIGITAL TRIM E 0 AUX 1 AUX 2 0 0 AUX 3 AUX 4 0 0 AUX 5 AUX 6 0 0 AUX 7 AUX 8 9 10 gt 2 gt 2 D8B Manual e Chapter 2 page 0 AUX 1 8 Buttons Default Operation This description highlights the default configuration for aux sends and effects returns Keep in mind that the new D8B plug in architecture provides maximum flexibility and awesome creative capabilities with respect to plug ins aux sends and returns Pressing any Aux 1 8 assigns channel V Pots to control individual send levels to AUX 1 8 output Each Aux 1 8 is simultaneously routed to the corresponding 1 4 jack on the rear of the console and to an internal effects processor Patching from the Aux 1 6 jacks does not inter rupt the signal flow to the internal processors Each Aux 1 8 acts as a mono send to a stereo internal effects processor MFX card only UFX cards offer complete flexibility Auxes patched to the IVL Vocal Studio effects return to four channels either in stereo pairs second pair is the reverb return or as four separate channels AUX 9 10 and 11 12 Configured differently than Auxes 1 8 Each channel has a stereo pair of controls one level and one pan This is ideal for phones cue mixes or for an additional record ing feed in
78. deck to implement MMC transport commands and track arming for up to three DA 38 machines For the DA 88 You must have an SY 88 card installed in each DA 88 to implement MMC transport commands and track arming for up to three DA 88 machines The SY 88 cards also provide SMPTE chase lock operation Alternately an MMC 38 MIDI Machine Control interface may be used prior to the SYNC IN connector on the master deck to implement MMC transport commands and track arming for up to three DA 88 machines 3 Connect a BNC cable from the first DIOe8 Tape 1 8 card s SYNC connector to the WORD SYNC IN connector on the master deck 4 Connect MIDI cables between the MIDI OUT connector on the Digital 8eBus Remote CPU and the MIDI IN connector on the MMC 38 or SY 88 on the master deck and between the MIDI IN connector on the Digital 8eBus Remote CPU and the MIDI OUT connector on the MMC 38 or SY 88 Settings MMC 38 1 Set SW2 DIP switches and 7 to the up position All other switches should be in the down position SY 88 1 DIP switches on the SY 88 are set internally The DIP switches labeled S2 assign the device ID numbers see the TASCAM SY 88 Owner s Manual for ID setup information TASCAM DA 38 DA 88 1 On the front panel of the TASCAM select WORD CLOCK as the clock source 2 Also on the front panel turn on the DIGITAL IN D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 0 3 Set the Machine ID on each recorder with the first d
79. e x ar zo 3 gt lt 9 iu 29 gt E 5 o x zz zz m 5 5 5 S 2 lt KA Vn gt lt i OD 5 a m u u lt gt gt m iu iu m 1 12 III SE BH AUX 9 AUX 11 12 LEVEL q 6 FX CARDS FROM BUS 6 L R MAIN INSERTS CH PRE POST DSP INSERT AUX TAP eL aNae GNAS OL aNae 6 9 1 81 1431 30106 10109 O10S 144 YZ AdVL 01 6 AdVL 8 1 AdVL D8B Manual gt Chapter 1 gt page 15 PLUG IN LO GL S ues sng g jeubiq subisag ILN indui O V MIL 8 Suunjey 80 4 sindul ueb Aun XEN 0 0 0 0 01 dn 66 66 SUL 0 i Ser ale u 1 UIEN xne gp zi up gp 2 dn DIDEIN gp ued xne 115 01 dn je e o dn 68 seuoud 2 OOotpnis ino 8 1 sng pues xny ued jouueuo O3 pueq p JossaJduioo 1 6 ued gp 01 dn 01 dn jana gp 6 dn dn jane gp oc 45416 gp oz 550 gp 6 indui 22 6
80. eooo 0000 eooo 0000 eooo III 0000 III eooo III eooo 000000 eooo 00000 III III eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 000000 4 000000 III III 0000 III eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo 0000 eooo 0000 eooo 0000 0000 eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo III 0000 III 0000 III III eooo eooo 000 eooo 0000 III eooo 0000 III ss 117 91 eooo 00000 eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 T DIF Talkback Talkback Level Button Talkback Mic Talkback to Studio Button Tape Tape Bank on Top Tape 0 Tape In Tape In Outs Tascam Clock TC Electronics TDIF TDIF Hookup to HDR24 96 DIO 8 Template TEMPO Tempo Map Theme Park Time Code Time Code From Playback Device To Tape Touch Auto Touch Track Sheet Ctrl T Tracking Level Tracking Setup Transport Controls 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 68 99 24 35
81. eooo eooo eooo III 0000 III eooo 0000 0000 III DD 66 Near Field Button Network Console Linking Automation Aux Strip Bus Assign Cue Controls Fader Banks Sample Rate Solo Logic Speakers Network Channel New Button New Event Alt N Load Target New Event Type New Event Type New Folder Ctrl N New Session Ctrl N New Snapshot Alt N Next Arrow Node Usage Noise Filter Note On Nudge Arrows Nuendo Number Buttons 0 9 0000 III 0000 III eooo 00000 III eooo ase OF 67 67 OF e 67 7 e 67 67 e 67 38 91 91 91 91 57 51 12 32 ss 81 T 1 25 93 81 165 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo III III eooo 0000 III eooo eooo eooo eooo III 0000 III eooo 0000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 III eooo 0000 00000 III III 00000 III eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 eooo eooo 0000 00000 0000 eooo eooo
82. freely adjust the parameter level and when the punch in point arrives to set the new level press the WRITE button on the channel and the parameter level will be written to the track At punch out two things will occur the parameter level jumps to any preexisting level on the track and the channel parameters now chase on subsequent playback You cycle through the modes by clicking on the Playback column in the specific channel s row From the console hold down an individual channel strip s SELECT button for 2 seconds and then press the SELECT button under the Playback mode to toggle between the Disabled Punch Run and Run states Shortcuts Note the previous click shortcut the last click has a memory if it was on a like parameter and copies the previous click setting to the next click Also you can click and swipe down the list to change the column to the value that s toggled by the click From the control surface or the keyboard press the CONTROL button or Ctrl key and the channel SELECT button simultaneously to enter or exit toggle Punch Run mode The red bank LED for Ch 25 48 above the SELECT button blinks to indicate Punch Run status Note The Disabled state does not automatically reengage itself Remember to toggle it to Playback status if you want automation moves to play once again Write This in an individual channel write safe function that is independent of the global Automation Bypass and Auto
83. or Paste all channel settings D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 76 MENU Undo Reset Surround Ch 7 Surround Menu commands are only active on pannable channels If a menu command is unavail able it will display in gray upon Menu activation Menu selections are not available in the Master Fader bank Undo e This feature is available to Undo cut copy paste arm and reset commands e As an added aid the Undo command specifies the target of its action e This feature does not undo changes in surround pan positioning Reset e Resets the selected channel to front center pan position e Deactivates all speaker selections e Sets Divergence status to 0 center pan routes to speaker 3 only in surround or equally to L R in stereo e Sets Low Freq Effect to 0 0 unity gain e Reset affects only the selected morph setting MEM A or MEM B e Channel settings that are reset are not stored on the Clipboard and therefore they are not available for Paste functions However a reset can be reversed by selecting Undo in the Surround sound window Menu or by pressing Ctrl Z Open Surround e This action opens the Surround Files folder where previously saved surround settings are stored e Highlight the desired setting and click Open or simply double click on the item to activate it for the selected channel Save Surround As e Enables archival of specific surround positions e Opens the Surround f
84. sequencer D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 69 Solo Latch e When Solo Latch is checked SOLO buttons remain engaged even when a new SOLO button is pressed e When Solo Latch is not checked new SOLO selections disengage previous SOLO selections e If Solo Latch is not set checkbox not selected multiple solos may be manually latched by either o pressing and holding another solo switch while initiating more solos or pressing multiple solos at one time o pressing and holding Shift while initiating more solo s To allow this operation set the Solo Latch checkbox in the Mix Options Setup window or press GENERAL in the Setup Section and under Solo select SOLO LATCH ON or OFF in the Fat Channel Display Link Speakers e When the Link Speakers checkbox is enabled the Mains and Near Field SPEAKER LEVEL control is linked Increasing or decreasing the SPEAKER LEVEL control simultaneously adjusts both the Near Field and the Main Control Room Output This provides a consistent level when A B ing between speaker sets The default option is an unlinked state e Holding down the Shift key and spinning the SPEAKER LEVEL V Pot temporarily breaks the link This can be used to establish a level offset between the two stereo output pairs The level difference is maintained in the same operational manner as linked channel parameter offsets The link offset may be updated at any time using the Shift key Faders to Tape
85. type a number and press Enter to store a snapshot Exit snapshot mode by pressing Snapshot or Enter p Alt Rewind i Return Cubase SX locator to beginning of Session Alt Fast Fwd End 51 Jog amp Shuttle Jog Shuttle Select 52 Jog Wheel Jog Wheel 53 Cut Zero Set Cut Other HUI Mode HUI Layer Notes Global Mode Global functions are always active when HUI Mode is on no matter what D8B bank is active Non global functions are active only when HUI Mode is On and the D8B is displaying the HUI Layer Fast Forward Cubase SX Transport N A Y Stop Cubase SX playback Y Start Cubase SX playback ss WW s 4 Y Start Recording in Cubase SX Press during playback to punch into record press again to punch out Y Control playback cursor position with wheel Rewind or Fast Forward N Cut selection event part E Copy selection event part Paste contents of clipboard N Press to undo previous command in Cubase SX edit history Supports multiple undos Normal HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays the normal HUI VFD screen exactly as a real HUI would The contents of the VFD depend on the DAW in use and other settings See notes on the VFD above Channel HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays eight channel names in bottom line of VFD First two VFD select buttons mirror the Channel L and Channel R functions The name of the selected channel function is displayed in the center of the top VFD line The Onli
86. 0000 eooo eooo III eooo 0000 III 000000 eoo 000000 000000 eooo eooo 0000 0000 eooo III III III eooo 0000 0000 III eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo 00000 III III 0000 III III eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo III eooo eooo eooo 0000 eooo III 00000 eooo eooo 0000 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 00000 00000 eooo III eooo eooo III III 00000 III 00000 eooo 00000 eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000 III III III III III III 0000 eooo III 145 148 145 148 145 148 145 M7 144 144 144 144 146 144 145 144 146 146 146 151 146 150 146 151 M6 151 144 144 144 wo 144 144 Styles Timing Vibrat
87. 0000 coh do interface DIGITAL 565 MASTER OUT MACI THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO COND 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIF DATA CABLE to Console HE CONCEIVED DESIGNED AND MANUFACTURED BY MACKIE DESIGNS INC WOODINVILLE WA USA MADE IN USA FABRIQUE AU USA gt COPYRIGHT 1997 p 4 THE FOLLOWING ARE TRADEMARKS OR REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF MACKIE DESIGN INC MACKIE DIGITAL SYSTEMS D8B AND THE RUNNING MAN FIGURE REMOTE CPU 9 K 9 0 ra 2 9 e 50 g 7 L E 6 20 44 E n 0 c c D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 133 Live Sound Live Recording Setup In a live sound recording application the console fader banks are chained together to form one large console With the addition of up to 24 more mic preamplifiers the tape inputs can be used to receive signal from any mic level or line level source The setups for live concert recording and live sound are similar Each involves mixing everything as you go moving faders or setting and selecting snapshots Whereas the live concert mix sends the final audio to the monitors and house sound system the live recording mix sends the final audio to the 2 track recorder and the
88. 000000 000000 000000 eooo 00000 eooo 0000 eooo 00000 III III III III III 000000 0000000 eooo eooo eooo III III eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 000000 4 000000 eooo III eooo III III III III 0000 III eooo 0000 00000 III eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 00000 III III eooo eooo III 0000 0000 III 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 0000 III eooo III III eooo eooo III eooo eooo 0000 III 000000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 eooo 0000 III eooo eooo eooo 00000 III eooo 0000 III 000000 0000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 III III 00000
89. 35 35 35 35 gt 35 35 isa 54 55 4 6 4 6 4 48 48 2 53 35 Channel Channel Notes Channel Select Channel Select Display Channel Strip Section Assign Channel Fader Channel Meters Channel V Pot Fader Bank Select LEDs Mic Line Button Mute Select Solo Trim Level Write Channel V Pot Channel View Channels 1 12 Inputs Channels 13 24 Inputs Checklist for Basic Operational Functionality Chorus Clear Automation Clear Edit History Clear Over Loads Clear Solo Clipboard Section COPY CUT ZERO SET PASTE UNDO Clock 1 0 Card Close All Ctrl Close Window ESC Colophon Commit Events Alt M Compatible Cables Compressor Compressor On Off Connecting a Mouse Keyboard and SVGA Monitor Connecting ADAT Lightpipe Multitrack s Connecting Analog Multitrack s Connecting TASCAM TDIF Multitrack s Connecting the D8B to TASCAM MDMs Connecting the Digital 8eBus to a BRC and Connecting the Digital 8eBus to ADATs Using an Ext Connections for ADAT Console Data Console Linking Continuous Controller Control Button Control Room Control Room Section 2 TRACK B and C DIGITAL IN 1 DIGITAL IN 2 DIM MAIN MASTER L R MONO NEAR FIELD SPEAKER LEVEL TALKBACK
90. 6 or 7 8 This is a very quick way to copy the MASTER L R mix including effects to the phones output which can then be easily fine tuned CONTROL ROOM button Assigns whatever is selected in the Control Room section to the Phones output Solos are also routed to the Phones output when Control Room is selected LEVEL V Pot Adjusts the Phones output level Control Room Section These buttons e Select the source for the control room outputs e Select Main or Nearfield control room outputs e Adjust the listening level coNrROL ROOM 2 TRACK A DIGITAL IN 1 2 TRACK B DIGITAL IN 2 2 TRACK C MASTER L R NEAR FIELD MAIN SPEAKERS DIM TALKBACK 2 TRACK A B and C buttons e Selects the signal at the 2 Track A B or C in put as the Control Room source e These inputs can be selected independently or together for simultaneous playback along with the MASTER L R button Note When DIGITAL IN 1 or DIGITAL IN 2 are selected MASTER L R and 2 TRACK inputs are unavailable DIGITAL IN 1 button Selects the AES EBU digital input as the Control Room source when AES EBU is the Stereo I O Digital In selection in the Digital I O Setup window DIGITAL IN 2 button Selects the S PDIF digital input as the Control Room source when S PDIF is the Stereo I O Digital In selection in the Digital I O Setup window MASTER L R button Selects the main L R output bus as the Control Room source MONO button
91. Button Faders Faders to Off Ctrl Faders to Tape Faders to Unity Ctrl Faders Window Ctrl 8 TAPE Bank on top Fast Fwd Button Fat Channel Fat Channel Display Fat Channel Section COMPRESSOR EQ Fat Channel Display GATE LOAD PATCH MEMORY A and B NEXT ON Button PLUG INS PREVIOUS SAVE PATCH SETUP V Pots and SELECT buttons Fat Channel Window Ctrl 6 Assignment Aux Sends Channel Name Channel Select Compressor Attack MEM MENU ON Output Ratio 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 eooo 0000 III III 0000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 ooo III 0000 III eooo 00000 6000 III III III III 7 26 29 29 29 28 28 37 27 37 42 61 78 89 59 48 62 70 002 59 90 90 40 7 III eooo 0000 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III 0006 III III eooo eooo eooo 00000 III eooo eooo 00000 000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 0000 0000
92. Channels e Reset Channel Layout e Select Fader Bank Alt A e Select All Faders Alt Shift A e Channel Notes Ctrl Shift T Channel Options Plugins Windows Channel List Ctrl B Open Channel Save Channel As Group BM UnGroup 4 Channel Link Unlink Ctrl U Faders to Unity Faders to OFF Adjust Channel Delay Reset Channel Delay 1 Reset Selected Channels 1 Reset Channel Layout Select Fader Bank Alt A 1 Select All Faders Alt Shift A Channel Notes Ctri Shift T Let s take a quick look at each menu item Channel List Ctrl B e slala 9 E ses e oe T Ea ms ma sms me fo foro mo afore fa ose ma oss mm mo mee Rm ma 0 ma ma 0 ma as o ma D8B Manual gt Chapter 3 gt page 56 e Allows for quick and easy setting of global channel parameters e Change the channel name e Easily set groups e Set playback status to Run Punch Run or Disabled e Solo isolate channels e Quickly set channel links e Setindividual channel delays of up to 255 samples see Adjust Channel Delay on page 59 e Turn digital filter on or off to eliminate analog channel noise Playback Allow
93. Ctrl V Delete Events DEL Set Default Levels Modify Levels Alt M Insert Time Delete Time Insert Global Time Delete Global Time Clear Automation Clear Edit History Copy Mix To Bus Play From Selection Ctrl Space Select All Ctrl A D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 53 File Edit Channel Options Plugins Undo Ctri z Redo Ctri 5hift Z Cut Channels Ctri X Copy Channel s Ctrl C Paste Channels Ctri Delete Events DEL set Default Levels MIndify Levels Insert Time Delete Time Insert Global Time Delete Global Time Clear Automation Clear Edit History Copy Mix To Bus Play From Selection Ctri Space Select All Crha Let s take a quick look at each menu item Undo Ctrl Z e Reverses an action If you ve made a bad automation pass cut something you didn t really want cut pasted somewhere you didn t want to paste etc simply select Undo and the D8B reverts to its previous status e Selecting Undo multiple times steps back through the history list list of actions taken all the way back to the Top Level starting point if necessary Open the History List Ctrl H to check it out Redo Ctrl Shift Z e Reverses an Undo If you ve undone an action or set of actions you might determine that your original guess was best e Redo is a multilevel command like Undo so multiple redo commands retrace your steps thr
94. DAW via the MIDI interface When HUI mode is active and the HUI layer is on screen you will see that the eight File Edit Channel Options Plugins Windows HUI Mode ON Automation OFF right most channel faders and the master fader are all that are active This is because HUI s MIDI mapping only provides for eight active channels at a time but the Bank and Channel scroll buttons allow you to move back and forth across fader channels on the DAW mixing window The Chan nel buttons scroll one channel at a time and the Bank buttons scroll eight channels at a time Click the question mark button in the upper right corner of the screen and a map of the control section of the D8B appears on the left side of the screen with numerical references over many of the buttons and a list of the HUI control functions provided by each button At the end of this appendix we have provided a chart showing how each of these buttons controls specific functions for several of the most popular DAWs supporting the HUI Memory 60479K Session Startup 10 26 4M Aux Mute Bank Right Channel Left 2 Channel Right 3 Pan 4 Hold Shift and press Masters to go to the HUI 5 Assi uto Enable Plugin uto En Send Mute uto Mode Off uto Enable Fader uto Enable Mute 0 Record Shuttle Select PPR EERE Pp EH 13 a Plugins 4 Setup Snapshots Surround 5 D8B Manual e Appendices page 164 HUMAN
95. EELECT First we have the eight HUI faders These and their associated buttons are self explanatory But the Write button can be confusing so pay attention when we get to that in the following paragraphs There will be a quiz at the end just kidding AUS REC ALL The 82 5 Aux section buttons 1 13 near the top of the board has similar functionality in HUI layer These buttons appear above the master fader on the HUI layer GUI Aux1 Aux5 switch the HUI Layer V Pots from the pan function to control ling the first five auxes in your DAW It also controls the functionality of the VSel button in conjunction with the Aux Mute button 1 this switches between Pre Post or Mute Unmute for the Aux sends It also has the Bank Left and Right buttons to shift your view eight faders at a time and the Channel Left and Right buttons to shift your view one fader at a time Buttons labeled 14 Masters and Shift are used to access the HUI layer HEM Loc Emme mi PLU ltd Assia 5 INSERT Plug in and Window functions are mapped to the buttons in 1282 Fat Channel section below the V Pots buttons 15 24 AUT ENABLE PLUG AUTO Rea TOUCH LATEH TRIM BYPASS Next we have the Automation section and the D8B Assignment section buttons 25 38 These are mapped to the Automation Enable controls and the Autom
96. EQ parameter tracks stacked on top of one another or 6 stacked pan automation curves Automation Event curves are displayed as dots actually small squares that represent nodes and lines that represent value ramping The nodes represent editable points that are either created during the automation process in real time or by the hand tool in the Mix Editor Note that on off or radio button type param eters e g Mutes EQ On Off or Snapshots etc that aren t of a ramping type are displayed as stepped values Events such as Snapshot Recall Load Plug in Preset Load EQ Preset etc can now be inserted in the Mix Editor window by right clicking on the time bar Insert Hew Cue Auto Follow Insert New Event Snap To Cues lap Gt NODES SNAP GRID Mute All Events Unmute AI Events 12 50 00 00 03 00 00 00 03 30 00 w Loop Selection Insert New Cue Insert New Event Mute Events UnMute Events Time Units b w Enable Snapping Snap To Cues y Snap To Grid Snap Gr id A drop down menu appears that offers the following options Loop Selection Insert New Cue Insert New Event Mute All Events UnMute All Events Select Time Units Enable Snapping Snap To Cues Snap To Grid and Snap Grid options Events include Snapshots Load EQ Load Compres sor Load Gate Load Channel and Load Plug in Dedicated buttons for Insert New Cue Insert
97. ESN is made from numbers 0 9 and letters It is unique to the D8B console and is not the serial number label on the rear of the control surface or CPU chassis 2 You will also need your plug in s serial number which is printed on the floppy disk label or on a card that came in the plug in s box 3 Toobtain the unlock code have the ESN and plug in serial number ready Then you have two options e Log on to the Mackie plug in authorization web page http www mackie com products d8b_v5 plugin reg html or e Phone Mackie Tech Support at 800 258 6883 4 When you have obtained an unlock code click Authorize in the Licensing window and enter your unlock code in the UNLOCK CODE box Click Enter restart the CPU and enjoy your newly expanded console Please call Mackie Designs at 425 487 4333 USA or visit our Website at http www mackie comZregister d8b v v to obtain the unlock code Your D8B Serial Number is displayed below If you have an unlock code enter it below or hit cancel to continue in DEMO mode until authorized now or at alater time UNLOCK CODE DSB Serial Number OOOO O30F 9CE9 Mix Options General Network Digitall O Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Aux Select Aux 1 12 Pre Post Assign Macros Mixing Options RECORD SAFE USE PREROLL WRITE FLYBACH LINK SPEAKERS USE V3 STYLE EQ Dim Amount Fader Motors Aux Select Pre Post e Select the desired Aux
98. Fre Fader Meters to Fost Fader Meters to Post Fader Mute Clear Meter Over Loads Mix Editor Tool Modifiers Shift Beam Ctrl Beam Shift Hand Ctrl Hand Mlagnify Ctrl Magnify Close All Ctrl Select Tracks Adjust Selection Additive Track Selection Drag Adjacent Hodes Vertical Delete Made Zoom Time In coom Time Out This command closes all open floating windows The Desktop Window Ctrl D The Desktop is where files are saved named copied and organized See the description in this chapter under the File menu page 52 D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 66 The Setup Window Ctrl 1 Network Digitall O Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Mouse Speed Display Intensity Refresh Rate pA Defaul Studio Name Date amp Time 7 7 D E E Screen Saver Advanced Graphics Smart Save o Create New Files Load Last Session at Power up General These personal preference settings are straight ahead What s the date and time Do you like the mouse to be quick and nimble or a bit more deliberate What s the best refresh rate for your video monitor Enter your studio name here and it automatically appears in the Track Sheet Display Intensity refers to the control surface VFD display not the computer monitor display Smart Save is a function that automatically Saves your session every five minutes Check the Create New Files box to save the
99. III 0000000 000000 III eooo 00000 III eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo III eooo III 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 eooo III III III III III III 0000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 III III III eooo 000 eooo III 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 eooo III eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 IXIIII 000000 III 6000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 0000 00000 III III eooo eooo 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 0000000 III 0000 III 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 000 eooo 0000 III III III III III eooo 0000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 0000 III III
100. IN 25 48 EFFECTS 49 72 and MASTERS e Channels 1 12 have both mic and line input capabilities e Channels 13 24 have line input capabilities only e Channels 25 48 receive signal only from the 1 0 card inputs Trim Level e At the top of each channel strip e The Trim Level controls only input levels for channels 1 24 e Regardless of bank selection trims are active and available for channel inputs 1 24 This is handy for tweaking without having to switch banks gt Used to adjust and optimize input levels e This control is one of the few not written in a snapshot Note The TRIM levels at the top of each of the 24 channel strips and the MIC buttons at the top of the first 12 channel strips are not written into automation or snapshots Careful notes as to their status should be manually archived as in written down for future reference However if TRIMs are all left at unity gain or at least left untouched throughout the entire session the console is capable of perfect total recall We highly recommend this technique D8B Manual e Chapter 2 e page 26 Mic Line Button gt On channels 1 12 only 9 e This button selects between the Mic D put XLR and the Line Input 1 4 TRS 12 e Up position selects the line input 1 4 TRS MIC e Down position selects the microphone input XLR REC RDY e The Record Ready button arms the cor responding tape track to record e Communicates via
101. IN button and set up MIC LINE TAPE IN EFFECTS and MASTERS completely different set of fader levels e the same for EFFECTS and MASTER fader Bank TRACK MONITOR Channels 1 24 Mi C Line EFFECTS Tracking MASTERS SHIFT Monitor Tap e n Mix do wn MASTERS SHIFT 1 24 25 48 23 MIC LINE TAPE IN TRACK MONITOR 49 72 EFFECTS 49 72 EFFECTS BANK SELECT ader Bank 3 Channels 49 72 FX Return 1 16 ALT Return 7 8 MIC LINE TRACK 49 72 EFFECTS BANK SELECT D8B Manual e Chapter 1 gt page 7 As you switch back and forth between all four fader banks the faders will move to their respec tive settings for each bank You ll find that this becomes your most popular demonstration Your friends will love it your spouse will love it your pet will be mildly amused This exercise demonstrates a process that will become second nature as you increase your skills on the Digital 8eBus The layered approach to digital mixing is actually very convenient while at the same time providing tons of features in a compact package This mixer contains more flexibility and features than most consoles taking up 12 or more feet of desk space and costing up to 50 times more Fader Bank Selection e MIC LINE button Fader Bank 1 Channels 1 24 e TAPE IN button Fader Bank 2 Channels 25 48 e EFFECTS butt
102. Internal Effects Processor 8 7 AUX 11 12 Z FX9 FX10 L R R L R L R Eight mono aux sends each returning a stereo effect DIGITAL TRIM e Pressing the DIGITAL TRIM button assigns the channel V Pots to become digital trim digital input level controls e Functionally located immediately after the A D converter in the signal path for channels 1 48 e When using digital I O cards for channels 25 48 there is no A D converter so the digi tal trim is simply the first control in the signal path after the card e Digital Trim is a recallable function unlike the analog Trim control It can be automated or stored in a snapshot e Digital Trim is the only input trim control for channel inputs 25 48 Talkback Mic gt Located just above the LEVEL TO TAPE and DIGITAL TRIM buttons e The Talkback mic is activated two different ways 1 by pressing Talkback in the Control Room section 2 by pressing a foot pedal con nected to the Talkback jack in the rear of the console e Talkback audio is sent to the Phones Cue Mixes when pressing Talkback or depressing the foot pedal or to the Studio monitor system when pressing Talkback to Studio Left Right LED Ladders Master Meters e Located above the Talkback Mic e Indicates the signal level of whatever is se lected in the Control Room section e When Solo is selected the Master Meters in
103. MM m mwa LLL Te uns LE 1 waar s 2 yo m mem wasas M LL a N Bring To Front cubase sx markerwinaow omon 0000 0000000 ar Par 7 _ yO m s foa Assign Bus 8 Auto Mode Write Mode Write EXC 00 _ Automation Auto Enable Fader N A D8B Manual e Appendices page 172 MACKIE D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For Cubase SX D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments Cubase SX Function Won t work with snap Won t work with SMPTE View F8 Esc shot button pressed NA 41 D8B Keypad HUI D8B key pad Y N T ao Type Cubase SX Locate point number on Keypad Press enter to store the number as a new locate point H Vici Press Locator to recall the numbered located point The Enter key works shot button pressed r j The Store key works shot button pressed Decimal Sri ARD Type Cubase SX Locate point number on Keypad Press Locator to recall the numbered located point S e N A Y Toggles D8B snap Press to enter D8B snapshot mode Type a snapshot number and press Enter to recall a snapshot shot recall mode Press Store
104. MMC MIDI Machine Control e Assign e Routes audio to output buses 1 8 5 e Routes audio to the Master L R bus A 12 7 e Assigns the selected channel to the 36 channel strip s corresponding tape track for recording For example after select ing ROUTE TO TAPE in the ASSIGNMENT section press SELECT on channel 2 then press the ASSIGN 9 button on channel 12 to route the signal from channel 2 to tape track 12 Write Manually enables a channel for record ing to automation e Blinks when on standby solid when active e Automatically lights when Auto Touch automation has been activated 6 Channel V Pot Sa eere B e A multifunctional digital control and level display e Controls channel pan when PAN is se ug E lected in the Master V Pot section just to the right of channel 24 e Controls Aux send levels when Aux 1 12 is selected in the AUX section just 2 above the Master V Pot e Controls panning between stereo Auxes 9 10 and 11 12 when PAN is selected below either send O 5 5 o m o e Controls channel Level to Tape and Digi tal Trim whenever they re selected immediately above Aux 1 and 2 select buttons e Displays return fader levels Bank 2 when Level to Tape follows faders Fader Bank Select LEDs Just below the channel V Pots When the green LEDs are on Fader Bank 1 is selecte
105. Mackie Real Time OS V Pot HUI the Running Man figure and the D8B Badge design All other brand names men tioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged 2003 Mackie Designs Inc All rights reserved D8B Manual gt Appendices page 191 Mackie Designs Inc 16220 Wood Red Road NE Woodinville WA 98072 www mackie com U S and Canada 800 898 3211 Outside the U S and Canada 425 487 4333 H B R I D DESKTOP PRODUCTION
106. Manual Appendices page 165 These are indicated on screen by clicking the question mark button in the upper right corner The left side of the screen provides a map of the control section of the D8B with numerical references over many of the buttons and a list of the HUI functions provided by each button For example button number 12 Aux 11 12 from the picture is HUI bank right So press this to access the next eight faders in your DAW to the right The on screen mixer changes and so does the HUI Layer When you go back to Bank 1 4 on the D8B some of these buttons revert back to their normal operation Aux 11 12 is an example But other buttons like the D8B transport will retain their HUI Control Mapping no matter what bank you are on as long as HUI mode is enabled Controls that behave like this are called Global HUI Controls The HUI Layer Control Mapping chart tells you which controls are Global and which are not Remember Global controls always function as described when HUI mode is on while non Global controls only have the described function when the HUI layer is visible D8B Manual gt Appendices page 166 Let s look a little closer at the HUI layer in sections INSERT INSERT INSERT INSERT INSERT INSERT INSERT m fysen PSD a mE mE WRITE WRITE M SELECT BELECT BELECT EELECT EELECT BELECT
107. Ready Mode III eooo 00000 III eooo III eooo 0000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III eooo 0000 00000 III III III III eooo 0000 III III 000000 000000 000000 00000 0000 III 0000 III eooo 0000 0000 eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 78 93 9 89 66 67 72 66 68 71 71 69 66 70 71 73 92 94 97 116 117 118 126 0000 III 0000 eooo eooo III eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 000 III III III III eooo eooo 0000 00000 III III III 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo 00000 10 III 0000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000
108. Select Write Ready mode in Options Automation Press WRITE on All Desired Automation Channels Start the Playback Device Press the 288 Record Button Adjust faders mutes or any selected parameters on the WRITE enabled channels Exit Record and Rewind to Beginning of Track Start Playback from Beginning of Track Repeat this Action for more channels and Parameters DUO OOC C L L L Write Punch in Summary Checklist Exit AUTO TOUCH and or TRIM LEVELS Mode Exit Write Ready mode in the Options Automation Menu Start Playback Record Device and Verify MTC Press the Write Button s on the Desired Channels Adjust Automation Parameters on the WRITE Enabled Channels Exit Record and Rewind to Beginning of Track Start Playback from Beginning of Track Repeat this Action for More Parameters C LI Trim Levels Summary Checklist Press TRIM LEVELS Choose Automation Mode All Modes Function as Expected Start Playback Record Device and Verify MTC Use Channel Faders to Boost or Cut Previously Automated Channel Data Exit Record and Rewind to Beginning of Track Start Playback from Beginning of Track Repeat this Action for More Parameters Exit Trim Levels to Return Faders to Normal Mode OOO L Punching Automation Channel Channel No Automation is recorded All parameters Punch In according to automation filter settings No Automation is recorded All parameters Punch In according to automation filter settings
109. Setup E Mackie Cother ID O Chs 1 16 Model other Device ID 0 Receives Sends MIDI Time Code MIDI Beat Clock MIDI Machine Control Is controller vd Is multitimbral ceive Channels On the D amp B choose HUI Mode from the Options menu Options Plugins Vir Solo Latch Link Speakers Automation Transport Meters Faders to Tape You will see a HUI button appear next to the master fader Click it or use the control surface shortcut SHIFT MASTER keyboard shortcut is F5 The board and GUI will change to the HUI layer All the faders will be at unity and the V Pots and Time Code read out will be blank You must now launch your DAW and set it up to use a HUI Pro Tools Go to Setups Peripherals Choose the MIDI Controllers tab For the first available Type choose HUI Select the MIDI port you have connected to the D8B for both the Receive From and Send To Click OK DP3 1 Go to Basics Control Surface Setup Set the Driver to HUI Under MIDI select the first channel Click OK Nuendo Go to Devices Device Setup Click the Add Remove tab and choose Mackie HUI Click the Add button and then click the Setup tab Now choose Mackie HUI from the Devices list select the MIDI channel you have connected to the D8B for both the Input and Output Click OK The D8B s HUI layer faders should jump to the p
110. Snapshot Ctri 2 Surround Ctri 3 Locator Ctri 4 Mix Editor Ctri 5 FatChannel Ctri 6 Panning Ctri 7 Faders Ctrl g Event Track Ctri 9 Track Sheet 1 1 1 History List Ctri H MIDI Map Ctri Upgrade UFX Cards Erase UFX Memory Let s take a quick look at each menu item About This window displays the OS version software authors artist etc Help Alt H select Help to open the on screen help window You can also press the HELP button in the Fat Channel section on the console or Alt H on the keyboard to open the Help window Click on the chapter titles to bring up the associated Help files Use the Back and Forward buttons to move to the next page or to go back D amp B VERSION 5 0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 0 Version 5 0 Overview The 5 0 Overview Screen The 5 0 Fat Channel The 5 0 Mix Editor The 5 0 Plug ins Window The 5 0 Surround Sound Window Other new 5 0 Features Chapter 1 Getting Started Let s Get It Working Fast Track Power Up A New Way of Thinking Four Consoles in One Fader Bank Selection Signal Routing Concept Keep Close Track of These Concepts Updating Software Chapter 2 Where Is it It s Time to Locate Everything Rear Panel Description Channels 1 12 Inputs Channels 13 24 Inputs Card Cage Section Master Input Output Section AUX OUT Section Remote CPU Description Data and Synchronization
111. Sometimes these basic mixes which are derived from your initial gut reaction to the music the most powerful Basic dynamic automation does not require these snapshot saves but they re often useful as the mix comes together even if only as a cross reference If you develop a string of snapshots that are very powerful they can be strung together during automation However the procedure we re outlining here highlights dynamic automation Time Code From Playback Device Route MTC The D8B requires MIDI Time Code MTC at the MIDI input to operate automation along with record playback device Connect the MIDI output of your computer sequencers MIDI interface or transport control to the MIDI input of the D amp B e Most sequencers or other record playback devices that transmit MTC need to be configured to route to a specific MIDI channel cable or device Consult your MTC source 5 manual to confirm accurate and verifiable routing to the D amp B Verify MTC at D8B Transport SMPTE Window e When your sequencer or other record playback device is running and MTC is transmitted the D8B control surface position readout window will scroll MTC You will see a continuous increase of Hours Minutes Seconds and Frames If you see this scrolling time code in the D8B POSITION display it s almost automation time e MTC also displays in the on screen Locator window e If SMPTE VIEW is not selected the r
112. Tape Output 2 etc Slowly raise the Level to Tape V Pot or if youre in Faders to Tape mode raise the level of the TAPE bank channel fader correlating to the tape track Channel 25 26 etc Watch the nasty feedback loop on the meter bridge You might not even be able to hear the loop but its there Finally try to never do that again Note This phenomenon is not specific to the D8B OS it s just the way interconnecting gear works To eliminate the possibility of a feedback loop is to rob creative flexibility from the system We all learn to avoid creating feedback loops in our working environment But it helps to be alerted to the possibility from time to time B 0 D 1 r s e c le a e s a e Any channel can be sent to any number of tape outputs by simply selecting multiple tape outputs however only the last selected output is displayed in the OUT window e No two channels can be assigned to the same tape output To sum channels to an output assign them to a bus then route the bus to a tape out BUS and L R Output Assignments Highlight any BUS out 1 8 to route the channel to the selected bus Highlight the L R button to route the channel to the Main L R mix output ET 1 1 je 2 4 E L i _ I E 1 4 LORI pri w OUT ouT 4 nuT e Click and hold on any BUS o
113. This mode produces the most common type of harmony in popular music Pitch Shift Use this button to set a chromatic interval between the lead vocal and pitch shifted voices to create true parallel melody lines This is useful more for special effects than harmonies because our ear is tuned to the moving third interval that parallel chromatic harmonies dont provide Edit Harmony Ensemble EDIT HARMONY ENSEMBLE nterval Gender Detune volume e Styles Interval In SmartChord SmartKey and Pitch Shift control modes Interval determines how much higher or lower the harmony note is than the lead note In SmartChord and Smart Key modes the intervals are intelligent that is they will sharpen or flatten automatically to make the harmonies sound musically correct For Pitch Shift the interval chosen is always in parallel with the lead regardless of the key and scale Gender The gender of each harmony voice can be changed to create mixed vocal ensembles without needing to see that special doctor in Sweden Detune Who sings a perfect third No one really Detune adjusts a harmony note s pitch to be slightly above or below the exact note it is creating Volume Controls the level for each harmony voice Pan Controls the stereo placement of each harmony voice Styles Styles are preset modifiers you can use to add realism to the harmony voices Timing This
114. USER fas gt EMULATION rec save CUT COPY UNDG PASTE ENTER IFS7 ESC MEM LOC M STATUS MIX AUX MUTE E j RECORD RECORD RECORD INSERT IET I rot USEL ween Peel ve yee SE EM mee E uc SELECT r r r r r r FLUGIN SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO FADER MUTE MUTE EELECT EELECT EELECT Line TAPE EFFECTS Mast MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE kick snar Drms lop Lp L TOUCH c mu T l RERD URTCH TRIM BYPASS 4 Locator MixEditor Fat g Faders ck She esktor Close Connections You will need a MIDI interface with an available input and output port connected to your DAW Connect the D8B s MIDI output to the MIDI input on the interface and connect the MIDI output on the interface to the MIDI input on the D8B Mac users will need to set up a device for their D8B under OMS if you are using Pro Tools or Nuendo or Free MIDI if you are using Digital Performer Mac users launch OMS Setup or Free MIDI Setup Create a new device called HUI Use the default settings and make sure you tell it the correct input and output ports that you are using Save your setup and exit Ei o My Studio
115. Ul 09 gp or indui Z 550 gp 6 indui ui eui Figure 1 7 D8B Gain Structure Diagram D8B Manual gt Chapter 1 gt page 16 Specifications Meters e LED ladders displaying 24 channels 24 LEDs per channel from 50 to 0 dBFS 0 dBFS 20 dBu Frequency Response e 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB Crosstalk 1kHz e Adjacent channels 90 dBu e Aux sends feed through 90 dBu e Main outputs 90 dBu Equalizer e Gain Range 15 dB e Frequency range 20 Hz 20 kHz split into 4 bands Q 1 12 to 3 octave Compressor e Threshold 60 0 dB e Attack 0 1 ms to 2 5 sec e Release 10 0 ms to 2 5 sec e Ratio 1 0 1 to inf 1 e Output 0 0 dB to 20 0 dB Gate e Threshold 00 0 to 1 0 dB e Attack 0 1 ms to 2 5 sec e Release 10 0 ms to 2 5 sec e Range Expand off 0 dB to 100 dB e Ratio Expand 1 1 0to 1 inf Digital Specs e Converters 24 bit 115 dB Signal to Noise Ratio EIAJ 106 dB Dynamic Range 128X oversampling e DSP 32 bit 2190 dB dynamic range e CPU 300 MHz Celeron 166 MHz Pentium in earlier versions e Minimum System Requirements for v5 1 32 MB RAM 166 MHz Pentium CPU e Recommended System Requirements for v5 1 64 MB RAM 300 MHz Celeron D8B CPU File Storage e Floppy drive internal hard drive or 10 base T Ethernet network Dither Apogee UV22 16 bit Super CD Encoding
116. a snapshot Press Store type a number shot recall mode and press Enter to store a snapshot Exit snapshot mode by pressing Snapshot or Enter 46 Rewind Rewind v Rewind PT transport Return PT locator to beginning of Session MS ooo reme 211717 sa EIE e s s 0 wau gt ENENENLDIUEDTIPLIPUIMI LITT 7 Press once to go into jog press again to go into shuttle and press again to go back to normal Alt Store Out a Locator Decimal Record Record Jog amp Shuttle Jog Shuttle Select Cut Zero Set 51 5 Turn wheel to either Jog or Shuttle 53 Cut selection region 54 Copy selection region Undo Other HUI Mode HUI Layer Notes Global Mode Global functions are always active when HUI Mode is on no matter what D8B bank is active Non global functions are active only when HUI Mode is On and the D8B is displaying the HUI Layer 55 Paste contents of clipboard 5 o Undoes last command in PT Normal HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays the normal HUI VFD screen exactly as a real HUI would The contents of the VFD depend on the DAW in use and other settings See notes on the VFD above Channel HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays eight channel names in bottom line of VFD First two VFD select buttons mirror the Channel L and Channel R functions The name of the selected channel function is displayed in the center of the top VFD line The Online
117. affect the automation filter LEDs Faders Mutes Pan All How ever when Bypass is on no automation data will be recorded FADER MOTORS OFF button e Pressing this button so the yellow light is on disengages fader motors which prevents any automated fader movement during automated playback e When the button is engaged all faders snap to off e Turning fader motors off does not affect changes that have been recorded during auto mation record passes All automated levels still play back even though the faders don t move e The on screen faders still show movement even when the physical faders are off Fader moves may still be written to automation using the mouse FADERS button Allows writing of Fader moves during an automation pass When FADERS 16 activated all fader moves on write enabled channels are written into automation Can be used in conjunction with MUTES PAN and ALL MUTES button Allows writing of mutes during an automation pass When MUTES is activated all mutes on write enabled channels are written into automation Can be used in conjunction with FADERS PAN and ALL PAN button Allows writing of Pan moves stereo and surround during an automation pass When PAN is activated all pan changes on write enabled channels are written into automation Can be used in conjunction with FADERS MUTES and ALL ALL button e Allows writing of all automation parameters other than faders mutes a
118. allows you to control the entries of the harmony parts from 10 millisecond to random delays Scoop This controls how a harmony part slides into each note Do they bend up to it How much do they bend Vibrato This controls the amount of vibrato in your harmony parts Envelope This control is used with the Manual control mode When in Manual control mode a MIDI keyboard is used to trigger harmony notes The Envelope control adjusts the attack and release timing of the harmony MIDI notes This can add bite or smooth out the manual harmony sound Key Scale When the SmartKey control mode is used the key and type of scale of the song must be selected for the intelligent harmony to choose musically correct harmonies D8B Manual e Appendices page 145 Pitch Correct Mode VOCAL STUDIO Harmony Pitch Correction amp Reverb INL Menu ON PROCESSOR MODE Pitch Corr OUTPUT MODE OCTAVE c2 8 8 2 P 2 D F G E C4 USE MIDI R Ch Pitch Bender Use the bender to manually raise or lower the pitch of the shifted voices This works just like a spring loaded keyboard pitch bender Pitch Bend Range The range parameter lets you set the maximum amount of pitch bend that can be applied to the vocal Pitch Controller Use the keyboard to force the vocal to an exact pitch Keyboard Octave Select Selects the octave that the keyboard represents Slope Use this lovely window to set the tran
119. and drag left or right to change the level Control click to set level to unity Right click and drag to copy trim level across multiple channels Faders to Tape mode Options menu ties the source channel fader to the tape level output D8B Manual gt Chapter 3 gt page 46 Multitrack Direct Outs Fader Banks 1 2 3 and the BUS OUTS 1 8 in Bank 4 can be routed to the direct outs 1 24 A hyphen in the OUT box indicates no direct out assignment Click and hold in the OUT box to see the Tape Out list Drag down the list to the desired output then release the mouse button tape out 1 ch 29 tape nut 2 ch z amp j tape out 3 ch ZT tape nut 4 20 tape out 5 21 29 tape out 21 50 tape out 21 51 tape nut 8 581 52 tape out 9 21 551 tape nut 10 ch 343 tape out 11 ch 333 tape out 12 58 56 tape out 15 ch 3 73 tape out 14 58 58 tape out 15 58 59 y tape out 16 407 tape out 17 ch 4173 tape out 18 ch 42 tape aut 19 58 45 tape aut 20 447 tape out 21 ch 4533 tape aut 22 ch 46 tape out Z3 ch 4 r tape out 24 ch 42 Set Channel to Reset Channel Only Reset Bank To Outputs Click on Reset Channel Only to deselect all tape output assignments for the selected channel Click on Reset All to globally deselect channel and bank tape output assignments C
120. automation record With Write Flyback selected each parameter recorded into automation returns to its previously adjusted status at the end of a record pass A track that was off for an entire arrangement snaps back to off after the level is increased when punched out of record When Write Flyback mode is not selected parameter adjustments in automation remain at their last user adjusted setting even after the end of the automation pass Write Ready Mode This option does not function when Auto Touch is selected When Write Ready is selected channels are manually engaged to write automation data Write Ready mode assigns the transport RECORD button to punch the Write Ready channels into and out of automation record When the channel WRITE button is pressed the yellow light blinks signifying that the channel is ready to record automation No automation will be recorded until the RECORD Master is enabled in the transport section Transport Sub menu Options Plugins Windows Solo Latch Link Speakers Use PreKoll Record Safe One Button Punch Faders to Tape T T T 0 D 2 Meters F Use Nine Pin Control HUI D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 61 All three of the following menu items are avail able in the Mix Options section of the Setup window Use Pre Roll e Sets machine location a specified amoun
121. bus using the Aux Select pull down list e Set global pre post status for the selected aux bus by clicking PRE or POST under Aux 1 12 Pre Post Assign Macros e ndividual channel aux pre post assignments are made by Alt clicking on the aux send s level bar in the overview screen Red indicates post fader and yellow indicates pre fader Aux pre post assignments can also be performed in the Fat Channel screen One Button Punch e With this option checked connected record devices are placed into record mode by simply pressing the RECORD button in the Transport section Note The record devices must be in play mode e When this option is cleared both PLAY and RECORD must be pressed at the same time to enter record mode on connected record devices Record Safe e When this option is checked the D8B is prohibited from engaging connected record devices into record active status e Usethis mode when you want to guard against inadvertently erasing previously recorded material Use PreRoll e Checking this option instructs the playback transports to begin before the specified locate point based on the Pre Roll time specified in the MIDI Setup window Use Write Ready e When this function is enabled the transport Master Record button becomes a Master Write button and functions as a global Master write enable for the absolute and absolute trim dynamic automation modes e When Use Write Ready is toggled in the Mix Options Setup win
122. e ONE BUTTON PUNCH You can also select whether to press the PLAY and RECORD buttons to enter record mode or just press the RECORD button One Button Punch Note We recommend leaving One Button Punch off to provide an extra measure of safety in case you inadvertently press the RECORD button in the Transport Section e MTC OFFSET MIDI File Offset can be used to indicate the starting time deviation of a Standard MIDI File SMF referenced to absolute time code e TEMPO MAP If you use a sequencer in your recording process you can create a standard MIDI file from the song s you ve recorded Copy the tempo map from the SMF to the Digital 8eBus and synchronize the D amp B display to the Bars Beats Ticks of the sequenced program SMFs are loaded from the floppy disk drive D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 115 MIDI Snapshots Once you ve developed several snapshots for a mix they can be recorded into a sequencer for consistent playback This feature is set in the Mix Options window under Setup in the lower menu bar When enabled 1 Incoming MIDI program changes received on any MIDI channel can recall Snapshots numbered 0 127 on the console 2 The D amp B sends MIDI Program changes on MIDI channel 1 when snapshots are recalled on the console either via the dynamic automation snapshot track or by manually recalling a snapshot from either the snapshot window or via the front panel General Network Digitall O Lic
123. e Use Write Ready the Master Record button becomes the Master Write button Solo Latch Solo buttons remain engaged even when a new Solo button is pressed e Record Safe prohibits engaging the RECORD function e Write Flyback causes the levels to snap back to their original punch in states after an automation pass on a track e Use PreRoll causes playback transport to begin before the specified locate point based on the Pre Roll time entered in the MIDI Setup window e See Mix Options in the Setup section page 69 for more information about these parameters D8B Manual gt Chapter 3 page 78 Locator Parameters 00 02 18 10 NewCue Delete Cue Renumber Storecue e The numeric transport position indicator can be set to SMPTE time Bars Beats Ticks or Milliseconds by clicking the corresponding option above the cues list or by right clicking in the numeric window and selecting the desired option in the pop up menu New Cue e Click this button to create a new cue point e The new cue point is created at the existing SMPTE millisecond or measure position e Cue point readout changes form depending on the readout format selected in the main Locator window SMPTE Bars Milliseconds Delete Cue e Click this button to Delete the highlighted cue point s from the Cue list Renumber e Cue points are ordered on the Cue list according to their Locator position SMPTE Bars Millisecond
124. each Setup Window parameter is intentionally set For specific recommendations for various parameter settings refer to The Setup Window on page 64 Figure 4 2 Basic Connection for Multitrack Recording This diagram represents the fundamental connections in a D8B based multitrack system Sound sources feed Fader Bank 1 MIC LINE Fader Bank 1 feeds the multitrack inputs via the AIO 8 DIOe8 or ADAT card outputs the multitrack outputs feed Fader Bank 2 TAPE via the 8 DIOe8 ADAT card inputs the mix output feeds the control room monitor system master 2 track recorder headphones etc c 9 6 0 6066 6 6666 66 6 6 6 6 9 09G6 9 CS Co G6 6 0 6 6 06 06 6 0 06 6 09 6 6 6 06 6 6 66692 c ollal lal Fader Bank 2 D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 97 Setup Window settings are automatically stored and are recalled in subsequent boot ups General Mix Options e Mouse Speed e Aux 1 12 global Pre Post selection e Display Intensity e Selection of One Button Punch Record e Refresh Rate
125. equipment to the exact same word clock rate typically 44 1 or 48kHz e Connect the word clock output from the master device to the word clock input of the slave devices Each digital device connected to the digital audio chain must receive a common word clock source either directly or from a slave e tis common procedure to chain word clock through digital devices The D8B can provide master word clock to a central word clock hub then the hub can send to multiple digital slaves DAWs MDMs digital effects etc e Set every slave device to respond to external word clock e Draw a digital word clock flow chart for your system This will help you verify a logical connection scheme One piece of equipment connected incorrectly can mess up your entire system Rats The following illustration shows a common sync setup using the Digital 8eBus as the master word clock source and a hub to distribute to other digitally connected devices Digital 8eBus Master Word Clock Out From D8B Sync Hub Here are two more sample setups that include the D8B and other digital devices which depend on accurate and solid word sync Word Clock INPUT Word Clock OUTPUT 9 pin MTP MIDI MIDI N OUT PCI 324 9 pin IN Control Track IN MIDI MIDI Control IN OU
126. fader movement AFL solos the accurate pan positioning and like PFL is only a monitor function not affecting the Mas ter L R mix Mixdown Solo is a post fader pan accurate solo that overrides the Master L R mix Clear Solo in the Solo Studio section re leases any solo selections This is particularly useful when working with solos across mul tiple fader banks e Aux Solo is accomplished by selecting an aux bus then pressing the SOLO button by the Master V Pot When this solo light is on the Master V Pot adjusts the solo level e Soloing multiple channels is accomplished by holding the shift key onboard or keyboard while pressing the solo buttons on all desired channels or by holding one solo down while pressing others Also selecting Solo Latch in Setup gt Mix Options keeps solos selected until they re manually switched off Solo Isolate mode is accomplished by holding down the Alt key on the keyboard or control surface while pressing a channel s solo s A solo isolated channel is always active to the solo bus and therefore will not mute when other channels are soloed Only PFL solo mode overrides Solo Isolate mode Mute e Mutes the signal after the channel fader e Prior to the L R output bus e Prior to Bus 1 8 outputs Does not affect the Direct Out to Tape unless console is configured for Faders to Tape mode Channel Fader e Controls the signal level from the channel to the bus or b
127. functionality of the Surround Panning window Each Surround Mode shares similarities in functionality yet there are also distinct differences Surround modes other than stereo use 4 to 8 speakers While mixing in surround the main stereo L R bus is still available and active Pan positions between various front and rear speakers are sent to the L R mix as simple L R positioning For example a channel panned fully right rear speaker 6 displays equal level in the L R mix as a channel panned fully right front Speaker Icons Speaker icons are numbered consistently throughout the surround modes Speakers 1 and 2 are always Front L R speaker 3 is always Front Center speaker 4 is always the Subwoofer except in the case of LCRS when it s the Mono Surround speakers 5 and 6 are always Rear L R and speakers 7 and 8 are always Left Center and Right Center To set speaker status across a 12 channel row or portion of a row open the Panning Overview window Ctrl 7 click on a speaker icon and drag parallel left or right all channels in the row will adopt the speaker status of the originally selected icon Stereo D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 74 e Since stereo is a two dimensional mix mode there s not much use in using the surround window to pan e MORPH and FLYBACK are available only in the surround pan window These features offer creative possibilities in any multichannel mix mode Low Frequency Effect and Di
128. has been created Edit Playback Filter e Opens the Snapshot Filter window e Allows for elimination of specific parameter change information from snapshot data e This window can also be opened by double clicking the Filtered field in the Snapshot window Unlock Snapshot e Allows the snapshot to be updated by the Store command e An unlocked snapshot can be overwritten by storing data in the same snapshot number e An unlocked snapshot is indicated by the open padlock to the left of the snapshot number in the snapshot list Lock Snapshot e Sets the snapshot to ignore updates e A locked snapshot cannot be altered or overwritten Once you have stored a snapshot you d rather not lose lock it e A locked snapshot is indicated by a closed padlock to the left of the snapshot number in the snapshot list Delete Alt Delete e This removes the highlighted snapshot s from the snapshot list even if they re locked e This cannot be undone Renumber e Renumbers the snapshot list in ascending numerical order Select All Ctrl A e Highlights all snapshots in the list e All highlighted snapshots can be edited at once e g locked unlocked filtered The Surround Window Ctrl 3 The surround window offers precise control over image positioning in any mixing panorama along with individual subwoofer level and depth of center control Surround position control is available from the control surface by
129. http www canare com Whirlwind 99 Ling Rd Rochester NY 14612 Tel 888 733 4396 Fax 716 865 8930 http www whirlwindusa com D8B Manual e Appendices page 181 Index Symbols 00000 IIl III eooo 2 Track A B and C 20 20 EQ 25 pin 3 Band Parametric EQ 4 band Parametric 51 6 1 7 1 SDDS TP 24 34 III eooo 0000 eooo 000000 000000 eee 000000 000000 000000 158 eooo eooo 00000 eooo 0000 00000 III III III 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 eooo 0000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 eee 000000 III IIl eooo eooo eooo A D Converter About Active Tempo ADAT ADAT Optical ADAT Optical Hookup to HDR 24 96 Adjust Channel Delay Advanced Graphics AES EBU AES EBU PDIe8 AES EBU Digital 1 0 AES EBU Hookup PDI 8 AFL AFL Solo Button After Fader Listen AlOe8 All Alt Button Alt I O Analog and Digital Multitrack Cables Analog Hookup to HDR 24 AIO 8 Analog 1 0 Analog Inserts Analog Trim Antares Apogee Apogee Digital 1 0 Assign Assignment Section Authorize Auto Arm
130. j Vibrato OUTPUT MODE u Chorale Keyboard Styles Pitchrange Portamento Key Scale 0 0 VOICE MUTING Mute 3 Mute 4 Mute In Styles you can create that extra amount of personality and realism for your harmony voices Each style is controlled by a spin dial Spin the dial up or down to change the parameter all of the Style parameters are adjusted globally for each harmony voice Timing adjusts the entrances of the harmony voices With Timing turned off the harmony voices enter at the same time as the lead voice Each timing parameter delays the harmony voices from the lead vocal Just like tuning no group of singers sings the notes at exactly the same time The timing presets have been created using individual delays for each voice Additionally some time delay presets use randomization Randomization randomly creates delay time for each voice from 0 delay to the delay time specified The timing presets are listed below Off none Tight Mix between 5 and 12ms none Medium Mix between 10 and 32ms none Loose Mix between 20 and 36ms_ none 5ms Rand Max Delay of 5ms per voice 10ms Rand Max Delay of 10ms per voice 20ms Rand Max Delay of 20ms per voice 30ms Rand Max Delay of 30ms per voice 40ms Rand Max Delay of 40ms per voice 50ms Rand Max Delay of 50ms per voice 80ms Rand Max Delay of 80ms per voice 00 10 gt Scoop adjusts how a voice attacks a note Even profe
131. located point Toggles D8B snap Press to enter D8B snapshot mode Type a snapshot number and press Enter to recall a snapshot Snapshot recall mode Press Store TUTO a number and press Enter to store a snapshot Exit snapshot mode by pressing Snapshot or Enter O mw me Nuendo Rewind Nuendo transport fea RT Forward Fest Forward Nuendo Fast Forward Nuendo Transport pda 3 6 s s v e m m een 2 _ em 21171757 71171 77 1 2 1 s mere sema v o 17 7 1 7 em com e re Undo Undo Press to undo previous command in Nuendo edit history supports multiple undos Other HUI Mode HUI Layer Notes Global Mode Global functions are always active when HUI Mode is on no matter what D8B bank is active Non global functions are active only when HUI Mode is On and the D8B is displaying the HUI Layer Normal HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays the normal HUI VFD screen exactly as a real HUI would The contents of the VFD depend on the DAW in use and other settings See notes on the VFD above Channel HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays eight channel names in bottom line of VFD First two VFD select buttons mirror the Channel L and Channel R functions The nam
132. maximum the pitch can be corrected by 12 semitones 1 octave with the Pitch Bender When the pitch bend range is set to its minimum the pitch can be corrected by 50 cents 1 semitone Set the range for the maximum amount of pitch correction needed If the vocal track travels a full semitone out of tune set the range to 1 or 2 semitones OCTAVE C C3 4 5 C6 Pitch Controller is used to force the vocal line to an exact pitch Use the Octave buttons to set the octave you want the vocal line to be forced Once you have set the octave trigger the note you want using the Pitch Controller keyboard As long as you are holding triggering the note with the mouse or MIDI keyboard the vocal line will sing the corrected pitch indefinitely Only when you release the note will the vocal line return to the original pitch An external MIDI keyboard can also be used to give immediate access to multiple octaves Slope controls the switching rate between the pitch corrected sound and the original sound when using the Vocal Studio s keyboard control graphic Use the red circle in the Slope window to adjust the slope When the Slope is pulled all the way to the left the switch between original and pitch corrected sound is instantaneous The more you pull the slope to the right the more gradual the fade between original and pitch corrected sound becomes This parameter can be set to make pitch correction more natural D8B Manual gt Ap
133. of 128 MIDI values may not be used e Channel This is the MIDI channel that is used for the selected route Note Maps using Ch 1 will not function when HUI mode is enabled It is recommended that you use only channels 2 16 e Route To From This assigns the MIDI route to a console channel strip master fader or aux send master master section or transport parameter The actual Parameter within any chosen function is assigned in the Parameter column e Parameter Available choices follow either the switch or variable control types of categories as set by the MIDI Type column selection D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 94 e Mode A value is displayed when the Route is a switch type The two options available are Normal and Toggle These refer to how the switch responds to received MIDI data and is therefore only relevant if the Direction is set to Receive on both In Normal mode a Note On message engages the switch and a Note Off or Note On with velocity of zero disengages the switch In Toggle mode alternating Note On messages engage and disengage the switch while Note Off messages are ignored e Direction The MIDI Route is set to Receive Send or Both Take care to avoid MIDI feedback e The Edit menu inside of the map contains the following additional commands e New MIDI Route Alt N Creates a new MIDI Route e Open MIDI Map Recalls saved MIDI Map from disk If a map is currently in place it will be entirely
134. off 01 Aftertouch Keys 00 7F 00 7F Pan control range Channel x _ _ 127R Pitch Bend Control Change 7F 7F level Tx amp Rx assignable per D8B channel strip via the Channel List Program Change True number 00 7F 00 7F System Exclusive System Common Song Pos X Song Sel X Tune Rea m Local On Off Aux All Notes Off Messages Active Sensing System Reset 1 System real time always active MIDI On Off defaults to OFF and MIDI channel 00 2 Either Tx or Rx 3 MMC open loop commands STOP PLAY FF REW TRACK REC RDY SHUTTLE STEP 4 All values listed in hexadecimal D8B Manual e Appendices page 163 Appendix F HUI Mode What s a HUI Mackie introduced HUI Human User Inter face in 1997 one of the industry s first affordable motorized touch sensitive fader controllers available for Digital Audio Workstations DAWSs One of the big drawbacks of any DAW is having to use a mouse and keyboard to perform things you used to do on an analog mixer Clicking on a visual representation of a fader and trying to drag the mouse smoothly in order to achieve an amazing fade out is difficult if not impossible for many of us Likewise turning a virtual knob on a computer screen just doesn t cut it for some folks The HUI allows you to use familiar analog style faders and knobs to control most of your DAW s parameters HUI mode allows the Digital 8eBus to work with your HUI supported
135. onboard Analog Input Output Section Output Level 0 dBu 0 775V RMS Left and Right Outputs 22 dBu balanced 1 4 TRS 28 dBu balanced XLR Bus Tape out 22 dBu balanced 1 4 TRS Aux sends 22 dBu balanced 1 4 TRS Inserts 22 dBu unbalanced 1 4 TRS Channel Section mic line Line input balanced 1 4 TRS input Mic Input balanced XLR input Preamp dynamic range 114 dB max E LN 129 5 dBu 150 ohm source 131 2 dBV 150 ohm source 83 dBu 1kHz Distortion 0 005 1kHz 14 dBu output level 20 Hz 20 kHz filter Mic gain range Unity to 60 dB Line In gain range 20 dB to 40 dB channels 1 12 20 dB to 20 dB channels 13 24 4 dBu nominal 22 dBu clipping Input max level Aux send gain range off to 10 dB Bus out gain range offto 10 dB Threshold 00 to 1 dB Ch fader gain range 100 to 10 dB Physical Dimensions Console 8 7 37 6 x 27 1 221mm x 955mm 688mm Remote CPU 5 25 x 19 0 x 20 0 133mm x 483mm x 508mm Weight e Console 73 Ibs 33 1kg e Remote CPU 50 lbs 22 7kg Note All specifications subject to change without notice D8B Manual e Chapter 1 page 17 Imensions Physical D e 770 889 7 ooo ooo 3000 3000 2000 3000 00000 00000 600000 00000 ne 42909 02 O O O
136. overwritten by the map from disk upon loading e Save MIDI Map As Saves the current MIDI map to disk as a Map file which is available for recall at a later date e Delete MIDI Route Alt DEL Deletes the currently selected Route s within the list The DELETE button at the bottom of the MIDI Map window does the same Multiple Routes may be selected using the Shift Select or Control Select keyboard combinations Erase UFX Memory When you update the plug ins software on the D8B it may be necessary to clear the flash memory in the UFX cards that are installed in the D8B and upgrade their memory to the latest version of the software Normally this is not required unless advised by tech support See Note below 1 Select Erase UFX Memory 2 Follow the on screen instructions for erasing the flash UFX OS 3 When the procedure is completed click Continue 4 Reboot the console by turning the power switch off on the Remote CPU wait 5 seconds and turn the power switch back on Upgrade UFX Cards After completing the procedure for erasing the UFX memory it may be necessary to upgrade the UFX cards to the newest software Normally this is not required unless advised by tech support 1 Select Upgrade UFX Cards 2 Follow the on screen instructions for downloading the UDOS package to the UFX cards 3 When the upgrade is completed click Continue 4 Reboot the console by turning th
137. session as a new session without overwriting the previously saved version Check Load Last Session at Power up to automatically open the last session you were working on when you boot up the D amp B rather than the default Startup session If you have an older CPU for the D8B 166 MHz Pentium the enhanced graphics in the GUI may cause screen redraws to be slower than you are accustomed to Deselecting the Advanced Graph ics checkbox will speed up screen redraws Note Changing the Advanced Graphics setting requires rebooting the 1282 to take effect Network General Network Digitall O Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Network Channel Local Mixer Name Alt outputs 1 8 Console Linking CUE CONTROLS 52 SAMPLE FA SOLO LOGIC AUTOMATION SPEAKERS The Network Setup window allows any number of consoles that are on the same Network Channel to either generate or receive common Link Option controller actions There are eight Network Channels that are not unlike TV channels via Ethernet where the console has a unique Device Name like Jolene or Spike and after setting the Device Name and assigning one of the eight Network Channels the console may then join the party Consoles are normally linked audio wise via the ALT I O 1 8 card slot where audio buses are configured to be transferred from a slave console to a master console for further mix processing If using the buses for digital aud
138. signal takes from EE a point of origin to a chosen destination This is a simplified flow diagram designed to provide a bird s EE eye view Follow the signal from left to right Notice the first thing the signal encounters after the analog inputs including the analog trim is the analog to LEFT RIGHT digital converter The audio remains in the digital 2 Be sure you verify the Bank Selection whenever domain from that point until it finally converts back you need to make a change At first it s easy to to analog at the main outputs bus outputs and forget to check the Fader Bank status However external aux sends Simply follow the arrows to once you ve adjusted to the layered consoles discover the path you never know where you might maneuvering throughout the entire console will end up For a more detailed block diagram of the become second nature D8B signal path refer to Figure 1 6 Keep Close Track of These Concepts m 1 The Channel Select Display next to the Master L R meters always displays the currently mace selected channel number no matter which Fader 2 Bank is selected If an adjustment is required in the Fat Channel verify that the channel you eee intend to adjust is displayed here D8B Manual e Chapter 1 gt page 12 Figure 1 5 Signal Flow Diagram Simply begin at the far left star and follow the route the signal must take to reach the master output DSP includes all dynamics equali
139. status is also displayed at the end of this line D8B Manual Appendices page 169 e D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For Nuendo 16220 Woodinville Redmond Rd NE Woodinville WA 98072 Tel 800 258 6883 Fax 425 806 6312 e mail techmail mackie com Last Updated 2 07 03 D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments Nuendo Function Fader 17 24 Fader 1 8 Move corresponding Nuendo channel Fader SS Mute 17 24 Mute 1 8 Ru Mute corresponding Nuendo channel Solo 17 24 Solo 1 8 Solo corresponding Nuendo channel Move corresponding Nuendo channel Pan or Send Level Select corresponding Nuendo channel allows editing of channel parameters in HUI Layer VFD EE Select 17 24 Select 1 8 R d Read HEN k y Record Record Ready 1 8 1 8 Record Arm corresponding Nuendo channel ope po qe mmm RN wana ama s sene wl 6 _ 0 usasapa wr 0 kar IRT arar rn e e m p ens U 6 CR RN ars pee waar H a rr nnran 000 7 pom o s p S _ _ o e s ERN waar a
140. the Event to your Mix Editor amp utomation and delete the Event Choose how you would like to do this For all parameters in the event commit sj 0002 00 00 e to next node e to end Do not overwrite existing automation Warning this will clear your history list and is not undoable JL ox D8B Manual gt Chapter 3 gt page 82 Mix Editor Before Commit Commit until Time The automation is committed from the time of the event until the selected time Use this if you want to commit a snapshot from 2 00 to 4 00 for example After the specified time the automation returns to the previous existing value This is similar to how write flyback works In the example below an event consisting of a snapshot with all faders at maximum was committed until the 00 02 00 00 time After Commit Until Time IP PAGE BACK POSITIONS u Commit until Next Node Automation is written at the time of the event until the next existing node on the track This is done on a track by track basis so depending on when the next node occurs the automation may be written for a short channel 3 below or long channel 4 below period of time If there is no node following the commit time on a particular parameter then automation will be written to the end of the session on that parameter channel 2 below After Commit Until Next Node After Do Not Overwrite Existing Automation BACK POSITIONS
141. the Mix Editor is open Modify Levels only affects the selected parameter in the Mix Editor window It also only acts over the selected time range If no time range is selected in the Mix Editor Modify Levels will appear greyed out in the Edit menu Insert Time e Within the Mix Editor this inserts a region of no data change in the selected channel region e The amount of blank time inserted is equal to the length of the selected region e Functional on any number of selected tracks Delete Time e Deletes a selected time region in the Mix Editor window including all data and changes gt The amount of deleted time is equal to the length of the selected region e Functions on any number of selected channel regions Insert Global Time e With the Mix Editor open this feature globally inserts a region of no data change at the selected start point on all channels for all data e Selecting Insert Global Time in the Edit menu opens a window with settings for the insert start point and length of time inserted Delete Global Time e With the Mix Editor open this feature globally deletes a region of data change at the selected start point on all channels for all data e Selecting Delete Global Time in the Edit menu opens a window with settings for the deletion start point and length of time deleted Clear Automation Delete automation categories from the selected Channels Fader Mute 57
142. the threshold has been exceeded It is calibrated in milliseconds ranging from 0 1 ms to 2500 ms 2 5 seconds RELEASE e Determines how fast the compressor turns off once the signal falls below the threshold It is calibrated in milliseconds ranging from10 0 ms to 2500 ms 2 5 seconds RATIO e Determines the change in output level as a function of the change in input level once the threshold has been exceeded The Ratio control ranges from 1 0 1 to inf 1 Thus if the ratio is 10 1 an increase in input level of 10 dB assuming the input is above the threshold level results in a 1 dB increase in output level e When set to inf 1 the compressor acts as a peak limiter After the initial attack time the output does not get any higher than the threshold OUTPUT e Determines the amount of make up gain applied after the compressor Use this control to compensate for the loss of gain caused by the action of the compressor It is calibrated in decibels ranging from unity 0 0 dB to 20 0 dB D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 86 SOFT e This button turns on the compressor soft knee function The knee of the compressor describes the point on the input output graph where the threshold begins to reduce the output e A hard knee compressor means that up until the moment the input signal crosses the threshold no compression occurs once the threshold is crossed the full ratio of gain reduction is applied to the input signal assum
143. to load the file MEM A 2 Click and hold the Menu button Menu Bopass Lindo Ctrl g Ctr l Shitt e Fedo Load Antares Autotune Save User Preset As Save User Preset Reset Antares Autotune Cut Antares T Copy Paste Antares T 3 Select Load Plug in to open a file The Load Preset File dialog box appears Location File Types el Type Name Date 12 18 2002 11 02 26 7 12 18 2002 11 02 22 FLOPPY D8B Manual e Appendices page 153 4 Click INTERNAL if the file is on the internal drive or click FLOPPY if the file is on a floppy disk 5 Select the preset you want to load 6 Click Open to load the selected preset Patch Preset Mame Click in the Preset Dieplay to load from the pull down menu or scroll through presets using the Up Down buttons To Reset the Plug in Reset will reload the default patch 1 Click and hold the Menu button 2 Select Reset Plug in Unde Reda Ctrl Shitt 2e i Ment Bypass Load Antares amp utatune Save User Preset As Save User Preset Reset Antares Autotune Cut Antares4 T Copy Paste amp ntaresAT To Cut Plug in Settings 1 Click and hold the Menu button 2 Select Cut Plug in The current settings are temporarily stored in the clipboard memory in case you want to paste them to a new preset T
144. used only in the Manual control mode The use of Envelope is described in the Manual section on page E 6 The Harmony Control Modes Harmony Control Modes determine the way in which harmonies are created IVL Vocal Studio has four control modes Each of these modes is tailored toward a different application They can be categorized by two items 1 Requires MIDI input Using the D8B s MIDI input a keyboard or sequencer sends note information to the IVL Vocal Studio to create harmonies 2 Intelligent Harmonies IVL Vocal Studio uses intelligence to help create natural harmonies paa Action Manual Chord Requires MIDI Input Use intelligent harmonies medium depth slow rate with onset delay low depth very slow rate with no onset delay Manual Because you can choose exactly which harmony notes you want Manual mode is excellent for creating unusual harmony treatments Where the SmartKey and SmartChord control modes follow the ascending and descending direction of your voice Manual mode allows you to play a descending harmony line over an ascending melody line for example You can combine this aspect with the ability to play dense chord voicings with lots of sixths sevenths and ninth color notes to create harmony parts that are truly unique When using Manual or SmartChord modes the keyboard control modes you can save time by using a MIDI sequencer to play any or all of the instrume
145. using the individual Chan nel pan for L R positioning and the Master Pan V Pot as the selected channel s front rear position control The control surface can perform surround pan positioning using the Etch A Sketch Etch A Mix approach MORPH FLYBAC Surround Panner e Simply drag the colored ball to position a channel anywhere in the surround panorama e The top of the pan grid represents the front speakers e The bottom of the pan grid represents the rear speakers and the subwoofer e The subwoofer Bus 4 is not affected by pan but in the case of LCRS Bus 4 is the rear surround panned bus output Monitor Levels e When a surround mode other than stereo is selected the Monitor Levels faders appear in the MON LEVELS box Each fader corresponds to an analog surround output at Buses 1 8 e A Master fader controls the overall output level of the eight surround outputs The SPEAKER LEVEL V Pot in the D8B Control Room section also controls the Surround Master Monitor fader when in a surround mode e The Monitor Levels affect the signal at the analog Bus 1 8 outputs They do not affect the signal at the ALT 1 8 outputs when Bus 1 8 is assigned to them This allows you to fine tune your surround sound monitoring speaker system without affecting the digital surround output Once the Monitor Levels are set you can lock the monitor level settings by clicking the MENU button and choosing Lock Monitor Levels The LOCK
146. 0 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 III III eooo 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 00000 III III eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo III 0000000 eee 000000 000000 000000 00000 eooo 0000 eooo 00000 III eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 54 000000 000000 000000 0000 eooo III D8B Manual e Appendices page 182 30 34 48 106 48 24 45 69 44 23 88 27 Aux 1 8 Buttons Aux 9 10 and 11 12 Aux Buttons 1 8 Aux Out Section Aux Pans 9 10 and 11 12 Aux Select Pre Post Aux Send Levels Aux Sends Aux Solo eooo III III 000000000 30 000000 000000 000000 00000 III III III 00000 eooo 00000 eooo 0000 00000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 I
147. 0 and 11 12 e The blue bars with the pointers located after Aux levels 9 and 11 are pan controls for Auxes 9 10 and 11 12 e Click and drag left to pan left click and drag right to pan right e Center pan position puts the pointer in the middle of the pan bar the default setting e Control clicking sets the pan to center position e To copy an Aux pan across contiguous multiple channels Alt Click or Right Click on a pan position indicator then drag across several channels EQ On Off e Highlight the EQ button to turn equalization on AUKES AUSES AUSES Quick EQ You can adjust the EQ by click dragging directly in the main screen EQ box This procedure doesn t provide immediate pinpoint accuracy but is very quick in the heat of battle Right click or Alt click Cool Quick EQ Box The blue box directly below the EQ on off icon offers lightning fast access to powerful equalization e When EQ is on adjustments to the overall EQ curve can be performed quickly without entering the Fat Channel e Click on the EQ line and drag up or down to boost or cut frequency ranges All four bands can be adjusted here e Click on any boost or cut then drag right to raise the selected frequency or left to lower it Right click or Alt click on any boost or cut then drag left to increase bandwidth or right to decrease it Double click in the box to open the Fat Channel for more detailed editing of the EQ parameters
148. 000 III eooo 0000 eooo eooo 0000 eooo 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo 0000 00000 III 000 eooo 0000 eooo 0000 eooo 87 000000 000000 000000 000000 eoccce 0000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 00000 0000 III eooo 0000 III 0000 eooo 0000 eooo 0000 87 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 III III 00000 eooo 0000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 0000 III III eooo eooo III III III 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 00000 III eooo 00000 eooo
149. 000 III III III 00000 III 00000 0000 eooo 0000 III 00000 IXIIIII 00000 eooo eooo eooo 0000 III III 0000 19 38 51 52 53 57 115 154 6 69 73 74 144 165 1 6 ss 1 Floppy Disk Flyback Formant Preserving Pitch Shifting Free MIDI From FTP FTP Server eooo III 00000 III III eooo 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000 00000 00000 00000 III III eooo III III eooo 00000 sns 16 33 87 sius T 66 8 8 ies DU e 42 III eooo eooo Gain Structure Diagram Gate Gate On Off Gateway General General Button Group Button Group Ctrl G GUI 00000 III III 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 0000 III III eooo 0000 eooo 00000 III 0000 eooo eooo 000000 000000 eee 000000
150. 000 000000 000000 eooo eooo III eooo 00000 III eooo eooo III 000000 000000 0000000 000000 III 0000 III III III III eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 eooo DII eooo eooo III eooo 00000 III eooo eooo 0000 III III eooo III 0000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo 0000 III eooo III eooo V Pot V Pot Assign Section Aux 1 8 Buttons Aux 11 12 Aux 9 10 CHANNEL Select Display DIGITAL TRIM Level to Master Meters Talkback Mic Vacuum Fluorescent Display VPD Video Monitor Video Port Virtual Group Voice Muting 00000 00000 13 26 29 34 35 43 44 48 30 e 30 30 30 7 31 30 ere es 31 ee 7 32 ave 9 38 M4 III eooo 0000 eooo 0000 eooo 00000 III III 000000 000000
151. 00000 III eooo 000 III 00000 0000 III III III 00000 0000 III eooo 00000 III III III III eooo 0000 eooo eooo 00000 0000 III D8B Manual e Appendices e page 188 70 70 70 69 69 69 70 69 69 69 Dim Amount Faders to Link Speakers MIDI Snapshots One Button Punch Record Safe Solo Latch Use PreRoll Use Write Ready Write Flyback Network Alt 1 0 1 8 Console Linking Network Channel Surround Auto Arm Clear Stereo Mode Setup Options Surround Mode eooo 00000 III eooo III III 0000 III III eooo eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 IXIIII III 0000 eooo eooo 0000 III eooo 0000 00000 III eooo 0000 eooo eooo 00000 0000 0000 III III 00000 67 67 67 70 70 70 70 70 29 160 64 62 62 53 12 10 78 siss 66 81 130 138 39 81 82 81 81 137 40 72 wee 72 134 7 12 72 72
152. 1 V OWNER S MANUAL DIGITAL 8 BUS Version 5 1 HYBRID DESKTOP PRODUCTION CAUTION AVIS RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ATTENTION POUR EVITER LES RISQUES DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE AUCUN ENTRETIEN DE PIECES INTERIEURES PAR L USAGER CONFIER L ENTRETIEN AU PERSONNEL QUALIFIE AVIS POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D INCENDIE OU D ELECTROCUTION N EXPOSEZ PAS CET ARTICLE A LA PLUIE OU A L HUMIDITE The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons Le symbole clair avec pointe de fl che l int rieur d un triangle quilat ral est utilis pour alerter l utilisateur de la pr sence l int rieur du coffret de voltage dangereux non isol d ampleur suffisante pour constituer un risque d l ctrocution The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance Le point d exclamation l int rieur d un triangle quilat ral est
153. 1 Power up Procedure Channel Configuration Planning This actually has a lot to do with how well any audio experience unfolds If you know where you re headed with track expectations and instru mentation you ll be able to make better choices along the way Plan plan again think about it then plan some more Use the Track Sheet Ctrl T to plan your session before you begin recording You ll know more about how to get where you want to be Power up Procedure A well thought out power up procedure saves wear and tear on all your gear This procedure helps minimize the opportunity for equipment damage while maximizing the chance of success Refer to Figure 4 1 for a Fast Track Graphic representation of this procedure 1 Amplification system off power amps or powered monitors 11 Master Fader down L1 Switch Console Power on The D amp B will create a Startup file with default settings if the User Set Template has not yet been specified 1 Open and load a snapshot or a session optional Follow this procedure for a safe and sure startup routine Deliberate well thought out procedures help eliminate uncomfortable pauses in a session They make recording a more enjoyable experience Amp or Powered Master L R Monitors Off E ru D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 page 96 Console Power Set Sample Cock Select A starting Snapshot or Open Your Master Template Nam
154. 18 40 40 40 5 DIOe Cards set to Slave Word Clock In a Word Clock Out D8B Manual Chapter 4 gt page 121 Console Settings ADAT Optical Hookup to HDR24 96 1 Set the Tape Input and Tape Output 01068 or 8 format for each 1099 card to TDIF Cables amp Hardware 2 If the D8B is the clock master set the 3 10 8 or 8 cards for HDR24 96 Sample Rate to either 44 1kHz or 3 DIO 8 or OPTe8 cards for D8B 48kHz and set the Apogee Clock to 1 Clock I O card for D8B Internal in the Digital 1 0 Setup 6 ADAT Optical cables window If it is a clock slave set the 1 75 2 BNC word clock cable Apogee Clock to Word Clock Set the Sample Rate to match the Sample Hookup Rate selected on the 24 90 1 Connect three ADAT Optical cables from the HDR24 96 Optical Outputs to the Optical Inputs on the corresponding I O cards 2 Connect three ADAT Optical cables from the HDR24 96 Optical Inputs to the Optical Outputs on the corresponding I O cards 3 When ADAT Optical is used the D8B must have a Clock I O card installed make the D amp B the clock master connect its Word Clock Out to the HDR24 96 Word Clock In To make the HDR24 96 the clock master connect its Word Clock Out to the 2 Word Clock In HDR24 96 Settings 1 If you have 1210 8 cards installed set the Tape Input and Tape Output format for each card to ADAT OPTe8 cards need no c
155. 2 62 62 62 62 27 31 23 24 64 112 158 158 158 158 158 159 159 99 22 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo III III eooo eooo eooo 00000 III eooo 00000 000000 0000000 000000 eee 000000 III III eooo eooo 00000 III eooo 0000 0000 III III eooo eooo 0000000 0000000 0000000 000000 00000 eooo 0000 III eooo 0000 00000 III III III eooo eooo 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000 eooo 000 eooo 00000 III 0000 III eooo 0000 III III eooo 000000 0000000 000000 eoo 00000 III eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 eooo 00000 00000 III eooo eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 0000 II
156. 2021 jason OH L 04 14 2021 jason OH R 04 14 2021 jason snare 04 14 2021 Static channel parameter settings can be saved and recalled The Open Channel window provides access to previously saved channels on either a floppy disk or the internal hard drive Highlight the desired item and click Open to send the saved channel data to the selected channel Recalls all Fat Channel parameters Save Channel As 3 Location File Types Qi e 6 Type Name Date brady 04 24 2002 Fred voice over 06 18 72002 hihat 10 17 2002 jason 04 14 2021 jason hi tom 04 14 2021 jason kick 04 14 2021 jason lo tom 04 14 2021 jason mid tom 1 04 14 2021 jason OH L 04 14 2021 Allows static channel parameter settings to be named and saved for instant recall at a later time Descriptive naming provides for stress free recall of a finely honed channel status Save channel status to either a floppy disk or the internal hard drive Select New Folder to organize channels into logical groups band name instrument type singers drums guitars etc Saves all Fat Channel parameters D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 57 Group Ctrl G Pick a Group below to add selected channels e Provides avery convenient way to group faders for control by a group master fader in the MASTERS fader bank e Simply select all the desired channels for a specific group by Shift Selecting throughout the Bank or Banks you choose then u
157. 4 PUNCH DIGITAL IN OUT DUE 0 1 7 6 17 8 CA SYNC 22 1 NJ 9 miros 1 1 l ee IP PP Pt Pt Pe Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt Pd bt Pt Pt Pt Pet bt Pt Pt Pt Pt et Pt et Pt et Pet Pt et ttt et et et et Pt bt et et Pt bt bt Pt bt Pt 7 be 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 4 4 99 9 9 9 94 9999 94 Pe Pe Pt Pt 9 999 49 9595959595955 9595095095 9o09o095 9609595995965 9 959559595 9594959959590 9509659059959 95 9596590599595 2 o 590909596595 959 9090909595959 9 9 95 9594 94 95 95 95 95 94 94 94 94 94 94 94 94 4 24 212 ooo 2 2 559 9599595959999599599 9999999999999 ee e 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 2121 29 94 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0000000002 o o o o o O o 0200200002 0002000000 5599999595999 59 9 99599 9909999999999 999999999999 055 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 505 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 00 902 202 99999999999 ree LPL El tel td tod ted ted ted m EJS DUT 1 8 Be RRC UN LINE IN SURRCUND OUT Bo 3 DIGITAL 2
158. 6 Meters Meter 5 I Meter Reference Point p Faders to Tape Show Meters In Trim Mode ls G C G IG ze mem Use Nine Pin Control Show Peak Holds HUI Mode Shift F5 Clear Over Loads 10 Pre Fader metering displays the signal level just prior to the fader This is the default meter type for the meter bridge on the console Post Fader F7 metering displays the signal level just after the fader but before the mute button Post Mute Fader F8 metering displays the signal level just after the mute button D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 62 Meter Reference Point Options Plugins Windows Solo Latch w Link Speakers ree ree ree ree ree Meters 1 T 1T Automation k T Fel T 5 Transport k xL I LI EZ h Meter Type Faders to Tape Show Meters In Trim Use Nine Pin Control Show Peak Holds HUI Mode 5hift F5 Clear Over Loads F10 Use to adjust the point at which the on screen LEDs change from green to yellow 10 dB corresponds to the meter bridge on the D8B control surface 15 dB provides more operating headroom and corre sponds to the recommended nominal operating level 20 dB provides even more operating headroom for program material containing extreme transient peaks Show Meters In Trim Mode When Trim Levels automation is selected the faders go to unity U
159. 71 Filtered It s often convenient to eliminate a parameter or set of parameters from a snapshot change If for example you ve set all the basic EQs in the first snapshot it might be efficient to filter EQ changes out of any new or subsequently recalled snapshots In this way the original equalization settings remain active throughout e Filters are selectable on each snapshot e Parameters which can be filtered from changes are Fader EQ Phase Mute Compression Plugins Pan Gate Direct Routing Auxes and Buses Snapshot 1 filters out the checked items Fader Mute axes Busses Flugins Direct Routing 5 Compr Gate Phase Description e Double click in the description column of the desired snapshot to enter a text description which is then saved with the snapshot data e Dont write your agent s telephone number here or say bad things about the guitar player Snapshot Edit Window This provides access to the snapshot edit parameters Simply click on the word Edit to reveal the snapshot edit parameter pull down list 7 New Snapshot Open Snapshot Save Selection As MIDI Channel GRE Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 Channel 13 Channel 14 Channel 15 Channel 16 Store Snapshot Edit Playback Filter Unlock
160. 72 III 00000 III IXIIII 000000 000000 000000 II III 0000 eooo III eooo 0000 III III eooo III eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 0000000 eoo 000000 000000 0000000 eooo 00000 III Shift Shortcuts Plug in Windows Show Meters In Trim Mode Show Peak Holds Shutdown Ctrl Q Signal Flow Signal Routing Single Button Record Smart Save SMPTE SMPTE View Button Snap Snap Grid Snap To Cues Snap To Grid Snapshot Automation Snapshot Button Snapshot Edit Window Snapshot Filters Snapshot Window Ctrl 2 Snapshot Edit Window Delete Alt Delete Edit Playback Filter Alt l Lock Snapshot MIDI Channel New Snapshot Alt N Open Snapshot Renumber Save Selection As Select All Ctrl A Store Snapshot Unlock Snapshot Snapshot Filter Solo Solo Isolate Solo Latch Solo Level Button Soloing Multiple Channels Song Offset Sony 9 Pin Sony Dynamic Digital Sound Speaker Button Speaker Level Speaker Select Specifications Standard MIDI File Status Bit Designation Status Bits Stereo Stereo Delay Stereo I O Stop Button Store Button Sto
161. 8 89 110 10 57 68 99 121 180 99 2 99 22 56 III eooo 0000 D8B HDR 24 Setup Data Date and Time DAW dbx Default Tempo Delete Events Alt Delete Delete Events DEL Delete Files DELETE Delete Global Time Delete Time Desktop File Menu Cut Copy Paste Rename Duplicate Files Delete Files DELETE Mount Refresh Drives New Folder Ctrl N Select Desktop Window Ctrl D Desktop File Menu Floppy Disk Hard Disk Device ID Digital Audio Workstation Setup Digital Clipping Digital Effects Card Digital Filter Digital 1 0 Digital 1 0 Digital In1 Digital In 2 Digital Performer Digital Sync Digital Trim Dim Amount Dim Button 1098 Connections for ADAT Connections for DA 88 Direct Output Disabled Display Intensity Dither Divergence DSP Duplicate Event Dynamic Automation Dynamics and EQ Applications Dynamics EQ eooo III 0000 II III III 0000 00000 III 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III eooo eooo eooo 0000 eooo 00000 III eooo 0000 00000 III 0000 000000
162. AES EBU Interface Cables DBK Series DB25 to 4 male 4 female XLR s standard length 8 meters only D8B Manual e Appendices page 180 Marshall Electronics PO Box 2027 Culver City CA 90231 Tel 800 800 6608 Fax 310 391 8926 http www mars cam com 1098 Analog Interface Cables DC DAXM Series DB25 to 8 male XLR s DC DAXF Series DB25 to 8 female XLR s DC DAS Series DB25 to 8 1 4 TRS standard lengths 3 5 10 15 20 and 25 feet DIO 8 TDIF Interface Cables DCD 88D Series DB25 to DB25 standard lengths 1 3 6 12 15 20 25 and 33 feet PDIe8 AES EBU Interface Cables DC SYX Series DB25 to 4 male 4 female XLR s DC DUB Series DB25 to DB25 Standard lengths 3 5 10 15 20 25 feet Pro Co Sound Inc 135 E Kalamazoo Ave Kalamazoo MI 49007 Tel 800 253 7360 Fax 616 388 9681 http www procosound com 1098 Analog Interface Cables DA 88 XM Series DB25 to 8 male XLR s DA 88 XF Series DB25 to 8 female XLR s DA 88 BQ Series DB25 to 8 1 4 TRS connectors Standard lengths 5 10 15 20 feet Other Cables In addition to the companies listed above the following companies supply individual 1100 AES EBU and or 750 word clock and video cables Apogee Electronics Corporation 3145 Donald Douglas Loop South Santa Monica CA 90405 3210 Tel 310 915 1000 Fax 310 391 6262 http www apogeedigital com Canare 531 5th Street Unit A San Fernando CA 91340 Tel 818 365 2446 Fax 818 365 0479
163. ALT CONTROL SELECT WRITE Master L R Fader Master Outputs Master Pan Master Section Description Master Solo Aux Master Strip AUX buttons 1 8 CUE LEVEL CUE PAN 1 and 2 DIGITAL TRIM Effects Line Master Fader Master INSERT L R MASTER V Pot Masters SELECT Tape TRACKING LEVEL WRITE Master V Pot Section Masters Max Memory A and B Buttons Meter Reference Point Meter Submenu Clear Over Loads Meter Reference Point Meter Type Show Meters In Trim Mode Show Peak Holds Meter Type Meters in 3 Band Parametric EQ Mono Delay Reverb Stereo Delay Chorus Ping Pong MFX Effects Card Mic Input 00000 III 0000 III 0000 23 158 7 36 eooo III eooo 000 eooo eooo 000000 IXIIII 000000 000000 000000 0000 III eooo eooo III 0000 III eooo 181 000 eooo eooo eooo 000000 0000000 000000 4 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo III III eooo III eooo eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000
164. BUS 8 ASSIGN ASSIGN L R ROUTE TO TAPE 8 Be sure the SPEAKER button is lit that corresponds to your monitor system connection that the yellow light shows on NEAR FIELD or MAIN 9 Turn the SPEAKER LEVEL V pot up to about 11 00 10 Turn the MASTER L R fader up to unity 11 Slowly raise the level of the Channel One fader until you hear sound TRIM u EX gt lt gt lt gt lt gt gt lt gt lt ware BUS 2 8 11111111 411 8 8 ASSIGN 5 BUS 7 BUS 8 ASSIGN ASSIGN L R ROUTE TO TAPE D8B Manual e Chapter 1 page 10 Signal Routing Concept The Digital 8eBus with its multilayer technology literally performs the work of at least four consoles To help organize the various connections visualize each bank as a new console The V or Multi V diagrams that follow provide a simple and accurate mental image of the signal flow and or processing while you put the Digital 8eBus through its paces Figure 1 2 demonstrates a simple connection scheme utilizing a microphone that s routed though the D amp B to the monitor system Figure 1 3 demonstrates a tracking setup Notice how the graphic representation of two separate fader banks supports the mental image of the D8B concept sound source into the MIC LINE bank then routed to the multitrack then back into the TAPE IN bank Fig
165. Cakewalk Pro Calibrate Canare Capture Event Time Alt T Card Cage Section CAT5 Channel Assign Channel Configuration Planning Channel Insert Channel Layout Reconfiguration Channel Link Ctrl L Channel List Ctrl B Channel Link Ctrl L Inverse Pan linking Inverse Switch toggling Relative offset Playback Disabled Punch Run Run Write Enabled Locked Channel Menu 132 eooo 00000 III III III III eooo III eooo eooo 181 0000 eooo 0000 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 0000 eooo eooo 00000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 0000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 III eooo eooo 00000 0000 III III III eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 00000 0000 0000 III III 00000 000 eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 eoo 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 0000 eooo eooo eooo 000 eooo
166. D8B Manual Appendices page 174 MACKIE e D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For DP3 1 D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments DP3 1 Function EM Auto Enable Mute Toggles Audio Track Mute and MIDI Track Mute Automation Enables in DP3 Automation Setup window Automation Auto Auto Mode Touch and Press a channel Write HUI Auto button to enable automation playback and recording on the corresponding Touch LONE channel and to put the channel into Touch automation mode gx Automation Pan Auto Enable Pan Toggles Audio Pan and MIDI Pan Automation Enable in DP3 Automation Setup window Automation Trim Auto Mode Tri Hold and Press a channel Write HUI Auto button to enable automation playback and recording on the corresponding Levels DP3 channel and to put the channel into Trim Latch automation mode cons SMPTE View F8 Esc E DE Cancel open dialog windows The k d k D8B Keypad HUI D8B key pad pa ie D amp B with snap Corresponds to Mac number pad See DP3 commands window for command mapping shot button pressed The Enter key works shot button pressed ENNCHENCHNEA ILI The Store key works Store with D8B with snap Set the Punch In point to the current cursor position Can be used during playback button pressed Alt Alt Store Set the Punch Out point to the current cursor position Can be used during
167. D8B console power supply turned off insert installation disk 1 into the floppy disk drive 9 Power on the console power supply 10 Follow the instructions on the D8B control surface Note The installer no longer uses the VGA screen typical boot is about 30 seconds D8B Manual e Chapter 1 gt page 19 11 12 13 13 14 Place the 2nd floppy disk in the drive when prompted by the installation software Remove the 2nd floppy disk when prompted and place the 3rd floppy disk in the drive Remove the 3rd floppy disk when prompted and power down the console power supply then power back on You now have the updated D8B operating system installed Make sure you read the release notes They have important info about this upgrade Note Repeat the above procedure with the Plugin Service Pack2 sea file to install the plug in update After updating the plug ins software on the D8B you must perform the Erase UFX Memory and Upgrade UFX Cards procedures under Windows in the upper menu bar to upgrade the UFX cards that are installed in the D8B Note to Macintosh USB Floppy drive users Apple s Disk Copy program will not work using the above method with a USB floppy drive because the menu option Make a Floppy will not be available You must use Aladdin Systems ShrinkWrap program available for purchase and trial download from http www aladdinsys com shrinkwrap index html Once you have ShrinkWrap insta
168. D8B via MMC You can however press Play on your recorder and as soon as time code is received by the D8B it reverts to PLAY mode REWIND button Engages external machine to fast rewind with no given locate point FAST FWD button Engages external machine to fast forward with no given locate point STOP button Stops external machines at the current position Note The STOP button lights when time code is not being received by the 82 PLAY button Engages external machine to play at normal speeds from the current location D8B Manual e Chapter 2 page 0 SET TIME 2 SMPTE VIEW POSITION e RANGE HOURS MINUTES SECONDS FRAMES FROM TO Ooo OO oo 881 BARS BEATS TICKS LOOP eae gat 1 2 3 4 5 G 0 6 7 8 9 0 ENTER LOOP STORE LOCATOR SNAPSHOT MODE lg FAST FWD STOP PLAY RECORD L SHUTTLE J JOG amp SHUTTLE Note The PLAY button lights when time code is being received It flashes when you press it and no MTC is received 4 soc RECORD button e Engages Master record function on external machines and Write Ready engaged automa tion channels e Must be pressed with PLAY to engage record mode unless One Button Punch mode is active e One Button Punch allows punching into record without hitting PLAY see Mix Options on page 66 e Pressing any transport button takes 2 and peripherals out of rec
169. DIGITAL TRIM different setting Intentionally check the status PAN PAN mm of the V Pot before making a change AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 E AUX 5 AUX 6 MASTER PAN SOLO AUX 7 AUX 8 E D8B Manual e Chapter 1 gt page 13 m V PRE DSP KEY INPUT lt INSERT Default Itself the channel k CHANNEL OR 5 5 ANALOG STEREO BUS TAP CHANNEL TAP a 50 INSERT RETURN AUX TAP ALT RETURNS POST DSP 5 n lt 2 TRACK DIGITAL INPUT BUS TAP INSERT E PLUG INS AUX TAP PLUG INS 2552 2 TRACK DIGITAL INPUT ONLY MIC LINE 1 through 12 MIC IN G METER 4 1 1 EQTO A Q KEYEQ LINE IN DYNAMICS 0 LINE 15 through 24 GATE IN COMPRESSOR OUT METER METER LINE IN DIRECT ASSIGN TO TAPE OUT FROM TAPE 25 through 32 lt gt Analog channel TAPE CARD optional 0 PFL SOLO FROM TAPE 33 through 40 Analog 9 channel TAPE CARD optional FROM TAPE 41 through 48 BUS 1 8 L R MAIN INSERTS CH PRE POST DSP INSERTS Analog amp channel TAPE CARD optional FX card A inputs 49 52 ALT I O CARD 65 72 optional x TDIF ADAT channel format optional AES EBU amp S PDIF STEREO INPUT 3 TO CONTROL ROOM SELECT Mackie Digital SeBus Block Diagram 2 26 2005 Figure 1 6 D8B Block Diagram This diagram provides a detailed view of the D8B signal path D8B Manual e Chapter gt page 14 S PDIF
170. DK Active Tempo MIDI File Tempo Map MIDI Device ID s Device ID owo MASTER DECK TRACKS 1 8 MIDI IN MIDI OUT DA 88 SLAVE DECK TRACKS 9 16 meme pu G TO 8 Edo DA 88 SLAVE DECK TRACKS 17 24 e 2222229295 ese esos ese ese e 292929 9 9 HE HE HE 2222222323232222223 322232 32228222 0020209209 Sete 002020202 38382 HH 6595655605 Other Notes 1 You must turn on the Digital 8eBus first then turn on the TASCAM recorders Make sure the MODE DIP switches on the SY 88 have the 2nd DIP switch in the up position and all the rest of the switches down This selects the MIDI input The MMC 38 should have firm ware version 1 05 The SY 88 should have firmware version 4 01 ese esese e ese ec 909 959292929 2909929 909 909 2909 909 9 9 9 9 29 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 92999 298989989898989896898989598989895898989899898989898969898998989898989898958958929 eel 1 TDIF s B 2111 9 OPTICAL IS iS S g a gt gt X 58716 4
171. ECORD RECORD 4 127R C 5556 Eeer Eeke solo 5009 oo Em MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 43 e Selects channel for cut copy and paste actions e Press shift then click or drag across multiple SELECT buttons to choose more than one e Right clicking the mouse highlights multiple channel SELECT buttons in the same way as Shift click V Pot e Controls pan aux level aux pan digital trim or level to tape depending on selection in the MASTER section e Click and hold on knob then drag to change setting e Drag up to turn knob clockwise or down to turn knob counterclockwise e Control click any V Pot to set it to default value center unity gain etc WRITE e Activates channel to record automation data RECORD e Arms the record function on up to 24 tracks of any properly connected multitrack s The machines must respond to MIDI Machine Control MMC and they must have proper MIDI device ID settings e Blinking lights indicate tracks are in record ready mode as in they aren t recording yet e Solid red lights indicate that the multitrack is running and active as in you better hope you re not erasing something you didn t want to lose e Click hold and drag to select or unselect multiple record buttons Note If the record process isn t working as expected verify that Record Safe is not checked i
172. ED LED illuminates when the Monitor Levels are locked This allows you to calibrate your setup for any number of standard reference levels Flyback e Adjust surround position as usual by dragging the red or green ball However when FLYBACK is selected the ball surround position immediately snaps flies back to its original position once the mouse button is released Output Assignment Speaker Icons e Toggles channel sends to individual speakers within the surround system between on and off e Click the desired speaker position to include it in the channel s surround pan position Pan Position MEM A e Selected by clicking the MEM A button e Represented by the green ball in the Surround Panner e Acts as a retrievable surround pan divergence level and sub effect level preset that is instantly recalled when MEM A is clicked Pan Position MEM B e Selected by clicking the MEM B button e Represented by the red ball in the Surround Panner e Acts as aretrievable surround pan divergence level and sub effect level preset that is instantly recalled when MEM is clicked Morph e Activated by clicking the MORPH icon e Automatically pans between the MEM A and MEM B surround positions divergence level and sub effect level Morph Time e Controls the amount of time it takes for the MORPH process to move between the two preset positions MEM A and MEM B e Can be adjusted between 1 and 121 seconds Divergence
173. FX and returns Note The panning window functions are only active when a surround mode is selected D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 89 Speaker Select e Highlight the desired speaker number icon to send a specific channel to any or all speakers e Speakers are always numbered according to function Front L R are speakers 1 and 2 Front Center is speaker 3 Rear L R are speakers 5 and 6 L R Center are speakers 7 and 8 Speaker 4 is the Subwoofer or Mono Surround for LCRS e To set speaker status across a 12 channel row or a portion of a row click on a speaker icon and drag parallel left or right Aall channels in the row will adopt the speaker status of the originally selected icon Divergence e This control continuously varies the center image from dead center speaker 3 to a phantom center equally split between speakers 1 and 2 e With a Divergence setting of O the center panned channel is routed to the center speaker only speaker 3 e With a Divergence setting of 100 the center panned channel is routed equally to the left and right speakers speakers 1 and 2 L F E Low Freq Effect e This control varies the channel send level to the subwoofer speaker 4 e This is the only control over individual channel levels to the subwoofer speaker 4 e The pan grid has no effect on this adjustment e With this control set to OFF there is no send level to the subwoofer gt Unity gain is achieved wh
174. Fat Channel Display working If not make sure the AC outlet is live check with a tester or lamp If so refer to No Sound below Make sure the DC power cable is securely connected at the rear panel of the console No Sound Is the signal source working correctly and properly connected to an input on the console Is the TRIM control channels 1 12 or the Digital Trim control channels 1 48 turned all the way down Is the MIC LINE switch set to the correct position Is the channel fader control turned up Has the channel been assigned to an output bus in the Bus Assignment Section Is the master level control for the selected output bus turned all the way down Try soloing a channel and listen to the Control Room Outputs or use headphones connected to the Phones Out with Control Room selected in the Phones Cue Mix Section Make sure the Solo Level is turned up in the Studio Solo Section and the Control Room Level is turned up in the Control Room Section Bad Sound Is the input connector plugged completely into the jack Is it loud and distorted Turn down the output level on the console Are any of the meters hitting the OL mark Try turning down the TRIM control channels 1 12 or the Digital Trim control channels 1 48 Or try turning down the signal source volume control Solo the signal source and listen to it in the Control Room Output or with headphones in the Phones output Select PFL SOLO i
175. GIO lll l il 136 BOUNCING SUMMING Using Bus Outs gt 136 Usine BASIC 137 140 cem UTEM EHI NEN AA A E RO MEI ISI EMEN 141 Appendix Service RM 142 Appendix IVL Vocal Studio 144 the IVL STUR IO C 144 S u 77 DOO 144 AION 146 0 150 Appendix C Plug in Configuration and Routing 22 152 Appendix D ShoF GUES esercito iode fien UM Haud 160 Appendix 163 Appendix uu uuu uu Dn 164 Appendix G Compatible 180 191 le uuu fetter PUN MEM M EHE 182 88 Manual Table of Contents page iii Preface rovide the engineer artist with nearly limitless creative freedom to produce top quality work Mackie Digital 8eBus is an amazing digital audio tool Its flexibility depth and power The D8B v5 1 upgrade offers a host of new features that can make your mixes sound better and speed your workflow Here s a list of the newest features of the Mackie OS v5 1 WHAT S NEW WITH v5 1 e Great new overview screen graphics improve viewing and productivity e HTML on screen Help to quickly answer questions about D8B features and functions gt HUI Mode allows the D8B to operate as a HUI control surface with DAW software applica
176. I eooo eooo eooo 00000 0000 III 0000 III III eooo eooo eooo 6000 eooo eooo eooo III III 000 III eooo III D8B Manual gt Appendices page 186 Mic Line Mic Line Button Microphone Signal Path MIDI MIDI and the D8B MIDI Basics MIDI Channel MIDI File Tempo Map MIDI Implementation Guide MIDI Machine Control MIDI Map MIDI Map Window Ctrl Creating a Route number Direction MIDI Status Mode Open MIDI Map Parameter eooo 00000 III IIl 7 8 26 28 8 26 9 2229 39 71 93 115 115 72 7 163 iun 44 1 0000 III 0000 III eooo 0000 eooo 00000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 III eooo 0000 00000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo III eooo 00000 eooo 000 III eooo 0000 III III 00000 0000 III III III 000000 000000 000000 000000
177. IDI FTP Server Tape 1 8 Tape 9 16 Tape 17 24 Stereo I O OFF Pro Sample Rate Apogee Clock Internal 88 Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 132 4 Set the Digital 8eBus Samplerate to match the computer s sample rate typically 48kHz or 44 1kHz Selecting Internal in the Apogee Clock pull down establishes the D8B as the master Everything else in the digital chain must be capable of slaving to the Digital 89 DAW 1 Set the digital audio interface to follow ADAT optical at the interface input from the 0 lightpipe output 2 Connect the DAWs MIDI digital audio interface to the Digital 8eBus inputs and outputs MOTU PCI 224 v Sample Rate 48000 Samples Per Buffer 1024 Clock Source 2408 Bank Optical Monitor Outputs 1 2 Configure Interface 2408 Enable Routing Bank BankB Bank C PCI Use Ins enabled 24 Outs enabled 24 Aprx 8 79 MB per sec Gane Configuration U E Auto Cue Mix Update Interface options Note Be sure to turn on the D8B before any of the other digital components In addition if your setup uses TDIF connections refer to the previous setup scenario for TASCAM specific settings MIDI IN MIDI Interface MIDI OUT Software based Digital Audio Workstation 0 INPUT 96 oe DAW Digital
178. II III III 00000 00000 0000 00000 00000 00000 eooo eooo eooo 0000 eooo 0000 IXIIII 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo III 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 000 0000 III eooo 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 00000 eooo 0000 eooo 0000 III eooo 0000 eooo eooo 0000 III eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 000 eooo eooo eooo III eooo 00000 III 0000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo 000000 eee 000000 000000 00000 III eooo eooo III eooo III III 000000 000000 000000 000000 140 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo III eooo eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 III DII eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 00000
179. II 0000 III III 0000 eooo 000 III eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo III eooo 89 n TI 81 138 M 22 136 84 84 36 36 36 36 36 10 47 23 36 61 77 III 0000 eooo 0000 Band 4 Dyn Bank Selection BBT Block Diagram BNC Sync Bouncing Summing Using Bus Outs British EQ British H P Bus 1 8 Buttons Bus Assignment Section BUS 1 8 L R ROUTE Bus Assignments Bus Out 1 8 Bypass III eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 eee 000000 000000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo III 0006 III III 0000 III eooo III III eooo 0000 eooo eooo 000000 000000 4 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo 0000 III eooo 0000 0000 III III IXIIII 000000 000000 000000 III eooo III III eooo III III IIl eooo 0000 0000 III
180. III eooo 0000 III 00000 III eooo eooo 00000 eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo 6000 III eooo eooo III eooo eooo 10 0000 eooo III eooo III III III eooo 0000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III eooo eooo eooo III III 0000 eooo 0000 00000 III III 000000 000000 0000000 000000 OMS On Button One Button Punch Open Channel Open Session Ctrl O Open Snapshot Open Surround 8 Options Menu Faders to Tape HUI Mode Link Speakers Meter Submenu Clear Over Loads Meter Reference Point Meter Type Show Meters In Trim Mode Show Peak Holds Solo Latch Use Nine Pin Control eooo III eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 40 62 69 78 115 III eooo 0000 III oo eooo eooo 00000 III III eooo 00000 sans 2 23 57 68 99 60 82 60 zip 62 III 000000
181. IIl III eooo 00000 III eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 III 00000 00000 III 000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 0000 III III 00000 0000000 0000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo 00000 III eooo 00000 III 000 00000 III IIl eooo 0000 III III 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo 00000 0000 eooo 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 159 146 144 wee 40 i DD 56 33 64 112 112 152 w 152 155 155 154 153 154 153 154 e 154 156 33 38 64 63 112 155 63 63 63 63 80 25 93 39 49 e 89 136 ens d 96 6 09 49 68 89 wal s tl dd 181 122 165 25 69 116 e 24 wee 56 140 0000 eooo eooo Ping Pong Pitch Correct Mode Pitch Recognition Play Button Play From Selection Ctrl Space Play
182. L 5 L qui L a ovaz 4 1 1 3dVl OL 3dVl OL DOIVNV SOIVNV d LH s uoud 96 Japsoray 80 euy 2211 8 O soStWus JextWw D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 135 Post Production Setup The Digital 8eBus is an amazing tool no matter what the setup However the more com plex the setup the more amazing the 1282 be comes Post production provides potential for any tracks effects snapshots automation moves and general madness mayhem Most post production facilities use house sync to lock all video equipment together The same piece of gear that generates house sync can provide the D8B and all connected audio gear with the necessary word clock to get everything functioning properly together In order for the D8B to follow external word clock an Apogee Clock I O card is required With the Clock I O card installed the available sample clock options increase The D8B will slave to most any clock source from 32kHz to 48kHz This is also the type of setup that might be found in a home studio that incorporates a central sync generator Bouncing Summing Using Bus Outs You may find that you need to free up some more tracks to get everything to fit You can do a submix and combine several tracks into one or two using the BUS 1 8 Submasters Maybe you have six separate tracks for the ki
183. Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Tape 1 8 Tape 9 16 Tape 17 24 Stereo I O Sample Rate 11222 p a d 44 1 2 Apogee Clock D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 118 You probably have a bad word clock sync connection if You hear audio but it cuts in and out at regular intervals There is no audio signal at the input of the D8B even though everything seems to be connected properly All meters are full on and you hear a very ugly erating grinding static sound When the record playback device transport 15 engaged you see a question mark flashing in the right most portion of the control surface VFD Troubleshooting Word Clock Problems Troubleshoot through the system from the master through the slaves Connect the first two devices and verify their functionality Once they re up and running add the next device and so on This is the most efficient manner to check out a system Verify connection integrity and quality of all sync cables Verify a consistent sample rate setting on all connected sync devices all set to the same sample rate 44 1 48k etc Verity that the master sync source word clock output is connected to the word clock input of the slave and that additional slaves also receive word clock Slaves can either receive word clock directly from the master device or daisy chained through connected slaves Patch word clock out of a connected slave into the word clock input of any other sl
184. Monitor Speaker selection correct Input source Mic DI Line Instrument The Fat Channel O Compression Gate Busing Routing 1111 Signal Routing To L R To Tape To Bus LLL Connecting the Analog Multitrack Simply connect the 8 outputs to an analog consoles inputs for up to 32 channels 8 channels per card of flexible and assignable audio routing including the ALT AlOe8 Card ANALOG INPUTS 0 2 D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 102 Connecting Analog Multitrack s LJ Install AlOe8 card s into one or more of the D8B TAPE CARD slots This provides up to 32 tracks of 1 0 including the ALT I O card 1 Using the appropriate cable connect 25 pin D sub TAPE OUT connector to the multitrack inputs 1 Using the appropriate cable connect the multi track outputs to the 25 pin D sub TAPE INPUT connector Make sure all connections are tightly secured Connecting ADAT Lightpipe Multitraciis 1 Install DIOe8 OPTe8 card into one or more of the D8B TAPE CARD slots Using a fiber optic lightpipe cable connect the 88 Optical output to the ADAT Digital input con nector 1 Using a fiber optic lightpipe cable connect the ADAT Digital output connector to the D8B optical input If the D8B is to be the slave the sync source should be connected to the sync card BNC Word Clock input Connecting ADAT Lightpipe Using two fiber optic
185. New Event Mute All Events and Unmute All Events are also provided in the upper right corner of the Mix Editor window Event markers appear in the Mix Editor s time bar and can be dragged forward or backward Right click on the event marker to open a drop down menu for selecting Mute Event Delete Event Edit Event Commit Event and Lock Time Delete Event Edit Event Lock Time Note Committing an event means that the selected event becomes part of the Mix Editor automation data and no longer operates as a separate event See Commit Event on page 82 for an in depth discussion of this feature Automation tracks may be cut copied and pasted in typical graphic editor fashion using click and drag highlighting with the mouse cursor and the Highlighter tool Crosshair Single segment copy and multiple pasting may be per formed easily with repeatable segments for a groove repetition approach An entire time region across all parameters or channels accord ing to the current filter views may be selected by clicking and dragging across the top time bar Highlighted regions may be nudged up down left or right for trim or offset needs using the 4 nudge arrows top center of the Mix Editor window Note Refer to the History List as well It is of great value when using the Mix Editor e Allows two automation types to be viewed as foreground Page and background Back data great for seeing relatio
186. OL Pressing DIGITAL TRIM activates the channel V Pots as digital input trim adjustments TRACKING Digital clipping could occur if a signal going into the D8B is too hot Noise could occur if the signal is too low Even though the D amp B has plenty of headroom and very little noise it s still a good idea to verify optimum levels MUTE HUTE HUTE HUTE EFFECTS Ch 45 46 Ch 47 Chae MASTERS a a PER OFF OFF With channel faders off set the Master Fader at Unity D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 110 Select Master L R in the Control Room section and adjust the speaker level to a moderately con servative level about 9 00 coNrROL SPEAKERS SPEAKER LEVEL It s often recommended that you monitor from the output of the mixdown recorder If the outputs from the mixdown recorder are patched into the 1285 2 track or Digital inputs simply select the mixdown recorder in the Control Room Section Digital 1 Digital 2 2 Tracks A C 1 Adjust the channel faders dynamics pan effects and EQ for an excellent mix 241 Record the mix and enjoy the mind boggling capabilities of the Mackie Digital 8eBus Sample Mixdown Setup This sample mixdown setup helps provide ideas for how your mixdown setup might look Each setup is unique in many ways yet predictable in many ways ejduuex3 dnyjooH gt S0jeuy 5858 1 4041U0 A
187. OO oense e es Geo ERNCNUITOUNSENNNNCU ID T X RR RN a S O meme e l l l 24 Saveratch windowMemtoc Opens Closes PT Memory Locate Window ars O apar rn rrcrr War iks 8 888888 wx lt s wowee 22211171 1 1 1 oomen Assign Bus7 Auto Mode Lateh N Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to put the PT channel into Auto Latch Mode C imme memene a Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to put the PT channel into Auto Write Mode Shifts to second function of some buttons Used to select multiple values of some parameters M Press twice to save the open PT session Assign Route To 5 Tape Automation Bypass Auto Mode Off Auto Enable Fader N Auto Arms Volume in PT Auto Enable Window Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to turn off PT automation on the channel D8B Manual e Appendices page 168 e D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For Pro Tools D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments Pro Tools Function Automation Mutes Automation Auto Touch Auto Enable Mute N Auto Arms Mute in PT Auto Enable Window Auto Mode Touch Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to put the PT channel into Auto Touch Mode Auto En
188. OUT WORD SYNC FROM RC848 DA 88 TO DA 88 e Je e Je METER UNIT DIGITAL TDIF 1 otago otamo 1 L TDIF Interconnect Cable D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 103 Multitrack Recording Multitrack recording involves a continuous assessment of signal flow If you follow a well planned thought process from the beginning of the signal path to the end you ll succeed in each audio task When multitrack recording using the D8B it s helpful to visualize the basic signal flow between fader banks For any multitrack setup it s impor tant to keep track of the signal path from the console to the multitrack then from the multi track back into the console The illustration below is a review demonstrating an important signal flow concept MIC LINE Bank TAPE IN Bank Work your way though this checklist for multitrack recording _J Connect multitrack ins and outs to D8B 21 Follow basic power up procedure Select Mic Line fader bank MASTERS SHIFT 1 24 25 48 MIC LINE TAPE IN TRACK MONITOR 49 72 EFFECTS BANK SELECT LJ Press phantom power button on the rear of the console for necessary mic inputs Note Condenser mics and active DIs use phantom power Moving coil mics ribbon mics and most electronic instruments don t need phantom po
189. Out 7 to assign Bus 1 to the multitrack record device track number 7 LR LR R ROL OUT OUT OUT tape out 16 ch 40 tape out 17 ch 41 tape out 18 ch 42 tape out 19 ch 43 tape out 20 ch 44 tape out 21 ch 45 tape out 22 ch 46 tape out 23 ch 47 tape out 24 ch 48 tape out 1 ch 25 tape out 2 ch 26 tape out 3 ch 27 tape out 4 ch 28 tape out 5 ch 29 tape out 6 ch 30 tape out 8 ch 32 tape out 9 ch 33 tape out 10 ch 34 tape out 11 ch 35 tape out 12 ch 36 tape out 15 ch 37 tape out 14 ch 38 1 tape out 15 68 59 Bank To Outputs F Set Channel to All Reset Channel Only Reset All Click and hold on the OUT box at the top of BUS channel 90 Drag down to Tape Out 8 to assign Bus 2 to the multitrack record device track number 8 On the recording device select record ready on the tracks 7 and 8 Play the song while recording tracks onto the multitrack With the original 6 channels muted monitor the bounced track on the D8B TAPE IN bank channels 31 and 32 Using Basic Automation What Type of Data Can Be Automated Virtually all of the D8B channel parameters are available for automation However there are a few exceptions some obvious and some not so obvious All D8B channel parameters can be automated except e Analog Trims on channels 1 12 e Tape Output sel
190. SVGA monitor Simply connect them to the corresponding ports on the back of the Remote CPU for access to point and click commands with the mouse as well as key commands and text entry from the keyboard The Mouse Port e Connect a PC compatible mouse PS 2 style e A two button mouse is sufficient The Keyboard e Connect any PC compatible keyboard OWERTY style e Must have a 5 pin DIN connector An adapter can be used for the 9 pin keyboard connector Note Turn the Digital 8eBus OFF before connecting these devices The Digital 8eBus must boot up with these peripheral devices connected in order for them to work properly gt gt The SVGA Monitor A hi density 15 pin D Sub connector is provided to connect an SVGA monitor Use at least a 17 multisync SVGA monitor ca pable of 1024 X 768 resolution and a 72Hz refresh rate Larger monitors provide greater viewing pleasure Use of monitor provides graphic display and control of most console functions including equalization compression gating internal ef fects automation editing and file management The SVGA monitor can be connected without turning off the Digital 8eBus hot plugable Other Connections Console Data A 25 pin D sub connector connects the console to the Remote CPU using the cable supplied MIDI MIDI card in the remote CPU uses a 9 pin D sub connector Install the supplied 9 pin to dual 5 pin adapter to facilita
191. Safe Use PreRoll Use Write Ready Write Flyback MIDI Snapshots Solo Latch Link e Studio Name Speakers and Faders to Tape e Fader Motors Calibration e Dim Amount e Screen Saver e Date and Time e Smart Save selection Surround e Load Last Session at Power up e Advanced Graphics Bus arming Network Clear bus assignments e Network Channel e Stereo Mode setup options e Local Mixer Name J MIDI e Alt T O 1 8 assignments MIDI File Tempo Map loading and resetting e Console Linking Options across the digital e Default Tempo setting network connected Digital 8eBus consoles Digital VO Tape 1 24 e Tape I O Card settings Type UV22 Input Output e Device ID selection e Song Offset e Pre Roll time e Alt 1 8 Card settings Type Input Output FTP Server e Stereo I O settings UV22 Status Bits Choose to allow FTP client Digital In Set IP Address Subnet and Gateway e Sample rate e Apogee Clock status Internal Word Clock J Licensing e Displays authorization status locked or unlocked of D8B plug ins e Enables authorization of plug ins e Displays mixer serial number 5 al Network Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIC FTP Server Speed Display Intensity Refresh Kate Studio Name Date amp Time ry Minutes 7 Smart Save Screen Saver ION 5 OFF IN Create New Files Load Last Session at Po
192. Snapshot Lock Snapshot Delete AIt DEL Renumber Select All Ctrl A New Snapshot Alt N e Creates a new snapshot of the current mixer status throughout all parameters channel and plug in settings except analog TRIM and the selection of MIC or LINE on channels 1 12 e Parameters not affected by snapshot recall are surround mode Channel Key Input ALT I O Output assignment Plug in routing Plug in module D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 72 type and parameter values loading unloading of configuration and Channel List settings Open Snapshot e This opens a previously saved snapshot file from the disk This is a very convenient feature that enables immediate recall over the mixer status for tracking overdubs mixdown etc such as a default mix setting Save Selection As e Saves current mixer snapshot selection highlighted in the snapshot list to a file for recall at a later date e This is different from a stored snapshot in that it saves data in a file for retrieval even from a different session Snapshots on the other hand are stored specifically as a portion of a session file MIDI Channel e Determines the send channel for MIDI program change data sent by a snapshot recall e The snapshot number is sent via a program change on the selected MIDI channel Store Snapshot e Updates the selected snapshot to the current settings on the D amp B This allows you to change a snapshot once it
193. Space Ctrl Space Space Store in locate mode 00 99 numeric entry followed by Enter Ctrl Enter Alt Enter empty locate enter lt lt gt gt Ctrl M Shift lt Shift gt Mouse click or pull down Channel gt Channel List Channel gt Open Channel Channel gt Save Channel As Click on Channel Select Shift Swipe across channel Select s Right mouse button swipe across channel Select s Left click Shift click Double click on any Select Channel Group Channel Ungroup Channel Faders to Unity Channel Faders to Off Channel Channel Link Channel Unlink Channel Adjust Channel Delay Channel Reset Channel Delay Channel Reset Selected Channels Channel Reset Channel Layout Write Solo Channel gt Channel List or Alt click on Solo Mute Mouse click or pull down PLAY STOP in Locator window PLAY STOP in Locator window Edit Play From Selection PLAY STOP RECORD Locator window double click line Locator window click New Double click Cue New REW FFWD D8B Manual gt Appendices page 161 ODDS N ENDS Feature Surface Channel strip name Equal aux trim levels see clipboard ops Bus assigns Bus swipe Assign s DSP function On off toggles Phase EQ Gate Compressor Bypass Automation Bypass Automation Motor Faders off Motor Faders off button Toggle checkbox edit field Mix Editor Shortcu
194. T Track 1 Word Clock DTP INPUT Word Clock INPUT Word Clock OUTPUT From PCI 324 MIDI MIDI N OUT OUT MIDI MIDI IN PCI 324 card output 2 408 Word Clock OUTPUT Use expensive properly impedance matched cabling It s worth it Word Clock OUTPUT Word Clock INPUT Note When using the D8B as the master sync source always power it up before other digitally connected gear You ll have a much better day D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 117 Verifying Word Clock Sync Between Devices and the Digital 8eBus When the D amp B is set to Internal in the Apogee Clock pop up window it generates word clock as a master device All other devices must be connected as slaves If the D8B is slaved properly to a master word clock source Locked is displayed in the Setup gt Digital I O window next to the Apogee Clock pop up window and an asterisk flashes in the nght most portion of the control surface VFD General Network Dio Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Tape 1 8 Tape 9 16 Tape 17 24 Sample Rate Apogee Clock Word Cl w If the D8B is improperly connected as a slave to the digital network Lock Error is displayed in the Setup gt Digital I O window next to the Apogee Clock pop up window and a question mark flashes in the right most portion of the control surface VFD Licensing
195. UXES 2 LEFT 27 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 04 00 00 The Back pull down box allows you to view parameters for a different channel in the background for comparison The six buttons to the left of the Page and Back pull down lists act as filters for parameter selection e When none of these six buttons is pressed all data is displayed for the selected channel e Highlight the EQ button to display EQ data only e Highlight the Comp button to display compression data only e Highlight the Gate button to display gate data only D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 80 e Highlight the FMP button to display fader mute and pan data only e Highlight the Busses button to display bus data only e Highlight the Auxes button to display aux data only These buttons can be selected in combination with each other For example to view EQ and com pression data simply highlight both EQ and Comp Edit Tools Left click on the Mix Editor tools to select them At any time right click in the Mix Editor automation data to open a pop up list for quick and easy selection of the desired Edit Tool Crosshair Hand Magnify or Eraser Pointer Tool Hand Tool e Use this tool to enter new data nodes and to alter existing ones e While the Pointer tool is selected press the Control key to momentarily select the Erase tool e The Pointer tool can create and move new or current automation nodes curve turning point
196. a live setting Pressing Aux 9 10 assigns the channel V Pot to control the send level for the stereo pair Pressing Pan under Aux 9 10 assigns the channel V Pot to adjust pan positioning between the stereo pair Aux 9 10 are not routed to the internal effects processor by default but may be assigned as such in the plug in configuration window Aux 11 12 operates identically to Aux 9 10 LEVEL TO TAPE Level to Tape assigns the channel V Pots as tape output level controls via the I O cards This control is post channel DSP and pre fader Fader adjustments don t affect tape output levels Facilitates optimizing the gain structure from the beginning to the end of the signal path when used correctly When Faders to Tape is active in the Options menu the level to tape is controlled by the source channel faders Figure 2 1 Aux Sends 1 8 Default Mackie Stereo Effects 4 5 1 24 Internal Effects Processor 1 LEVEL TO TAPE aa AUX 1 Internal Effects Processor 2 AUX 3 GC Internal Effects Processor 3 277 7 Internal Effects Processor 4 AUX 9 10 PAN FX 2 FX3 4 FX5 6 FX7 FX8 gt 1 48 C DIGITAL TRIM Internal Effects Processor 5 e AUX 2 5 Internal Effects Processor 6 AUX 4 0 i Internal Effects Processor 7 8
197. able Pan Auto Arms Pan and Send Pan PT Auto Enable Window N Auto Mode Trim Equals Wont work with snap When PT Numeric Keypad mode is Classic press to set focus on PT main time window shot button pressed Then press D8B number pad to enter in new time from right to left Press to make PT locate to time entered Won t work with snap F8 Esc shot button a Cancel open dialog windows The key pad works HUI D8B key pad with D8B with snap N wo 37 Automation Automation Trim Levels wo Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to put the PT channel into Auto Trim Mode 3 Set Time SMPTE View D8B Keypad shot button pressed The Enter key works Enter Enter with D8B With shat OK any on screen dialogs Open Create New Memory Location dialog shot button pressed Won t work with snap shot button pressed The Store key works 22 Y with D8B with snap Create an In point in the edit window Can be used during playback Loop Loop Toggle PT loop playback Store shot button pressed Create out point in the edit window Can be used during playback Won t work with snap When PT Numeric Keypad mode is Classic can be used to recall PT locate points by typing the locate point on the D8B keypad shot button pressed and then pressing Locator Snapshot N A Press to enter D8B snapshot mode Type a snapshot number and press Enter to recall
198. ackie Effects card installed You can load it with either the Mackie Effects plug in or the IVL Vocal Studio plug in The IVL Vocal Studio software will run in demonstration mode where it times out after about 10 minutes of use You must then download the plug in to the card once again to activate it for another 10 minute session To authorize the IVL software plug in simply purchase and install a second MFX card into your Digital 8eBus Then you can download the Mackie Effects plug in to one card and the IVL Vocal Studio plug in to the other card and use them both for as long as you like D8B Manual e Appendices page 144 The Interface VOCAL STUDIO Harmony Pitch Correction amp Reverb INL r DEI eb a CONTROF MODE 2 a Menu Manual SmartChord SmartKey sem HARMONY ENSEMBLE PitchShift ON PROCESSOR MODE Harmony OUTPUT MODE Stereo VOICE MUTING USE MIDI 2 Mute 3 Mute 4 Mute Ch Menu Click this button to save and load your own presets save changes made to an existing preset rename a preset copy current settings to the clipboard and paste settings from the clipboard to any other Vocal Studio preset On Off This button turns the IVL Vocal Studio on or off Processing Mode Use this button to select either Harmony or Pitch Correct mode Harmony This button puts the IVL Vocal Studio into harmony mode allowing 4 voices of harmony or doubled voices to be added to a mix Pitch Corre
199. ame and parameter name parameter value modes e Saves the song Assign Route To S Tape ave Automation Bypass Auto Mode Off Auto Enable Fader N Toggles automation playback and recording of volume Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to turn off Logic automation on the channel D8B Manual e Appendices page 178 e D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For Logic 6 D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments Logic 6 Function 35 Auto Enable Mute N Toggles automation playback and recording of mute 36 Automation Auto Auto Mode Touch N Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to put the Logic channel into Auto Touch Mode 37 Automation Pan Auto Enable Pan 00000000 Toggles automation playback and recording of pan 39 Creates a marker at the current song position 40 Cancel open dialog windows with D8B with snap Corresponds to Mac numeric keyboard Recalls Markers 1 9 N shot button pressed N The Enter key works 42 with D8B wih Shap OK any on screen dialogs Enters folders on selected tracks shot button pressed Won t work with snap The Store key works shot button pressed Won t work with snap Enters Go To Marker mode shot button pressed Toggles D8B snap Press to enter D8B snapshot mode Type a snapshot number and press Enter to recall a snapshot Press Store type a number 8 ume ceno
200. ame region Type in a track name Tab to next channel or shift tab to previous channel Press enter or click anywhere else on screen to exit track naming EELECT EELECT EELECT mim HUTE HITE MUTE HUTE HUTE EENE Guitar Bass G Violin 8 ay 40 40 OFF OFF OFF OFF MUTE Highlighting the MUTE button turns the channel off in the main mix and bus 1 8 outputs Use the mouse to click the MUTE button and highlight it Simply click on more MUTE buttons to mute more channels To select or deselect multiple adjacent MUTE buttons click and hold on any MUTE then drag across the desired channels SOLO The function of the SOLO button PFL AFL or MIXDOWN is dependent on the solo mode selection in the control surface SOLO STUDIO section e Click the on screen SOLO button to hear one channel alone e Hold the Shift key to solo more channels or select solo Latch mode in the Options menu e With the Shift key held click and drag across multiple SOLO buttons to select them all Tl SELECT SELECT LL O m 5 mm HUTE Snare RackL Fackhl Rack E c Multiple Solos Solo Isolate Mode This feature is useful when you want a track or tracks to remain on even when a solo button is pressed For instance if you want to individually solo each track along with the drums simply isolate the drum channels then press individual solo buttons Solo isolating effects returns is also a co
201. and Insert Assign view ossveov rots Changes the assigned Plug in chooses a Plug in Preset or adjusts a plug in parameter listed in bottom line of VFD SS IC S 9 Scroll to next previous parameter of plug in parameters in Plug in Edit View Scroll to next previous insert in Insert Assign View EN u u wau SS Change between normal HUI VFD mode and channel HUI VFD Mode See note below function of VFD V Pots in Insert Assign view When not lit V Pots select Plug in for their corresponding slot ssign EE lit V Pots select preset for their corresponding plug SS RE 3 778 7770 cH awas ansa SE NCC IN _ compressor winsoweat JOpenSemewegdtrWndon 0000000000000 EGR WE s 2 Smerach wintowmemuoc cO LL WOAEECUDET a mre Tra asmoa OI Aure oie atomaren lex ri erred ENECCIET T amma eh e eee 77 00 000 Hold and press a channel Write HUI Auto button to disable automation playback and recording on the corresponding Bypass DP3 channel and to put the channel into Touch automation mode Aut ti Auto Enable Fader Toggles Audio Volume and MIDI Volume Automation Enables in DP3 Automation Setup window
202. and the bottom meters next to the faders change to indicate the actual fader positions Selecting Show Meters In Trim Mode overrides the default Trim Mode indicators and allows the bottom meters to indicate the signal level Show Peak Holds Select this to cause the Overload indicators in the TOP meters view to remain lit when a transient peak triggers the OL indicator Clear Over Loads Clears the Overload indicators when Show Peak Holds is selected Pressing F10 also clears all the OL indicators and clicking an individual OL indicator clears it Faders to Tape Direct out levels Level to Tape from the tape out follow the sourced channels faders For example if channel 12 is assigned to direct out 24 adjusting channel 12 s fader directly affects the tape output level Switch this off for independent Level to Tape settings Use Nine Pin Control With a Seriale9 card installed in the CPU this option activates the Sony 9 Pin control via the Seriale9 interface HUI Mode This option turns on the HUI layer giving the D8B control over DAW software applications that support the Mackie HUI Human User Interface When HUI Mode is turned on a HUI button appears next to the MASTERS button on screen just above the master fader Use the HUI button to access the HUI fader bank On the control surface access the HUI fader bank by pressing SHIFT MASTERS See Appendix F for information about HUI implementation
203. annel Options Mew Session Ctrl N Save Session As Open Session 1 0 e Click the File menu drag down to Save Session As and release Close Window ESC e Enter a new file name or use the default name and select destination folder and or drive Save Session Ctrls P Save Session As Save As Template Reset Template Desktop CtrhD Shutdown 1 1 0 FOST Let s take a quick look at each menu item New Session Ctrl N Press Ctrl N or click the File menu drag down to New Session and release Select this to wait let me guess start a new session The OS will ask you to save changes to the current session if necessary Next you get the chance to name the new session select which folder it ends up in create a new folder to put it in or cancel The session can be saved to the internal hard drive or to a 3 5 floppy disk A session consists of all snapshots automation data and if you choose custom EQ effects and dynamics patches A new session uses the Template as its initial status e An extremely useful feature for saving variations of a session e Lets the current session be saved under a new name leaving the original file untouched from that point on Good for backing up session data under a new file name or to a floppy or external drive Save As Template All new sessions are based on the template The Template is stored separately but it can be update
204. ape I O slots to suit your particular application You can configure the card in the GUI Setup Digital I O and select the I O connector you wish to use Connections for ADAT The connection for ADAT is made with a fiber optic cable sometimes referred to as lightpipe This connection provides 8 channels of digital audio You can purchase this cable from your Alesis dealer Monster Cable Hosa or other cable manufacturer Connections for DA 88 The connection for T DIF 1 is made with a 25 pin D Sub connector This connection provides 8 channels of bidirectional digital audio This connection requires a 25 pin D sub cable Tascam Part Number PW 88D OPT 8 Card ADAT Optical The inexpensive ADAT optical card functions with any device incorporating the ADAT format digital optical lightpipe The 8 card configures itself automatically it doesn t need to be adjusted in the Setup Digital I O window Lightpipe connec tions between the D8B and the connected record playback device are clean and efficient PDI 8 Card AES EBU This card provides 8 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs in the AES EBU standard format Connection is made through a 25 pin D Sub connector You can install this card in any of the Tape In Out slots or in the ALT I O slot AES EBU is a standard two channel digital protocol used for long balanced cable applications Thus each conductor actually transmits two channels of digital audio data MFX Effe
205. ard Fat Channel display GATE button Press this button to see Gate parameters for the selected channel in the onboard Fat Channel display COMPRESSOR button Press this button to see Compressor parameters for the selected channel in the Fat Channel display Note Fat Channel SELECT and page PREVIOUS and NEXT buttons are used as additional view tools PLUG INS button e Press this button and use the prompts from the VFD to select and navigate through the various plug in specific parameters e Use the Next and Previous buttons to page through all available parameters Onboard control of plug ins is intuitive for basic functionality Refer to the individual Plug ins Manual for details regarding the use of each plug in via the control surface or on screen LOAD PATCH button Press this button to load an individual EQ compressor or gate patch saved settings into the currently selected channel Plug in settings previously stored in the onboard library can be loaded into an FX card DSP type must be selected first SAVE PATCH button Press this button to store an individual EQ compressor gate or plug in setting to the onboard library of user presets You must choose EQ Gate Compressor or a plug in before trying to save a patch HELP button Press this button to open the on screen help window Click a topic from the Table of Contents to jump to the selected topic Studio Solo Section This section
206. as well as any internal FX returns Alt I O return or Bus 1 8 can be assigned to one or more or all 24 Tape Outputs gt When ROUTE TAPE is selected press the SELECT button on the channel you want to route to tape then press ASSIGN on the channel strip that corresponds to the desired Tape Output e No two channels can be assigned to the same tape output you can assign two or more chan nels to a bus and route the bus to tape As soon as a channel is assigned to a previously assigned output it takes over the output thus removing the previous assignment Note Great care should be taken whenever a channel is assigned to its own tape track Beware the dreaded feedback loop Ouch Automation Section What Is Automation All About Even if you ve never worked with an automation system you ll find the controls in the Mackie Real Time OS intuitive and powerful Spend a little time grasping the concepts then start mixing If you ve worked with other automation systems you ll find the Mackie OS incredibly quick and easy to master A complete digital system that s been designed well is amazingly powerful and easy to use Have fun AUTOMATION 9 55 FADERS MUTES AUTO TOUCH FADER MOTORS PAN ALL TRIM LEVELS BYPASS button gt Bypasses the playback of all currently written automation moves e This button must be turned off before any auto mation can be recorded or played back e Toggling Bypass doesn t
207. aster for edit operations WRITE button Displays automation status and engages the Master Fader and Aux Master to record automation events dependent on the automation mode CONTROL button Used in combination with other buttons as a modifier key See Shortcuts Appendix D for a list of applications ALT button Used in combination with other buttons as a modifier key See Shortcuts Appendix D for a list of applications Bus Assignment Section This is a quick and easy way to assign or tell what s been assigned to Bus 1 8 or the Master L R bus BUS 1 8 buttons e Only one bus may be selected in the assignment section at a time e Bus assigns are used along with the individual channel Assign buttons e Press any Bus 1 8 button Any channel that s assigned to the selected bus will have its Assign button lit on the individual channel strip on the currently selected bank e Pressing the channel Assign button so the light stays on will assign that channel to the selected bus Pressing Assign so the light goes off removes the assignment D8B Manual e Chapter 2 e page 36 L R button e When L R is selected the individual channels can be assigned or removed from the Master L R bus e Mic Line FX and Returns Channels 1 72 can all be assigned in this way to the L R Master bus ROUTE TO TAPE button e Assigns a selected channel to any or all of the 24 tape outputs e Any of the 48 channels
208. ation Mode controls from the HUI These buttons appear on the HUI layer GUI to the left of the faders Auto Enable controls what DAW functions are written in Automation This is similar to how the 1282 5 automation works These are on off switches For example press Fader to write fader automation The Auto Mode buttons are used in conjunction with the HUI Layer s channel Write buttons to control what automation mode the corresponding DAW channel is in For example to put a channel into Touch mode press and hold the Touch button on the D8B and press a channel s Write button You will see in the DAW the channel will now be in Touch mode The other Auto Mode buttons work in a similar fashion Note that not all DAWs support the same automation modes or parameters Finally we have the Transport and Master Locator section buttons 39 52 These are Global controls which again means they will operate in HUI mode regardless of the bank that is selected The transport works as expected In some DAWs the jog wheel operates differently depending on what screen you have up Generally press it once to jog press it again to shuttle Press it a third time to go back to normal transport The rest of the buttons allow you to do things like enter a time into your DAW locator You can also drop in Punch In Out points on the fly with the Store button Press Store for an In point and press Alt Store for the Out Some of the other buttons allow you
209. ave Verity that the master device word clock status is set to INTERNAL Verity that all slave devices are set to follow EXTERNAL word clock If the system doesn t seem to work correctly you might have an intermittent or broken sync cable Always use high quality 75Q BNC word clock cables Dither To UV22 or Not to UV22 That Is the Question Digital audio s weakness is its ability to accurately reproduce extremely low level signals As the amplitude decreases there are fewer and fewer bits available to accurately represent the audio wave In an analog system the audio simply sinks into the noise floor Even when covered by noise the waveform is still audibly intact In a digital system low level audio simply becomes inaccurate and sounds really bad A few bits at the bottom of the amplitude range aren t capable of faithfully converting the analog information to digital let alone reinterpreting the digital data into analog variations in air pressure Dither is a low level noise that combines with your pristine audio at low levels to help keep enough digital bits active to replicate an accurate waveform throughout the conversion process from digital to analog to digital go figure that it takes noise to make a system work that has no noise UV22 is a very good sounding type of dither that makes a way for more accurate reconstruction of this low level audio The frequency of the UV22 dither noise is lower than the conventional
210. back Plug in Architecture Plug in Windows Plug ins Configuring the Plug in FX Routing Inserting a Plug in into a Channel To Cut Copy Paste Preset Settings To Load a Preset To Reset the Plug in To Save a Preset To write a snapshot on a loaded plug To write automation on a loaded plug in Using an Aux Send with a Plug in Plug ins Button Plug ins Selector Plugin Configuration Window Plugins Ctrl P Plugins Menu Plugins Ctrl P Plugin Configuration Window Pointer Tool Polyphonic Aftertouch Position Display Post Insert Post DSP Insert Post Production Setup Power up Power up Procedure Powered Monitors Pre and Post DSP Pre Insert Pre DSP Insert Pre Fader Listen Pre Roll Previous Arrow Pro Co Sound Inc Pro Tools Program Changes Proper Sync Connection Punch 1 0 Punch Run Punching Automation 0000 III eooo III eooo eooo 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo 00000 III eooo 00000 eooo III eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 III 0000
211. bles amp Hardware the clock master connect its Word 3 21058 cards for HDR24 96 Clock Out to the D8B Word Clock In 3 10 8 cards for D8B 1 Clock I O card for D8B HDR24 96 Settings 3 TDIF cables 1 Set the Tape Input format for each 1 75 BNC word clock cable 1098 card to TDIF and the Tape Output format to TDIF Hookup 2 If the HDR24 96 is the clock master set the Sample Clock to Internal if it between the corresponding TDIF jacks is a clock slave set it to Word Clock and depress the 75 termination 2 When TDIF is used the D8B must switch on the Sync card have a Clock 1 0 card installed To make the D amp B the clock master connect its Word Clock Out not 3 Set the Sample Rate to 44 1kHz or 48kHz according to your preference TDIF Hookup with DIO 8 Apogee Clock cae 0 72 0 DIO amp Cards APOGEE APOGEE APOGEE Word SYNC DIGITAL DIGITALI O DIGMAL I O Clock Out Connection 48 6 6 Digital 8 Bus gals Kms 5 Worda c m TDIF Cables Clock In DB25 2 io o Word Out HDE ut Bee DEB as Sync e e HDR24 96 Master Card O as Master z z Use 0 3 5 Depress the only HDR 24 96 Termination 9 9 9 button if the TDIF Connection HDR24 96 is 101 58 4
212. cally the entire console s parameter set The MIDI Map provides complete parameter access to almost all channel functions master fader channel strip and Aux master controls and all plug in parameters In addition the Master section and Transport controls are assignable to MIDI messages Additionally a roving Fat channel map routing may be added so that MIDI control may follow the selected Fat Channel which is great for external devices such as a joy stick or X Y pad controlling for example a channel s Surround Pan without hard mapping and subsequent remapping MIDI Maps may be created and saved to disk for subsequent recall MIDI continuous controller polyphonic aftertouch and note on messages are assigned to the various parameters via the MIDI Map ina linear approach of one controller type per param eter Any variable controller may be a continuous control message or a poly aftertouch message and any switch message on off or assignment switches can be assigned to a note on or note off as note on of velocity 0 message Messaging may be bidirectional This means you can control the console from a sequencer or control a sequencer from the console Note that MIDI program changes may also be used to trigger D8B snapshots Snapshot program change messages may occur simultaneously with MIDI Map control messaging The shorter length MIDI program change messages allow for much greater MIDI bandwidth utilization and
213. cated plugin slots 5 8 Card three is allocated slots 9 12 Card four is allocated slots 13 16 e For each active plug in the SLOT number button opens and closes the plug in window Plugins Windows Plugins Ctri P 515 Caution Use extreme caution when assigning plug in outputs to channel inserts to avoid creating feedback loops 2 E gt D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 63 e To deactivate a plug in select none in the associated PLUGIN column pull down assignment menu Click OK in the Alert dialog box Warning Deactivating a plug in erases all automation data for the plug in Basic MFX Use Procedure Open the Plugin Configuration window 2 Select MFX 3 0 in the PLUGIN menu When a plug in card slot contains an MFX card a single box covers the four plug in slots allocated to that card 3 Once MFX is selected two mono inputs become available in the INPUT menu 4 Click and hold on the input box to open a drop down menu Drag to select the desired input 5 Open the STEREO EFFECTS windows by clicking on the SLOT buttons to the left of each active input 6 Verify audio send to the plug in at the STEREO EFFECTS input meter and that the ON button below the input meter is yellow 7 Manually set up the desired effect or select from effects presets 8 Click and hold on the Destination box to open a VERY IMPORTANT I drop down menu Drag to select the desired output
214. change the Q e Click and drag up or down on a control knob below the display window e Click and drag up or down in the numeric display boxes Gain Freq 0 e Ctrl click on an editing ball to zero the settings for an EQ band VIEW e Click the VIEW button to open a larger view of the EQ graph in the Fat Channel for more detailed editing Tip Double click in the EQ graph window to open the larger view superimposed over the Compressor and Gate windows Double click again to close it You can also double click the EQ button in the Fat Channel section on the console to open and close the expanded EQ view MENU e Click the MENU button to Open Save Reset Undo Cut Copy and Paste an EQ patch MENU MEM Undo Automation Pass Ctri Z Redo Ctri Shift Z Reset EQ Ch 25 Open EQ Save EQ As Cut Copy Paste EQ MEM A B e Each MEMory stores the most recent MEM A or MEM B EQ settings made for the selected channel e Click either of these memory positions to instantly recall the stored settings e deal for making quick A B comparisons between EQ settings MORPH e Click the MORPH button to smoothly fade from one MEMory setting to the other e The amount of time it takes for this transition is set in the time window directly below the MORPH button e MORPH time can be set as low as 0 1 second or as high as 120 seconds COMPRESSOR OUTPUT THRESHOLD ATTACK RELEASE The meter in the Com
215. ck drum snare drum cymbals left cymbals right tom 1 and tom 2 You can free up five extra tracks by bouncing these down to one track or free up four extra tracks if you want to bounce them down to a stereo pair of tracks The following steps show an example of how to bounce tracks 1 0 down to tracks 7 and 8 by using Bus 1 and 2 By using Buses 1 and 2 whatever pan positioning you ve set up is retained 1 Select Fader Bank 2 by clicking the TAPE button next to the Master Fader EELECT EELECT EELECT EELECT EELECT EELECT EELECT EELECT EELECT Line CHAE SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE HMUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE Ch 41 Ch 42 Ch43 Ch44 Ch45 Ch46 Ch47 Ch4g MASTERS 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 MEM T I t E 5 5 u u U U 2 Turn off the L R assignments for channels 25 30 tracks 1 6 returns Turn off the L R assignments for any other channels you don t want to monitor while bouncing down D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 136 10 Click and hold on the 1 button at the top of channel 1 Sweep across to channel 6 to assign channels 1 6 to Bus 1 Click and hold on the 2 button at the top of channel 6 Sweep across to channel 1 to assign channels 1 6 to Bus 2 Click the MASTERS button next to the Master Fader to select Fader Bank 4 Click and hold on the OUT box at the top of BUS 1 channel 89 Drag down to Tape
216. ckwise until they are finger tight 3 Make sure the POWER switch on the Remote CPU is off 4 Connect the detachable linecord to the Remote CPU Shortly we ll connect to AC power CONSOLE DATA KEYBOARD vu m I 72 a m 92 c 8 23 25 S gt 8 20 2 oz za zi 20 E 2 Se Next connect the keyboard mouse and video monitor These connections are optional but we strongly recommend using them to get the most from your new Digital 8eBus console D8B Manual e Chapter 1 gt page 5 1 Plug a PC compatible keyboard into the KEY BOARD port on the back of the Remote CPU 2 Plug a PS 2 compatible mouse into the MOUSE port on the back of the Remote CPU 3 Plug an SVGA video monitor into the VIDEO port on the back of the Remote CPU Note We highly recommend the use of a multisync monitor however if one is unavailable you must use a monitor capable of at least a 72Hz scan rate We recommend using a 17 inch or larger monitor for best results Now connect the audio inputs and outputs to the console 1 Connect the CR NEAR FIELD or CR MAIN outputs on the back of the Digital 8eBus to the line inputs of the power amplifier These outputs are wired balanced when using a tip ring sleeve connector or unbalanced when using a tip sleeve connector Use instrument line level cable for this connection 2 Connect mon
217. contains a V Pot to control Studio Solo and Talkback levels along with buttons to select various solo functions and talkback to the studio monitor system MIXDOWN SOLO button e This solo status interrupts the L R Main out puts to front of house speakers or 2 track recorders It is the destructive solo e Use this mode whenever you want the soloed track s to be the complete mix a rhythm breakdown is a good example of this e Mixdown Solo is post fader and DSP Level to tape e g 2 track mixdown recorders is con trolled by the Master L R fader 9 STUDIO SOLO MIXDOWN SOLO O CLEAR SOLO RUDE SOLO LIGHT PFL 8 um LEVEL AFL d us LEVEL TO s LEVEL LEVEL e Activates Pre Fader Listen on the solo bus e Accesses the signal before it gets to the fader so the fader has no effect on the soloed signal e This is a mono centered solo feature Pan has no control over this solo feature AFL SOLO button e Activates After Fader Listen on the solo bus e Accesses the signal after the fader so fader moves do affect the soloed signal e This is a stereo bus post pan so soloed chan nels are heard in their correct pan position Note PFL AFL only affects channel soloing and has no effect on aux send soloing D8B Manual e Chapter 2 page 33 TALKBACK TO STUDIO button Routes sound arriving at the in panel Talkback mic to the Studio outputs Note Make sure the speakers that are connected to the Studi
218. cs and Effects Automation of EQ dynamics and effects is simple Select automation mode ALL Start the playback record device Activate automation record command Make changes In order for these parameters to record ALL must be selected in the control surface AUTOMA TION section on screen Locator window or in the Options Automation window Editing Automation Once automation has been recorded on the D8B it can be edited in the Mix Editor However you may want to rerecord a section of automation for one or more channels or parameters The D8Bs automation engine allows several methods to rerecord automation The following table describes these methods and the differences between each Automation Procedural Checklists Automation Start up Procedure Automation In Bypass Clear Automation Save Session As Set Up Rough Mix Save Snapshot For Safety Route Time Code MTC From Playback Device to D8B MIDI Input Verify MTC at D8B Transport SMPTE Window Set Default Levels Exit Bypass Mode Select Parameters Any Combination of Faders Mutes Pans and All O O 5 Auto Touch Summary Checklist Enter Auto Touch Mode Start Playback Device Move a Channel Fader Exit Record and Rewind to Beginning of Track Start Playback from Beginning of Track Repeat this Action for More Parameters Write Ready Summary Checklist Exit the AUTO TOUCH and or TRIM LEVELS Mode Activate the Desired Automation Parameters
219. ct This button puts the IVL Vocal Studio into pitch correct mode allowing a vocal line to be nudged to the note your ear wants to hear Output Mode OUTPUT MODE 1 Stereo This button selects two independent mono in stereo out effects blocks One effects block is used for pitch shifting harmony and doubling The second effects block assigned to a second aux send is used for reverb The input to the reverb effects block comes from a mix of its assigned aux send and the output of the harmony effects block Each effects block then returns its processed signal to an individual stereo return OUTPUT MODE Quad Selects in quad out Input from auxiliary send is routed to the harmony processor Four harmony voices are given discrete outputs to two stereo returns Control Mode CONTROL MODE Manual SmatChord Smarntkey Pitch Shift Manual Any notes played on a MIDI keyboard become the harmony parts These parts will stay on the note assigned by the keyboard even when your voice shifts to a new pitch Using pitch bend and or a modulation wheel realistic expression is introduced SmartChord Chords played from a MIDI keyboard are interpreted by the Vocal Studio to create natural harmony parts that move in tandem with your voice SmartKey Enter the key and scale once at the beginning of a song and the Vocal Studio automatically creates natural harmonies in real time
220. ct Fader Bank 1 MIC LINE gt Double click SELECT on the desired channel to open the on screen Fat Channel e Set compression EQ or gate Since Fader Bank 1 MIC LINE feeds the multitrack inputs any changes made from that bank are printed to tape 2 Processing Dynamics and EQ After Tape e Choose Fader Bank 2 TAPE IN e Double click SELECT button on the desired channel to open the on screen Fat Channel e Adjust compression EQ or gate since TAPE IN Bank receives its feed from the multitrack Fat Channel changes made here dont affect what is printed to tape 3 Analog inserts e Using an insert cable connect the channel send to the input of an external EQ or dynamics processor e Connect the insert cable return side to the external device output All channel level adjustments past the insert are dependent on the external device control settings since the entire channel signal passes through the device Dynamic and EQ control should occur only once in any given signal path Avoid subjecting any signal path to multiple stages of dynamics or EQ processing As a rule fewer circuits almost always result in more pristine and accurate audio even though the D8B signal path is incredibly accurate and transparent Many engineers prefer to save all EQ for mixdown so as to include the least audio manipulation for a more pure sound Many recordists rough the sound in when recording using whatever EQ and dynamic
221. cts Card This card provides two additional DSP en gines for running internal effects The Digital 8eBus is shipped with one card installed in Slot A You can install up to three more MFX cards in Slots B C and D UFX Effects Card This card provides up to four additional DSP engines for running internal effects The UFX architecture provides access to the newest and coolest third party plug ins as well as an array of groovy new Mackie plug ins The D8B effects card slots accommodate any combination of UFX and MFX cards D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 99 Installation of FX Cards IMPORTANT Shut off power to the Digital 8eBus Remote CPU before installing or removing cards Also install your FX cards in order For example put your first FX card in the slot marked A your second FX card in slot etc 5 gt 1 Loosen the four spring loaded screws on the blank cover plate to the FX card slot you want to fill FX Card Cover Plate Removal 2 With your finger in the hole on the FX card and the components on the circuit board facing to the left push the card firmly into the white connector slots so it fits snugly Do not touch any of the circuit board components or solder joints 3 Replace the cover plate and tighten the screws securely using a slotted screwdriver DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREWS or you run the risk of stripping the threads in the 82 FX Card Installati
222. d Fat Channel e All Template preferences are loaded at the be ginning of a New session LOAD button e Brings up the LOAD menu in the onboard Fat Channel display This is the same as Open Session in the on screen File menu e Facilitates the loading of previously saved ses sion files from the hard drive or floppy disk e Sessions can be scanned in the Fat Channel display by pressing the first two SELECT but tons on the left or by turning the far left V Pot D8B Manual e Chapter 2 e page 38 GROUP button e Brings up the Group menu in the Fat Channel display e This is a virtual group function where faders and mutes are linked to one master fader solo and mute button in the Master fader bank e After pressing GROUP press the SELECT but tons on each channel strip to be included in the group then press Exit to complete the ac tion e Control the group from the Master fader bank where faders strips 1 8 control groups 1 8 GENERAL button Brings up the General menu in the Fat Channel display Provides access to e Solo settings e The surround sound matrix e MIDI Machine Control settings e Console layout channel reassignment e Record Safe and Write Ready status settings e VFD display brightness e Network cascading and Alt I O assignments e One button record status e About current OS version PLUG INS button Brings up the Plug In menu in the Fat Channel display for selecting the effects package to l
223. d MIC LINE When the red LEDs are on Fader Bank 2 is selected TAPE IN When both LEDs are on Fader Bank 3 is se lected EFFECTS When neither LED is on Fader Bank 4 is se lected MASTERS When flashing the selected channels are in Punch Run mode see Punch Run on page 56 for more info Select Chooses a channel to be edited Enables onboard or on screen Fat Channel control over the selected channel Operative for copying and pasting data be tween channel strips Part of the grouping and linking procedures Double clicking the SELECT button opens and closes the strip s on screen Fat Channel Pressing and holding opens a channels prefer ences page in the VFD which controls basic channel parameters Pressing and holding two SELECT buttons at once opens a Link options page in the VFD 9 Solo Pressing Solo on any channel lets you hear only the soloed channel Mackie s exclusive Rude Solo Light flashes in cessantly whenever any channel is soloed There are three different types of soloing available PFL AFL and Mixdown Pre Fader Listen solos the signal before it gets to the fader PFL is a monitor function only and has no effect on the Master L R mix send Any channel is soloed in mono regard less of pan position PFL solo level is unaffected by fader changes AFL After Fader Listen solos the signal af ter the fader in the signal path Therefore solo level is affected by
224. d at any point with the current static mix levels setup parameters and track attributes of any given mix Simply pull down the File menu and initiate the Save Template operation The following are stored in the Template Channel Name Noise Filter setting in Channel List Channel Layout rearrangement MDS Network settings Stereo Surround setting Current Tempo default to 120 bpm Time View SMPTE BBT Milliseconds Mix Editor Grid Setting resolution called enap Grid in the pull down Enable Snapping Snap to Cues Snap to Grid D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 51 Many other functions carry over from session to session when opening a new session e g sample rate If you require a more finely tuned template try these approaches 1 Import a snapshot of your favorite settings you must save one to the snapshot library first 2 Do a Save As of the current file Keep a primary snapshot on tap in this file to reset everything Then select all channels and apply the Edit Clear Automation This doesn t clear any dynamic automation in the plug ins so you may want to remove all plug ins in the Plugin Configu ration window to clear plug ins of assignment and automation Note It is not possible to update or delete the Template from the control surface VFD If you are working from the control surface without an on screen interface you may want to save a session with all of your favorite parameters in place
225. d then ENTER at the instant you wish to store a location LOOP button e Used to set the start and end Locate points in a Loop gt To loop a segment first enter the locate start point using the numeric buttons onboard or computer key board then press ENTER e Next press LOOP enter the ending locate point number then press ENTER D8B Manual e Chapter 2 e page 39 STORE button This button is used to save locate points and console automation snapshots to the currently displayed number or a user entered number SNAPSHOT button e Allows the number buttons to be used for entering snapshot numbers e When in this mode the left two digits in the Range display indicate snapshot numbers e Onboard snapshot range is from 00 99 equivalent to MIDI program changes 00 99 More snapshots are available from the on screen interface Transport Controls e These buttons control external devices that respond to MIDI Machine Control MMC MMC is transmitted from the MIDI output port on the rear panel of the remote CPU to MMC compatible devices e Transport controls can be programmed to ex port specific MIDI messages other than standard MMC protocol See MIDI Mapping on page 85 for more details Note is not bidirectional The D8B sends out MMC commands to your tape recorder s but if you arm tracks or operate transport con trols from the tape recorders the activity is not transmitted back to the
226. d to restore the mix 6 L R ROUTE TO TAPE TRACK Select Fader Bank 1 1 Mic Button Down Phantom MASTERS SHIFT 1 24 25 48 MIC LINE TAPE IN MIC TRACK MONITOR 49 72 EFFECTS BANK SELECT Master Fader my at Unity MASTER L R 2 TRACK C MASTER L R MONO ORC NEAR FIELD MAIN SPEAKERS SPEAKER LEVEL Select Monitors Set V pot Around 11 00 Level to Hear In the CONTROL ROOM section press the MASTER L R button so the yellow light comes on Assigning this button sends whatever is coming from the MASTER L R fader to the selected speakers CONTROL ROOM ES 2 TRACK A DIGITAL IN 1 E 2 TRACK B DIGITAL IN 2 2 TRACK C MASTER L R MONO Gp NEAR FIELD MAIN SPEAKERS SPEAKER LEVEL Gs DIM TALKBACK D8B Manual e Chapter 1 gt page 9 7 Inthe ASSIGNMENT section verify that when L R is selected green light on the ASSIGN button in Channel One lights up green This is basic bus assignment procedure Anything you want to come out the MASTER L R bus must light up on the assign button of each desired channel In similar fashion any channel that needs to be assigned to Bus 1 must have the channel assign button lit when Bus 1 is selected in the ASSIGNMENT section ASSIGNMENT ASSIGN ASSIGN BUS 2 ASSIGN ASSIGN BUS 4 gt ASSIGN ASSIGN BUS 5 BUS 6 ASSIGN ASSIGN BUS 7
227. der banks for clipboard automation and other operations pertaining to multiple channel modifications Channel Notes Ctrl Shift T Opens the Channel Notes window for the selected channel Use to keep detailed notes and information about each channel Channel Notes can be opened from the Track Sheet by clicking on the channel number D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 60 The Options Menu The Options menu contains e Solo Latch e Link Speakers e Automation Submenu e Transport Submenu e Meters Submenu e Faders to Tape e Use Nine Pin Control e HUI Mode Options Plugins Wir Solo Latch Link Speakers Automation Transport Meters Faders to Tape Use Nine Pin Control E HUI Mode Solo Latch To activate Solo Latch simply select it in the Options Menu so a check mark appears beside Solo Latch Solo may be set to latch i e more than one solo can be enabled as they are swiped across the screen or on the panel or to radio button only one allowable at a time If solo latch is not set no check mark multiple solos may be manually latched by either 1 Pressing and holding another solo switch while initiating more solos or pressing multiple solos at one time 2 Pressing and holding Shift while initiating more solos Link Speakers e Links the Near Field and Main speaker levels e Changing the speaker level when either speaker set is selected changes the level on the other set e Hold Shift o
228. di cate the level of the combined soloed channels e When Mono is selected in the Control Room section both Left and Right meters indicate the mono level D8B Manual e Chapter 2 e page 31 CHANNEL Select Display e Just to the right of the L R Meters e Numeric readout indicates the selected channel the currently editable channel in the VFD CHANNEL D C 1 11 1 1 2 2 3 3 5 SeRSRSGSNA r E a Fat Channel Section The onboard Fat Channel provides access to all those really cool dynamics and EQ functions It also provides for configuring Setup parameters loading and saving patch information The on screen Fat Channel is an amazing interface that provides the look and feel of a vintage tool as well as precision control and recall Fat Channel Display e VFD Vacuum Fluorescent Display e Provides a text interface to console operation Nearly all static functions and controls are accessible V Pots and SELECT buttons e Four Select buttons and V Pots used to select and adjust options that show up in the Fat Channel VFD e Pressing Select above a Fat Channel V Pot lets the user adjust or scroll through the pertinent options gt V Pots rotate 360 and display the relative adjustment positions as provided by eleven discrete LEDs PREVIOUS and NEXT arrows e Pages the VFD to more parameters whenever mo
229. dow or under the GENERAL MIDI Setup menu in the Fat Channel Display the Write LEDs begin flashing when enabled to indicate Write Standby mode Individual channels remain in Write Standby if write armed up until the point that the Write Master is engaged time code must be rolling and returns to standby mode when the Write Master is toggled off Standby is indicated by flashing LEDs and Armed is indicated by solidly lit LEDs actively writing e Conversely when Use Write Ready is disabled and absolute and absolute trim dynamic automation is enabled any channel Write may be immediately punched in and out of armed status There is no standby mode The transport Record Master only applies to MMC control Record enable Please Note The Record Safe and Master Write functions provide protection against the accidental overwriting of audio and automation data Write Flyback e This feature provides a choice for the punch out ending level of an automation pass You can choose to either leave levels at the current state or to snap levels back to the original punch in state e The purpose of the Write Flyback feature is to establish a rough mix on any given channel at the point when the channel is first punched in so that a default level may be maintained right up to 23 59 59 29 Whether Write Flyback is enabled or not any subsequent punches that occur after the last dynamic event on a track will always rubber band sna
230. e oo mum 01 erse 1 Amp or Powered Monitors On It s a good idea to keep a snapshot of each working configuration as a starting point tracking overdubs symphony grunge band etc J Connect all mics and instruments Be sure all channel faders are down Turn Master Fader down Turn Speaker level down 4 Set up sample clock Verify consistent sample rate settings throughout all digital multitrack recording devices Word clock and digital data transfer connections are very important to the efficiency and functionality of any digital system Verify them Most systems work best when the D8B is the Master word clock source Use the Apogee Clock I O card to send word clock to slave devices 1 Turn amplification system on Wait until all other gear is powered up before turning on the monitor system 24 Enjoy the creative process Setup Window The Setup Window is very important to the functionality of the Digital 8eBus Its settings determine how the console functions within its own architecture as well as how it interfaces with other digital equipment General MM Digitall Licensing pt Surround MIDI FTP Server Mouse Speed Display Intensity Refresh Rate Studio Name Date amp Time Screen Saver Advanced Graphics Smart Save ON OFF Karipa aq E Load Last Session at Power up Follow the checklist on the next page to verify that
231. e Click this button to disable all automation events Unmute All Events e Click this button to enable all automation events S Button e Click the S button at the right side of the time line to return the Mix Editor to the start of the session C Button e Click the button at the right side of the time line to return the Mix Editor to the current time code cursor position Cue Points and Event Markers Tabs along the top of the time line indicate cue points and event markers Simply click and drag the cue point tabs or event markers to reposition them in the Mix Editor window Performance Note For optimum graphic update performance during automation and playback it is best to close all windows other than the Mix Editor Commit Event Event automation is convenient for many types of sessions However sometimes you may need to edit an event further or maybe you want to start a session with snapshot automation and then add some dynamic automation to it The act of turning an event into dynamic automation is called commit ting an event The event automation is turned into dynamic automation nodes Automation nodes are added to the Mix Editor tracks and horizontal automation lines extend to the right along the automation track How far they go is dependant upon the options selected when committing the event e Right click an event in the Mix Editor and choose Commit Event to open the Commit Event dialog box This will transfer
232. e Control click implies holding the Control Ctrl key down while clicking on an item e Alt click implies holding the Alt key down while clicking on an item e Shift click implies holding the Shift key down while clicking on an item e Double click implies clicking twice rather quickly on an item e Drag implies holding the mouse button down while moving it across the screen or across channels FADER e Directly mirrors the control surface fader e Click and hold on fader drag up and down to adjust fader level The fader level in dB appears just below each fader e When FADER MOTORS is turned off in the automation section fader level can only be adjusted on screen e Fader Bank 2 can be viewed on screen along with any other selected Fader Bank Ctrl 8 or on screen Faders button To set fader to unity gain Ctrl click anywhere in the fader throw region D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 42 Right click a channel fader and drag across several adjacent faders to copy its level position to each To jump the fader to a specific point in the fader throw simply click the mouse on that point This fader has no effect on the channel input level It controls channel level to bus 1 8 L R mix and the post fader aux outputs or if Faders to Tape is selected level to tape When BOT bottom metering is selected the channel meter is displayed next to the fader Fader Label Scribble Strip Double click in the channel n
233. e Directive with amendments 91 263 89 392 EEC and 89 336 EEC 89 336 EEC EMC Directive IEC 950 1991 EN60950 1992 Electrical Safety Requirements EN55103 1 and EN55103 2 Residential E1 and Commercial E2 Environments Part No SW0047 Rev A 5 03 2003 Mackie Designs Inc All Rights Reserved Table of Contents Chapter T Getting 3 GAS 4 About This Manual 4 Lets Get 4 alere dab 4 New Way of Thinking Four Consoles in 7 Fader EO 8 Lets Get Some Sound Happening 8 Figure 1 1 Completing the Microphone Signal Path eese nennen 9 10 Figure 1 2 Simple Microphone Connection Basic Live Setup annassa II Figure 1 3 Setting Up Figure 1 4 Basic Mixdown Setup 12 Keep Close Track of These Concepts 12 Figure 5 Sie al Tlow 13 16 DOB Block Didera
234. e This control spreads from the Center to the Left and Right the channel surround pan position in the front half of the surround panorama e The resultant moves can be recorded into automation Divergence Meter e This display indicates the width of the center image from 0 Center to 100 Left and Right only phantom center channel e 50 is an even level distribution among L C and R Low Frequency Effect e Acts as an individual channel level control to the subwoofer output e The number four speaker icon controls the subwoofer on and off status except LCRS e Since low frequencies are omnidirectional individual channel sends to the subwoofer are not controlled in the surround pan positioning grid Their sends to the subwoofers are adjusted by the Low Freq Effect fader e The fader control attenuates from 0 0 full level to 100 off e The level may be further boosted or attenuated at the Bus 4 fader for the entire subwoofer output D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 73 Channel Number Display e This numeric readout indicates the selected channel e Click and drag in the display to select another channel for editing Surround Modes There are seven surround modes available Stereo Quad LCRS 5 1 6 1 7 1 SDDS Sony Dynamic Digital Sound 7 1 TP Theme Park Surround mode selection is accomplished in the Surround Setup window or the Surround Panning window The Surround Mode setting determines the look and
235. e of the selected channel function is displayed in the center of the top VFD line The Online status is also displayed at the end of this line D8B Manual e Appendices page 171 e D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For Cubase SX 16220 Woodinville Redmond Rd NE Woodinville WA 98072 Tel 800 258 6883 Fax 425 806 6312 e mail techmail gmackie com Last Updated 2 07 03 D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments Cubase SX Function F rnVF o UTE Move Move corresponding Cubase SX channel Pan or Send Level Cubase SX channel Pan or Send Level arumawa F 86024 Solo corresponding Cubase SX channel sea a 77 17 1 2 ENGL DUTIES CUT TU UTC Giens one orerar rr EB wem 11281817 o rn r a aan wwuaunt o se u 6 N Enables control of VST channel settings Send 4 by HUI layer V Pots IW NACONCUNEEGCT 7 c XN s CAE xn eem rn 1 ramara e r gt i Gawa omo 22 11 Ga rE jam a a wwarumwwa wvrvrnvsC mesa NEL
236. e power switch off on the Remote CPU wait 5 seconds and turn the power switch back on Note These procedures require you to reboot the D8B after they are completed D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 5 Setting Up for a Session This section of the Digital 8eBus Owner s Manual provides very application specific descrip tions of some common usages Follow the check list format to help ensure everything is set just right for your configuration As your skills and knowledge increase try new techniques Build a system that s optimized for your specific application Listening Environment In any serious recording or live audio situa tion the listening environment is one of the most important considerations In a recording applica tion be sure the Digital 8eBus is connected to excellent reference monitors like the Mackie HR824 s In addition set up the system in an acoustically controlled and balanced environment Avoid a control room with identical dimensions in any direction and set it up with a good mixture of absorption and reflection In a live sound setting place the console out in the house at a good visual and auditory vantage point If you re mixing in mono it s okay to sit in line with one of the speaker clusters When mixing in stereo or surround select the best location typically called the sweet spot to critically assess the entire mix Eliminate guess work Maximize efficiency Figure 4
237. e signal arriving at the in panel Talkback Mic to Phones Cue Mixes 1 and 2 and to Studio Out if Talkback to Studio is selected DIM is engaged automatically while the TALKBACK button is pressed Clipboard Section Provides cut copy paste and undo functions for specific fader operations channel parameters and automation events CLIPBOARD cs CUT ZERO SET COPY en PASTE UNDO CUT ZERO SET button gt Deletes edited parameters from the currently selected channel s and returns them to their default settings e Static or automated options are selected in the Fat Channel display e The parameter settings are placed on the clip board for desired paste operations COPY button e Copies parameters from the currently selected channel s e Static or automated options are selected in the Fat Channel display e The parameter settings are placed on the clip board for desired paste operations PASTE button Pastes copied parameters to the currently selected channels UNDO button e Reverts the currently selected channels to their previous status before a cut copy or paste e Multiple Undo and Redo operations are avail able by pressing UNDO in the Clipboard section then Undo and Redo in the control sur face Fat Channel VFD D8B Manual e Chapter 2 e page 35 Master L R Shortcuts Section MASTER L R SHORTCUTS SELECT CONTROL E WRITE ALT SELECT button Selects the Master Fader and Aux M
238. eBUS PUNCH TAI MASTER OUT DESIGNS THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDIT THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND 15 DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION DATA CABLE to Console REMOTE CPU MIDI OUT E ea U c gt c x 0 c 0 77 v ea e 6 180 gt lt e 2 v lt n Q c c le U D8B Manual e Chapter 4 page 129 Connecting the D8B to TASCAM MDMs Cabling and Hookup 1 Connect the digital cables between the TASCAM tape decks and the 10 8 cards in the Digital 8eBus Note You must use the special dubbing cables provided by TASCAM part number PW 88D 1 meter or PW 88DL 5 meters These cables are reverse wired Do not use a standard DB25 computer cable which is wired straight through pin to pin 2 Connect the sync cables TASCAM part number PW 88S between the master deck and the slaves in a daisy chain fashion Make sure the last deck has a Termination Plug connected to its SYNC OUT connector For the DA 38 An MMC 38 MIDI Machine Control interface must be used prior to the SYNC IN connector on the master
239. eadout will display Bars Beats Ticks BBT Press the SMPTE VIEW button at the left of the control surface readout to toggle between SMPTE and Set Default Levels Once your ducks are in a row you re ready to begin the automation process The Set Default Levels command determines the starting point for the entire mix Fader levels can be written from the beginning of time code 00 00 00 00 to the end 23 59 59 30 If you don t set default levels to your prefer ence levels will jump to any previously selected automation settings as soon as MTC begins This can be very frustrating but if you ve religiously saved snapshots of your mix status you won t be far from repair e Determine that your mix is solid enough that you d like to have all parameters written as defaults Don t get too freaked out about this D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 138 you ll be tweaking the mix to perfection anyway e Verify that all channels are selected by choosing each of the four fader banks and confirming that all SELECT buttons are highlighted Select Set Default Levels from the Edit Menu e Respond Yes to complete the task e Ifyou need to recall your static mix at any point you can save or update snapshots at any time Exit Bypass Mode Once the default levels have been set it s time to exit BYPASS mode From this point on any parameter change can be written into automation Select Parameters Choose the parame
240. ech Support person Mackie Designs SERVICE DEPT 16220 Wood Red Rd NE Woodinville WA 98072 We ll try to fix the product in three to five business days Ask Tech Support for current turnaround times when you call for your RA number We normally send everything back prepaid using three day shipping However if you rush your product to us by next day air we ll treat it in kind by shipping it back the same way in which it was received This paragraph does not necessarily apply to non warranty service Need Help You can reach a technical support representative Monday through Friday from 7 am to 5 pm PST at 1 800 258 6883 After hours visit www mackie com and click Support or email us at techmail mackie com D8B Manual e Appendices page 142 Troubleshooting Guide Three Things to Keep in Mind As you become familiar with the Digital 8eBus you ll find it helpful to keep these three questions in mind at all times 1 What Fader Bank is selected 2 What channel is selected 3 What is the V Pot assignment In 90 of the cases if something isn t working as you expect it should it s because one of these three settings isn t where you intend it to be No power Our favorite question Is it plugged in Make sure the power cord is securely seated in the IEC socket and plugged all the way into the AC outlet Our next favorite question Is the POWER switch on If not try turning it on Is the
241. eck master having the lowest number and the last deck having the highest number DA 88s start with ID 0 and DA 38s start with ID 1 DA 88 DA 38 Deck 1 0 1 Deck 2 1 2 Deck 3 2 3 Note If using a DA 88 as the master and a DA 38 slave assign the DA 88 ID 0 and the DA 38 ID 2 D8B 1 Click the Setup button in the bottom menu bar of the SVGA monitor to open the General Setup window 2 Click the Digital I O icon on the top of the window to open the Digital I O dialog box 3 Click each Tape Input and Output box and select TDIF for each DIO S8 card installed 4 Selectthe appropriate sample rate in the Digital 1 0 Setup window General Network Digital l O Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Tape 1 8 Tape 9 16 Tape 17 24 Stereo I O Tere OFF Input TD ANNE Y Status Bits p UE Sample Rate Apogee Clock For DA 38s with the MMC 38 a Click the MIDI button at the top of the Setup window b Set all Device IDs to 1 all D8B Device IDs must be set to 1 in order to arm tracks from the console For DA 88s with the SY 88s a Click the MIDI button at the top of the Setup window b Set all Device IDs to one digit less than the DIP switch settings S2 on the SY 88 cards for their respective machines For example SY 88 Deck 1 1 0 Deck 2 2 1 Deck 3 3 2 General Network Digitall O Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Default Tempo
242. ection e Pre and Post insert selections e Plug in Configuration selections even though plug in parameters can be automated e Channel reconfigurations Two Types of Automation Automation moves are divided into two basic types snapshot and dynamic Snapshot auto mation makes it possible to instantly reset all automated console settings to a predetermined fixed static position with a single command snapshot recall Dynamic automation allows you to record and play back any parameter changes like fader positions or mute toggles in real time while locked into time code The Digital 8eBus is powered by Mackie s Real Time OS automation software Upon initial power up the console Automation Section is bypassed Snapshot Automation As described in Chapters 2 and 3 of this manual snapshots are simple and painless to store on the D8B snapshot automation refers to simply scroll ing through various snapshots at the appropriate time and place Recalling snapshots in the proper order and position can be accomplished through connection to a MIDI sequencer or by placing snapshot events in the Event Automation Track Your MIDI sequencer sees a snapshot selec tion as a simple patch change which can be recorded as part of the same sequence that might contain all or a portion of your music e Set the sequencer to receive and record MIDI patch change data from the D8B MIDI channel and cable e Select MIDI Snapshots in the Se
243. eginning of Track Start Playback from Beginning of Track Repeat this Action for More Parameters Trim Levels This mode is perfect for updating sections of a mix If you ve worked and toiled over a track throughout a mix adjusting the levels frequently try TRIM mode This valuable mode simply adds or subtracts the same amount from a previously adjusted automation track For example when used for faders all moves are maintained but the overall volume changes D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 139 Press TRIM LEVELS e Press TRIM LEVELS in the control surface Automation section on screen Locator window or in the Options gt Automation menu Notice that the faders all snap to unity position Choose Automation Mode Even though TRIM LEVELS is selected and the faders all move to unity position the fader automation data is still retained and is indicated in the meter bars next to the faders unless Show Meters In Trim Mode is selected under Options Meters Use Channel Faders to Boost or Cut Previously Automated Channel Data e The faders automatically set at unity so they can be easily used to boost or cut the previously adjusted track content e This is an excellent mode to globally adjust channel levels e Simply raise or lower the fader level to boost or cut the sum of your previous adjustments for the selected channel Auto Touch Write Punch in and Write Ready Modes Function in TRIM mode also Automate EQ Dynami
244. elect Channel Patch to route another channel into this Pre DSP insert point PO2 MFX 3 0 POS MFX 3 0 4 empty POS MDW Mono EQ MDW Mono EQ MDW Mono EQ POS MDW Mono EQ TC Level P10 empty P11 Drawmer Dyn P12 Drawmer Dyn P13 DelayFactor P14 DelayFactor P15 empty P16 empty e Source any channel Aux Send or Return FX Send Bus Out or Digital Playback device at this point POST Insert The POST Insert accesses the signal immedi ately past the EQ circuit and before the channel meter and fader This an excellent patch point for individual channel effects where it s appropriate to send the equalized and dynamically controlled signal to effects like chorus or delay The POST insert is also a good choice when inserting an EQ in place of or in addition to the existing channel EQ Poet Fost Reset 1 5 0 PO MFR 3 0 POS MFR 5 0 PO4 empty POS MOW Mono MEOW Mono sm nio POY MEOW Mono Et POS MDW Mono TC Level F10 empty F11 Grawmer Dyn F12 Drawmer Dyn F13 DelayF actor 14 DelayFactor F15 empty F16 empty The PRE and POST insert selections are displayed in the readout windows immediately above the INSERT icons Clicking on the window opens the assigned pl
245. elete Time Insert Global Time Delete Global Time Clear Automation Clear Edit History Select All Select Fader Bank Select All Faders Channel Notes Channel List Time Code Counter Surface New Load Save Session Save Session As General Undo Cut Copy Paste Double click Shift set time 5 enter Sort by column title in window Keyboard Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl S Ctrl D Ctrl Q Ctrl 1 Ctrl Z Ctrl Shift Z Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V DEL Alt M Ctrl A Alt A Alt Shift A Ctrl Shift T Ctrl B tab s enter tab highlight column enter Mouse click or pull down File gt New Session File gt File Manager File gt Save Session File gt Save Session As File gt Save As Template File gt Desktop or Click Desktop in bottom menu bar File gt Shutdown Setup Edit gt Undo channels or moves Edit gt Redo channels or move Edit gt Cut Channels Edit gt Copy Channel s Edit gt Paste Channels Edit gt Delete Events Edit gt Set Default Levels Edit gt Modify Levels Edit gt Insert Time Edit gt Delete Time Edit gt Insert Global Time Edit gt Delete Global Time Edit gt Clear Automation Edit gt Clear Edit History Edit gt Select All Channel gt Select Fader Bank Channel gt Select All Faders Channel gt Channel Notes Channel gt Channel List click on counter s enter click on title in window Window views C
246. elow it Mic Line and Tape Return Banks only For example channel 2 can be linked to channel 1 channel 3 or channel 26 This can be done through the GUI or on the console surface e Horizontal linking allows two stereo channels to be input on adjacent channels and controlled as a pair of consecutive faders Vertical linking allows stereo inputs to be input on vertical pairs with analog cards installed in the appropriate tape I O slots and controlled as a stereo pair from a single fader even though the inputs are on two separate banks This provides great flexibility to a studio with many stereo inputs as up to 24 stereo sources can be controlled from a single bank e To link a pair of channels from the GUI select the left channel of a horizontal pair or the top channel of a vertical pair and choose Channel Link from the Channel menu or press Ctrl L on the keyboard The Link Setup Window will appear Select the Parameters that you would like linked Fader Mute Phase Pan Pan Inversely EQs Comp Gate Busses Auxes Select how you would like to link the channels 9 Link Ch 1 over Ch 2 e Link Ch 2 over Ch 1 e Link Ch 1 over Ch 25 e Link Ch 25 over Ch 1 ume e Select the parameters that you want linked between the channels All checked parameters are adjusted together for both linked channels All parameters are checked by default Next select how you want the channel
247. els start time code enter WRITE mode and with one move increase vocal track fader 2 dB throughout the duration of the pass Note Trim Levels automation writes linked parameters independently on linked channels Auto Touch e Mirrors AUTO TOUCH on the control surface e Readies all selected automation parameters to enter write mode the instant the parameter is adjusted As soon as a selected channel parameter is altered the channel strip enters write mode for the adjusted parameter However adjustments of parameters that haven t be selected for automation in the onboard AUTOMATION or Automation Menu do not cause the channel to enter write mode Faders This readies the automation computer to record all fader movements for any write selected channel Mutes This action readies the automation computer to record all mute activity for any write enabled channel Pan This readies the automation computer to record all Pan movements for the write selected channels All surround pans are recorded as well as L R positioning However surround output depth of center and LFE assignments are not written with this selection use All to write automation for these parameters All sets the automation computer to record all parameter changes for the write selected channels other than the individually selectable FADERS MUTES and PAN Write Flyback This controls what happens to the parameter levels upon punch out of
248. employ pour alerter les utilisateurs de la pr sence d instructions importantes pour le fonctionnement et l entretien service dans le livret d instruction accompagnant l appareil SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 Read Instructions All the safety and operation instructions should be read before this Mackie product is operated 2 Retain Instructions The safety and operating instructions should be kept for future reference 3 Heed Warnings All warnings on this Mackie product and in these operating instructions should be followed 4 Follow Instructions All operating and other instructions should be followed 5 Water and Moisture This Mackie product should not be used near water for example near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink laundry tub in 0 wet basement near a swimming pool swamp or salivating St Bernard dog etc 6 Ventilation This Mackie product should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation For example the Component should not be situated on a bed sofa rug or similar surface that may block any ventilation openings or placed in a built in installation such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through ventilation openings 7 Heat This Mackie product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators or other devices which produce heat PORTABLE CART WARNING Carts and stands The Component should be used
249. en this control is set to 0 0 Pan Ball e Click and drag the pan ball to change surround pan positioning e Top of the pan grid is front bottom of the pan grid is rear e Hold the Control key to restrict the pan ball to vertical movement e Hold the Alt key down to restrict the pan ball to horizontal movement Right Click Right click in the desired window to reveal the surround Menu This menu provides opportunity to e Resetthe channel surround parameters e Undo previous action gt Open previously saved surround channel status e Save existing surround channel parameters e Cut Copy or Paste all channel settings D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 90 The Faders Window Ctrl 8 File Edi HATE MUTI e bz be See h h loz h hb ee 19 20 21 22 23 24 ETERS 1 117 1 117 1 117 1 117 41 117 1 117 1 117 1 117 1 117 MN MD NEN TAPE Bank on top This mode places the tape return fader bank in the upper half of the screen display Now all input faders are available at all times This offers incred ible value in many practical applications even though the tape fader bank masks the Aux Sends Bus Assignments Tape Outs Digital Trims as well as EQ phase Compressor and Gate on off but tons e Record buttons are available on the tape fader bank e Automation Write buttons are available on all 48 channels Channel Numb
250. end of the window selector strip I I OFF I OFF I OFF I OFF I OFF Windows Menu Selections OFF OFF OFF I OFF I OFF I MUN I OFF I OFF OFF OFF OFF I OFF Plugins qm Setup zl Sacchi Surround as Locator MixEditor FatChannel Panning Faders TrackSheet Desktop 5 p Eu gm gm mm wama LL OFF ate OFF OFF T OFF OFF OFF OFF S 2 z a4 Moweo moweo Plugins Menu Selection OFF Mow g ie gere ebd pror p gm FF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF IER Note See Appendix Plug in Configuration and Routing for more information about configuring and routing plug ins D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 64 10 Drawmer Drawmer DlyFactor Satfat The Windows Menu Contains e About e Help Alt H e Hot Keys e Close All Ctrl e Desktop Ctrl D e Setup Ctrl 1 e Snapshot Ctrl 2 e Surround Ctrl 3 e Locator Ctrl 4 e Mix Editor Ctr1 5 e FatChannel Ctrl 6 e Panning Ctrl 7 e Faders Ctrl 8 e Event Track Ctrl 9 e Track Sheet Ctrl T e History List Ctrl H MIDI Map Ctrl e Upgrade UFX Cards e Erase UFX Memory Windows About Help Hot Keys Close All Ctri Desktop Ctri D Setup Ctri 1
251. ensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Aux Select prer Aux 1 12 Pre Post Assign Macros Mixing Options USE PREROLL MIDI SNAPSHOTS FADERS TO TAPE CORD SAFE RITE FLYBACK INK SPEAKERS Dim Amount Fader Motors 3 Place the sequencer in record on the D8B MIDI channel and cable While the mix plays select snapshots at the appropriate time Each snapshot change is stored as data in the sequence and therefore can be shifted cut copied pasted etc See The Snapshot Window on page 69 for information on how to set the program change MIDI channel D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 116 Word Clock and the D8B The Kitchen Sync In order for all digital components to function together in unity they must all move together sample by sample through the digital data stream Word clock is an incredibly important part of digital recording The concept is simple If multiple devices are synchronized together via word clock they progress together through the digital data stream one sample at a time This is called sample accurate sync Each system works in reference to one master device Forty eight thousand times a second or whatever the common sample rate is digital slaves keep track of the word clock status of the master device they only output the next sample when the master device outputs the next sample This type of system provides very accurate synchronization Inc
252. ent parameters in Param View by pressing the Shift key on the keyboard while clicking on tracks You can select multiple non contiguous channels or parameters by pressing the Ctrl key on the keyboard while clicking on tracks Magnify Tool Use this tool to select specific data lengths and to expand the data time to fill the overview screen e Click and drag with the Magnify tool to zoom into a specific area Double click to double the magnification gt Hold the Control key while in magnify mode to toggle between zoom in and zoom out Eraser Tool e Use this tool to click on and remove the data inflection nodes 00 00 36 00 00 00 45 Zoom Arrows e The four green zoom arrows at the top of the channel parameter list expand and contract the time axis left and right arrows and change the displayed number of automation tracks or parameters up and down arrows when clicked with the mouse e The keyboard arrows are mapped to control the same view display changes when the Mix Editor is open using modifier keys as follows Press the Alt key on the keyboard along with the left right arrows to scroll across the Mix Editor timeline Press the Control key along with the left arrow on the keyboard to zoom out Press the Control key along with the nght arrow on the keyboard to zoom in Press the Alt key along with the up down arrows on the keyboard to scroll up and down the channel parameter list 9 Press the Con
253. ent Automation Track e Load Target lets you select a channel destination for the selected data type e A snapshot event does not permit target selection it only requires the entry of the specific snapshot number Browse Path allows you to search your D8B patch files for the desired automation event e Highlight the proper patch in the list then press Open to load the event into the automation event list Note The folder that opens automatically for each event type contains user patches so if you haven t saved any patches you won t see any items on the list e You can enter the exact frame accurate time for the automation event in the Time window e Click each time segment and drag up or down to increase the time setting e Time settings are also selectable by pressing the Tab key until the appropriate time field is highlighted then entering the number from the numeric keypad or number keys on the keyboard Tab from field to field Duplicate Event e Highlight any list item then select Duplicate Event e This creates an ide cal copy of the selected event e Use this feature to duplicate an action at a different time stamp Simply duplicate the event then edit the time stamp field by double clicking on the time reference Place the cursor on the desired time unit then drag up to increase or down to decrease Capture Event Time Alt T e Highlight and release this Edit Menu item to copy the cur
254. eooo 10 eooo eooo 00000 eooo III III 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo III III Adjust Channel Delay 29 Channel Link Ctrl L T n 0 Channel List Ctrl B ih Channel Notes Faders to Off 29 0 0000 III eooo 0000 Faders to Unity Ctrl Group Ctrl G Open Channel Reset Channel Delay Reset Channel Layout Reset Selected Channels 000000 000000 000000 IXIIII eooo III eooo eooo eooo 00000 III III III eooo eooo eooo Save Channel As Select All Faders Alt Shift A de 6 Select Fader Bank Alt A Ungroup ds Unlink Ctrl U 0 ni 88 60 27 43 412 32 26 26 27 sus n 26 27 iu 26 27 26 21 ene 26 26 eue 26 80 2 2 2 9 55 7 ins 62 27 34 35 35 35 35 iiid 35 23 97 116 126 66 sine DI 189 92 180 33 85 45 29 eee 102 102 103 130 sis 116 128 dini 99 iiu 67 25 93 36 9 34 34
255. er servicing should be reterred to the Mackie Service Department 13 Do not remove the cover on the console It is permissible to remove the outer cover on the Remote CPU to install accessory cards Do not remove the inner power supply cover 14 To prevent electric shock do not use this polarized plug with an extension cord receptacle or other outlet unless the blades can be fully inserted to prevent blade exposure Pour pr venir les chocs lectriques ne pas utiliser cette fiche polarise avec un prolongateur un prise de courant ou une autre sortie de courant sauf si les lames peuvent tre ins r es fond sans laisser aucune pariie d couvert 15 Grounding or Polarization Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization means of this Mackie product is not defeated 16 This apparatus does not exceed the Class A Class B whichever is applicable limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interterence regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications ATTENTION Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant las limites applicables aux appareils num riques de class A de class B selon le cas prescrites dans le r glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par les ministere des communications du Canada FCC Information NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digita
256. ere are three slots assigned as TAPE IN OUTS Each slot provides I O for 8 channels so you can add up to 24 tape sends and returns or additional inputs and outputs TO TAPE OUTPUT The D8B can route any channel in Fader Banks 1 2 and 3 to the multitrack through these connectors In addition the bus outputs in Fader Bank 4 MASTERS can be routed out the tape outputs e FROM TAPE INPUT Multitrack outputs are fed back into channels 25 48 Fader Bank 2 through these connectors Depending on the specific I O card these inputs will receive any line level analog or digital signal Each I O card contains its own labeling protocol but the fundamental concepts described above pertain to all Analog 1 0 8 e Each 25 pin D sub connector handles 8 balanced analog channels e Top connectors send line level outputs to the multitrack or other line level equipment e Bottom connectors receive line level analog signal from the multitrack outputs or other line level equipment e Each card offers I O for 8 channels e Connectors are compatible with TASCAM DA 88 25 pin analog connectors Apogee Digital 1 0 010 8 gt Two digital format ins and outs ADAT optical fiber optic connections and TASCAM TDIF 25 pin D sub connections e Select one digital format at a time in the Setup screen One BNC sync connector for master clock connec tion from the D8B to TASCAM clock recipient e Use the DIO 8 card a
257. erent Be sure you don t set it to the address of another device that you have on your network e f you have two D8Bs linked via Ethernet they must have different IP addresses Subnet e n the Subnet window type 255 255 0 0 default value unless your network requires a different subnet mask e n most cases you will want the D8B and the computer to have the same subnet mask Gateway e f no Gateway is being used you can usually leave this setting blank though some FTP clients require an entry even for a simple network 10 10 10 10 is the default value Apply When all parameters are set properly click APPLY to instantly activate the changes The Snapshot Window Ctrl 2 IORMALLED Sans drums Selecting e Click once on the snapshot name to highlight it e A highlighted snapshot can be saved as a selection for recall from within a different session or it can be deleted from the list gt To make a snapshot active from the on screen list double click the snapshot number e To make the snapshot active from the control surface press SNAPSHOT in the transport section use the numeric keys to type the snapshot number then press ENTER Naming e Each new snapshot is automatically given a number and the name snapshot e To change its name double click on snapshot then type the new name Press ENTER on the keyboard to complete the naming procedure D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page
258. ers e Maintains previous channel layout However it s not possible to reconfigure channels once the Faders option is selected Event Automation Track Ctrl 9 Act M ta Rec apshe 0 05 06 Qe o ens ES 0 05 24 00 Presets Compressors unity comp gt Ch 1 The Event Automation Track allows for time stamping snapshot recall and modular DSP recall A list of events can be easily placed moved and edited from this handy window Snapshots Plug ins Channels as well as EQ Compressor and Gate Patches can all be accessed from the disk and placed with frame accurate precision Use this list to trigger files to load at a given timestamp This 15 a handy way to automate EQ because you can edit the Patch and all references change One way of looking at the patch event is as a mini snapshot All events appear in the Mix Editor window as event markers in the time bar Events can be edited from either window Any text entered in the descrip tion column in the Event Automation Track also appears in the event marker tab in the Mix Editor Edit Click this button to choose from the Event Automation Track Edit Menu Alt DEL New Event Alt N e Select this item to add a new event to the list The New Event window opens e New Event Type lets you select the specific type of automation event Snapshot EQ Compressor Gate Channel or Plug in Ev
259. ers using speaker cable Speaker Cable Turn on the power switch on the front panel of the These buttons let you access four completely Remote CPU then turn on the power to all your different sets of controls referred to as Fader Banks peripheral equipment The Digital 8eBus takes a few A fifth fader bank HUI mode is available by pressing moments to load the Mackie Real Time OS SHIFT MASTERS Even though only one Fader Operating System and initialize the DSPs When Bank is accessible at a time all are fully functional the Vacuum Fluorescent Display VFD in the at all times Use of a computer monitor provides on onboard Fat Channel Section indicates EQ settings screen control of two fader banks at a time for channel 1 the console is ready to use Fast Track Power Up 1 Switch D8B power on MASTER HIPT 2 Verify that SPEAKER LEVEL 1 24 48 V Pot is turned all the way down 7 3 Switch on all peripherals TAPE IN processors recorders interfaces etc 49 72 4 Switch on monitor amplifier or powered monitors EFFECTS BANK SELECT A New Way of Thinking Now that you ve got the Digital 8eBus Four Consoles in One powered up try the different fader banks With the Digital 8eBus what you get is way more e Press the MIC LINE button and set up a than what you see at first glance Directly above random set of fader levels the Master L R fader locate four buttons labeled Press the TAPE
260. etwork For example selecting any solo or studio status in the SOLO STUDIO section selects that status in each networked 128 with Solo Logic selected e Speakers This links the Speaker selection across the network including NEAR FIELD MAIN MONO and DIM e Sample Rate This links the sample rate setting across the network Selection of a sample rate status on any networked Digitale8 Bus sets the sample rate on the others with Sample Rate selected This link syncs the sample rate setting but not the source setting Apogee Clock Internal or Word Clock setting Word clock connections must still be made using real live cables e Automation This links the automation control across the network For example enabling automation by selecting ALL in the AUTOMATION section enables ALL automation in each networked D8B with Automation selected Digital 1 O General Network Digital I O Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Tape 1 8 Tape 9 16 Tape 17 24 The Digital I O setup window allows you to make input and output settings for the I O cards that are installed in the Tape In Out card slots The D8B automatically senses the card configura tions and provides selection and patching options accordingly D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 67 Tape Banks Any of the following tape I O cards can be installed in the three Tape In Out slots and the Alt I O slot in the back of the Digital 8eBus e 106 This digital card provides
261. f UV22 dither Off Low and Normal gt In addition Status Bits can be designated as Pro or Consumer usually applicable to DAT mastering Check with the device manufacturer 1 e DAT CD R MiniDisc for the proper setting e The Digital In toggles between AES EBU and S PDIF This selection determines which Digital source is displayed on the Pre Insert Channel Patch list and which Digital In is available to the Control Room section D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 68 Licensing General Network Digitall O Licensing MixOpt Surround MIDI FTPServer Authorized Plugins Kiosk Plugin Build 2 Vocal Studio v3 0 Build 52 Drawmer Dynamics Mono v1 0 Build Authorize 80625 TTinePak vi OBuidS2 Saturated Fat vi 060854 Fraime vi oeus Serial Number Antares Autotune v1 1 Build 56 Filter Machine v1 0 Build 52 lx p e This window provides an interface to install and authorize plug ins e Authorized plug ins are indicated by an opened padlock icon e Locked plug ins are indicated by a closed padlock icon gt To authorize a locked plug in highlight it in the Licensing window and click Authorize e Enter a valid UNLOCK CODE to authorize each locked plug in Unlock codes are furnished by Mackie Designs Unlock Procedure 1 Locate your 28 8 Electronic Serial Number ESN This is displayed at the bottom of the Licensing window The 12 digit
262. fed from an aux bus its output appears on the FX Return channels by default faders in the EFFECTS bank The return channel is determined by the slot number and whether the effect output is mono or stereo For example a reverb with a mono input and stereo output that is installed in Slot 5 has its outputs on FX 5 and FX 6 Note The default state for all FX channels is MUTE You won t hear the effect until you unmute its FX return channel s e A plug in can also receive its input from a channel pre or post DSP insert the main stereo left and right bus or Bus 1 8 When a plug in is inserted in this manner its output is routed directly back into the channel In addition Plugin Chain can be selected as an Input Source which allows you to daisy chain two or more plug ins in series To combine two or more plug ins 1 Assign the Destination output for the first plug in to its default FX Return 2 Assign the Input Source for the second plug in to the FX Return that the first plug in is routed to Input Source Plugin Chain FX 1 16 Assigning a Destination for the Plug in e Click the plug in s Destination button to select where the plug in s output should be routed It can be routed to the FX Returns a channel pre or post DSP insert the main stereo left and right bus or Bus 1 8 VERY IMPORTANT Deactivating the Plug in 1 Select none from the associated plug in drop down assignment menu
263. from the Clock I O card s WORD CLOCK OUT connector to the 48 kHz IN connector on the BRC Note It is necessary to terminate this connection with a 50 ohm termination at the BRC end of the cable You will need a BNC T connector Radio Shack part number 278 112 male female female configuration and a 50 ohm BNC terminator Radio Shack part number 278 270 Connect the T connector to the 48 kHz IN jack on the BRC Then connect the BNC cable from the DIO 8 card to one side of the T and connect the 50 ohm terminator to the other side of the T 3 Connect 9 pin D sub sync cables between the BRC REMOTE OUT TO ADAT and the first ADAT s SYNC IN connector Then connect the sync cables in a daisy chain fashion between the remaining ADATs 4 Connect MIDI cables between the MIDI OUT connector on the Digital 8eBus Remote CPU and the MIDI IN connector on the BRC and between the MIDI IN connector on the Digital 8eBus Remote CPU and the MIDI OUT connector on the BRC D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 126 Settings Graphics in the previous section will help you locate these controls D8B 1 Click the Setup button in the bottom menu bar of the SVGA monitor to open the General Setup window 2 Click the Digital I O icon on the top of the window to open the Digital I O dialog box 3 Click each Tape Input and Output box and select for each 1210 8 card installed 4 Set the Samplerate to 48 kHz
264. ght corner of the dialog box 7 When the Batch Assistant dialog box appears insert a double sided high density 1 44MB floppy disk into drive A and then click the OK button 8 When the Winimage utility has completed writing to the first disk be sure to label your disks so you know which 15 1 2 3 Additionally be sure not to leave a disk in your floppy drive Rebooting your PC with the disk in the drive can create problems with your PC Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the second and third disk image files 9 With the D8B console power supply turned off insert installation disk 1 into the floppy disk drive 10 Power on the console power supply 11 Follow the instructions on the D amp B control surface Note The installer no longer uses the VGA screen typical boot is about 30 seconds 12 Place the 2nd floppy disk in the drive when prompted by the installation software 13 Remove the 2nd floppy disk when prompted and insert the 3rd floppy disk 14 Remove the 3rd floppy disk when prompted and power down the console power supply then power back on 15 You now have the updated 1282 operating system installed 16 Make sure you read the release notes They have important info about this upgrade Note Repeat the above procedure with the ServicePack2 zip file to install the plug in update After updating the plug ins software on the D8B you must perform the Erase UFX Memory and Upgrade UFX Cards
265. gnal falls below the threshold It is calibrated in milliseconds ranging from 10 0 ms to 2500 ms 2 5 seconds RANGE e Determines the amount of gain reduction applied to the signal once the signal level drops below the threshold It is calibrated in decibels ranging from 0 dB to 100 dB EXPAND e Activates the expansion function of the gate The RANGE control is removed and a RATIO control appears THRESHOLD MIDI THRESHOLD D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 87 RATIO e Determines the change in output level as a function of the change in input level once the signal level drops below the threshold This is sometimes called downward expansion The ratio control ranges from 1 1 0 to 1 inf Thus if the ratio is 1 2 a decrease in input level of 10 dB results in a 20 dB decrease in output level assuming the input is below the threshold level MIDI e Enables external MIDI triggering for the gate e This can be useful for gating drums based on a sequenced MIDI drum pattern gt To set up MIDI gate triggering 1 Select MIDI Map from the Windows menu 2 Select New MIDI Route from the Edit window 3 Assign a MIDI note by selecting Note from the MIDI Status drop down menu 4 Select Gate MIDI Trigger from the Parameter column 5 Senda MIDI note to the D8B from a sequencer or other MIDI device The Mode setting in the MIDI Map determines when the gate opens and closes see Creating a Route on page 94
266. gs to any selected file or folder Delete Files DELETE e Highlight the file or folder and select Delete from the Edit menu e Drag any file or folder to the toilet icon to remove it from the disk e A Warning window stands between you and complete erasure of the file to verify the action Note Once a file is put in the toilet DELETED there is no way to recover it It s flushed Mount Refresh Drives Any time a file doesn t seem to have ended up where you thought you put it or you ve swapped floppy disks selecting Mount Refresh Drives will update a file directory window to display its current contents Select All Selects everything that s selectable in the open window Note Anytime you save patches EQ compressor gate plug ins etc the Mackie OS defaults to the User Presets folder Don t fight this procedure To guarantee that your file will be around through various OS and plug in updates keep your presets in the default locations Shutdown Ctrl Q Use the shutdown function to close the Mackie Real Time OS prior to shutting off the 82 The Edit Menu The primary edit menu top of the faders overview screen contains some functions common to normal computer use Cut Copy Paste Undo Clear along with several very useful features unique to the D8B operating system The Edit Menu Contains Undo Ctrl Z Redo Ctrl Shift Z Cut Channels Ctrl X Copy Channel s Ctrl C Paste Channels
267. hannel to one or many tape outputs e This is the most visual way to tell if a channel is routed to several tape outputs e Achannel can be assigned to more than one tape out but only the last one selected appears in the channel s OUT window in the overview screen e No two channels can be assigned to the same tape output To sum channels to a tape output assign them to a bus the route the bus to a tape out Phase e Highlight PHASE to invert the channel polarity by 180 degrees Aux Sends e Use the on screen knobs to adjust any of the aux send levels e Press Control while clicking the Aux knob to set Aux send level to unity gain e Click the PRE button directly below the Aux send knob to toggle the individual Aux Pre Post status e Click the OFF button directly below the Aux send knob to toggle the individual channel Aux on and off mute DIGITAL TRIM e Use the on screen knob to adjust the channel digital trim e Press Control while clicking the knob to set the Digital Trim to unity gain WRITE e Highlight this button to put the selected channel into automation Write Ready mode e This cannot be activated when the console 15 in automation BYPASS mode PAN e Pan channel in the L R spectrum e Control click on the PAN button to snap to center position gt n surround mode a miniature panner is displayed instead of the rotary pan control Double click to open a larger surround window SOLO e Highlight SOLO
268. he plug in also reverts to its default state it is reset To Copy Plug in Settings 1 Click and hold the Menu button 2 Select Copy The current settings are temporarily stored in the clipboard memory in case you want to paste them to a new patch To Paste Plug in Settings 1 Click and hold the Menu button 2 Select Paste Plug in The current settings are replaced with the settings in the clipboard memory Settings can be pasted into MEM A or MEM B D8B Manual e Appendices page 154 Automation and Snapshot Control Dynamic Real Time To write automation on a loaded plug in 1 Engage AUTO TOUCH AUTOMATION BYPASS x FADERS MUTES AUTO TOUCH D FADER MOTORS PAN ALL TRIM LEVELS OFF 2 Engage ALL disengage BYPASS and send timecode to the console POSITION readout will change to show time code is being received 3 Move a parameter or recall a patch user or factory preset Subsequent edits to any recorded automation moves may be performed in the Mix Editor Enable the channel view by clicking on the Channel View button then choose the plug in you wish to view from the page drop down menu This displays a list of available channel and plug in parameters Note Parameters can be controlled from either the GUI plug in graphic parameters using a mouse to modify the parameters or via the VFD V Pots and SELECT buttons with the plug in parameters called up on the VFD readout
269. headphones Follow this simple procedure to set up for a live session Power amps off Console power on Select a starting snapshot Turn Master Fader down Connect all mics and instruments Setup sample clock Power amps on Select Mic Line fader bank Press Mic button on channels using microphone inputs L L L L OU L L Set Pre Fader auxes in Setup Window for monitor use Test each instrument and mic to verify level at console input meter i Adjust input trim for a reading around 15 the meter 9 Press L R in the ASSIGNMENT section to confirm Assign lights on for all desired channels Or look on screen to verify all channels have L R button highlighted in Bus Assign section Live Application Tip 1 Buses 1 8 don t sum to L R Mix internally Therefore to utilize buses as masters route the bus sub out the Alt I O then back into any channel or Alt I O input Or simply use the virtual groups as level and mute masters _1 Set Master Fader to Unity position Turn channel faders up to hear instrument or mic Once the appropriate level is achieved press the channel mute button D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 134 4 Set up a quick mix using level pan EQ dynamics effects 9 Adjust mix to the cue headphone buses 4 Store and label snapshot s Live Application Tip 2 Don t forget the Snapshot filters If you find a parameter setting that you want to keep throughout the perf
270. hen using multiple ADATs connect SYNC OUT from the master ADAT to SYNC IN of the first INPUT SELECT INPUT MONITOR slave then from SYNC OUT of the first slave to TRACK ET SYNC IN of the second slave and so on DIGITAL Settings D8B 1 Open the Setup window Note When powering up turn the Digital 8eBus on 2 Click on Digital I O to open the Digital 0 first then turn the ADATS on dialog box 3 Click on each Tape Input and Output box and select ADAT for each 1099 card installed General Network Digital I O Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Tape 1 8 Tape 9 16 Tape 17 24 Sample Rate Apogee Clock D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 125 Connecting the Digital 8eBus to a BRC and ADATs The inclusion of a BRC controller or for that matter any other sync controller box with word clock and MTC vastly increases the capabilities of the Digital 8eBus With centralized controls common sync reference and MIDI Time Code communication established the digital system works together as one unit Automation is achieved referenced to MTC and digital devices work together sample by sample to make the most of your recordings See Figure on next page Cabling and Hookup 1 Connect a fiber optic lightpipe cable between the ADAT s DIGITAL IN and 6 8 card s ADAT OPTICAL OUT Likewise connect the DIOe8 card s ADAT OPTICAL IN to the ADAT s DIGITAL OUT Connecta BNC cable
271. ick once in a window to be sure it s active e Click in the triangle shaped icon in the upper left hand corner of the active window e Click Close All in the window selection bar along the bottom of the on screen interface To exit the Desktop e Click Mixer in the window selection bar along the bottom of the on screen interface e Press Control D Hard Disk e Click the Hard Disk icon to open the internal hard drive e Common navigation procedures apply through folders and sub folders Floppy Disk e Click the on screen Floppy Disk icon to open the floppy disk window e Common navigation procedures apply through folders and sub folders Desktop File Menu Use the Desktop File Menu to e Close windows ESC Go Back to Mixer Ctrl D e Shutdown Ctrl Q New Folder Cut Ctrl X Copy 1 Paste Ctrl V 03 28 1988 19 37 28 11 28 2000 16 20 38 05 28 1988 19 37 28 08 05 2001 20 52 08 09 07 2002 08 55 42 03 28 1988 19 57 28 02 05 2001 12 05 56 12 14 2002 15 00 36 04 02 2002 23 33 52 11 04 2002 14 51 28 11 22 2000 10 00 18 02 08 2001 11 27 20 Rename Ctrl R Duplicate Delete Files DEL Mount Refresh Drives Select All Ctri A The Edit Menu within the hard disk and floppy disk windows contain the same options New Folder Ctrl N e This action creates a new folder in the active window Cut Copy Paste Rename Duplicate Files You guessed it All these items do all these thin
272. in some cases can accomplish the required control without totally mapping the console via the MIDI Map Snapshot triggering via MIDI is not enabled in the MIDI Map but is set via the GUI Setup gt Mix Options window by checking the MIDI Snapshot box A listing of D8B console parameters is found in the MIDI Implementation Chart at the end of this document The off minimum and maximum values are listed with the associated MIDI control ler values to aid in setting up a remote control map Note that many of the console s values are 8 bit resolution 255 values Since MIDI conven tionally sends only 128 values two byte MSB LSB precision is not supported by the D amp B intermedi ate steps will be interpolated by the D amp B Applications for the MIDI Map include remote transport control from MIDI applications that don t support MMC or the HUI protocol but do allow their own internal parameter mapping surround joystick control or any continuous controller or two state switch application light ing remote mixing show controls etc Any mapped control information may be transmitted via manual adjustment on the console snapshot recall and or automation playback which may include snapshot or other Event track playback D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 93 New MIDI Route Open MIDI Map Save MIDI Map As Delete MIDI Route Creating a Route A Route is created by opening the MIDI Map from the Windows me
273. in to redo the command no access to multiple undos Other HUI Mode HUI Layer Notes Global Mode Global functions are always active when HUI Mode is on no matter what D8B bank is active Non global functions are active only when HUI Mode is On and the D8B is displaying the HUI Layer Normal HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays the normal HUI VFD screen exactly as a real HUI would The contents of the VFD depend on the DAW in use and other settings See notes on the VFD above Channel HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays eight channel names in bottom line of VFD First two VFD select buttons mirror the Channel L and Channel R functions The name of the selected channel function is displayed in the center of the top VFD line The Online status is also displayed at the end of this line D8B Manual e Appendices page 175 e D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For Soundscape 16220 Woodinville Redmond Rd NE Woodinville WA 98072 Tel 800 258 6883 Fax 425 806 6312 e mail techmail mackie com Last Updated 2 07 03 D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments Soundscape Function KS Fader 17 24 Fader 1 8 AM Move corresponding Soundscape channel Output Element Fader Ch V Pot wc 2 Channel V Pot 1 8 Move corresponding Soundscape channel Output Element Pan or Send Level ES Mute 17 24 Mute 1 8 RI Mute corresponding Soundscape channel Output Element Solo 17 24 Solo 1 8 cor
274. ing the attack time has passed e With the soft knee engaged the gain reduction begins to occur before the input signal reaches the threshold The amount of reduction gradually increases until the full ratio setting is reached slightly after the threshold is crossed This can be seen as a curve around the knee point on the compressor graphic display VIEW e This button opens a graphical view of the compressor and gate gain reduction curves input signal level vs output signal level e Click and drag on the nodes in the windows to change the parameters of the compressor and gate Tip Double click the COMPRESSOR and GATE buttons in the Fat Channel section on the console to open and close the expanded dynamics view Double click in the blue background of the expanded dynamics view to close the expanded view window ACTIVE e Click the ACTIVE button to turn on the compressor for the selected channel MENU e Click the MENU button to Open Save Reset Undo Cut Copy and Paste a Compressor patch MEM A B e Each MEMory stores the most recent MEM A or MEM B EQ settings made for the selected channel e Click either of these memory positions to instantly recall the stored settings e deal for making quick A B comparisons between compressor settings Note Soft Knee Meter View and Meter Mode are not stored in the MEM A or MEM B settings GATE The meter in the Gate section indicates either the input signal level o
275. input and output connections via ADAT and T DIF protocol Tape bank I O selections are completely selectable on both inputs and outputs The DIO 8 s provide direct dubbing capabilities from ADAT optical to T DIF format and vice versa Powerful patching options interconnect the Alesis ADAT format and the TASCAM DA series format e PDIe The PDIe8 AES EBU card connects to any digital device that supports the AES EBU digital audio format The PDIe8 allows for real time sample rate conversion and status bit designation on its four pairs of inputs click the Setup button in the Digital I O Setup window Sample Rate Conversion Status Bits 1 2 Converted 5 4 Converted gt Converted T Converted Optimal settings are converted and Pra e 9 The low cost OPTe8 I O card provides 8 channels of ADAT light pipe digital I O e 410 8 This analog card offers 8 balanced line level inputs and outputs per card through two 25 pin D Sub connectors Alt 1 0 e The AIt I O 1 8 operates according to the type of I O card installed AIOe8 DIOe8 PDIe8 8 e The Alt Inputs feed the 8 Alt Return channels on Fader Bank 3 e The Alt Outputs are configured via the Alt I O 1 8 pull downs in the Network Setup window Stereo 0 e These settings apply to the Stereo Digital I O AES EBU and S PDIF connections on the back of the Digital 8eBus e The Stereo I O is configurable for three levels o
276. io all allowances for word sync must be made both consoles need to be clocked from the same source Note All of these Ethernet messages are broadcast from any given control surface that is on line and transmitting or receiving Updating only occurs after the connection is established and the console linking parameters are modified Another Note All D8Bs in a network must have a unique IP address See FTP Server on page 71 for more info Network Channel e Each Digital 8eBus assigned to the same Network Channel is linked according to the functions selected in the Console Linking options e Communication between devices is dependent on common network channel numbers All devices assigned to Network Channel 1 communicate together and act as one console across the selected Console Linking options All devices on Network Channel 2 communicate all devices on Network Channel 3 communicate etc e Communication between all devices sharing a common Network Channel is bidirectional on common Link Option selections Local Mixer Name e This simply allows the D8B to be given a unique name for identification purposes across the network Alt 1 0 1 8 e This provides for the routing of the audio signals from Aux 1 12 Bus 1 8 or L R output through any I O card installed in the Alt I O slot Console Linking e This provides the selection of control signals that are sent or received on the Ethernet connection gt When multiple D8Bs are li
277. ip Alt click the Aux Send level indicator to toggle between pre and post fader operation Post fader is indicated by a red bar pre fader is indicated by a yellow bar a LEE AUSES m E nu 1 In the Fat Channel clicking the PRE buttons below the Aux knobs toggles between pre and post fader operation Yellow indicates pre fader otherwise the aux is post fader Alli SENDS The FX Return Channel e Switch the D8B Bank Select to EFFECTS 49 72 and bring up faders one and two channels 49 and 50 You will also see meter activity associated with these channels FRO FX10 FX11 FX12 41 14 FRIS FX16 1 RET2 RETS RET4 RETS RET6 RET RET 8 FX Channels 1 amp 2 channels 49 amp 50 49 50 Plugins Windows RECORD RECORD Plugins Ctrl P HETTE HETTE P 1 MFX 3 0 Alt 1 2 MFX 3 0 Alt 2 Alt 3 P4 Alt 4 5 VocalStudio Alt 5 RELEET BELEET P6 Alt 6 ZOLO ZOLO Alt 7 P8 Alt 8 127 127F HUTE P 9 MDW Stereo EQ Alt 9 P10 Alt 0 P11 Final Mix Alt Shift 1 P12 Alt Shift 2 P13 Drawmer Dyn Alt Shift 3 The Plug button 14 Alt Shift 4 toggles between P15 Alt Shift 5 Windows menu P16 Drawmer Dyn Alt Shift 6 buttons and FX buttons lower left on the mixer Screen Plugins button opens the Fatch Configuration window or Ctrl P the keyboard Here
278. is no gender effect applied to the harmony voice As you lower the gender amount more male qualities are introduced into the voice As you raise the gender amount more female qualities are introduced into the voice This is the control that gets you that deep bottom end you have been undoubtedly waiting for Detune nnn centz e Random The detune sliders can be adjusted independently for each harmony voice Detune is like a fine tune adjustment on a keyboard The detune amount ranges from 50 cents to 50 cents 50 cents is equal to 1 semitone There is also a normal or random button located in the top right corner of the detune window When normal is selected the detune amounts are fixed at their settings With random selected the detune amounts are randomly generated from 0 detune to the setting for each harmony voice Detune is very useful for two different applications 1 Harmonies Detuning each harmony voice can create natural sounding harmonies In real life nobody sings perfectly in tune so why should the IVL Vocal Studio have to 2 Doubling Detuning unison harmony voices can create the fattest of phat vocal sounds without singing a vocal line four times Volume VOLUME These sliders provide individual level control over your voices If you are in QUAD output mode VOLUME edit will not be available volume will be controlled via the four assigned aux return faders
279. it shows the beginning FROM and ending TO locate points for the loop SET TIME button e Press this button to enter a new time in the Position Display in Hours Minutes Seconds Frames or Bars Beats Ticks Initiates numeric changes that have been typed into the snapshot locate position or range display from the console number but tons or standard IBM style keyboard connected to the console Pressing CONTROL and ENTER increases the SNAPSHOT or LOCATOR selection control surface only Pressing ALT and ENTER decreases the SNAPSHOT or LOCATOR selection control surface only e The number buttons are used to enter the time LOCATOR button e Press ENTER to complete the action This sends an MMC locate command POSITION e RANGE HOURS MINUTES SECONDS FRAMES SET TIME 22 Prague BARS BEATS TICKS E 8 0 8 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 ENTER LOOP STORE LOCATOR SNAPSHOT MODE FAST FWD STOP PLAY RECORD L SHUTTLE JOG amp SHUTTLE 0 4 JOG Allows the number buttons to be used for en tering specific location numbers 9 Each location number 00 99 may represent a specific time during an MTC referenced playback or re cording if previously stored e When in this mode the left two digits in the Range display indicate the locate point number e Locate points can be captured while tape is moving Simply hit STORE the Locate number an
280. itor speakers to the output of the power amplifier using speaker cable Always use high quality wire The sound you hear will be more reliable and accurate Note If you re using powered monitors connect the Left and Right CR NEAR FIELD outputs directly to the line inputs on the powered monitors Optional Refreshments Have a sip of java and a biscotti Details Make sure the POWER switch on the Remote CPU is off Now plug the linecord into an AC outlet properly configured for your model Leave the POWER switch off while connecting the peripheral equipment to the console Note The Remote CPU should be treated as you would any computer We recommend that you use a UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply and a surge protector on the AC line Caution Never connect or disconnect anything except microphone or line level inputs while the console is powered up D8B Manual e Chapter gt page 6 MASTER OUT CR mo 22 Y CR Line Cable Monitors Connect directly from CR NEARFIELD or CR MAIN to powered reference monitors using line level cable r MASTER OUT 4 Z L R lt 2 cr lt r MAIN 2 SZ NEAR FIELD Line Cable e line Cable Y Power Amp Speaker Cable Non powered Monitors Connect from 12813 outputs to power amp using line cable then from amp to non powered speak
281. k status FADER e Highlight this button to enable the recording of fader movements into automation MUTE e Highlight this button to enable the recording of mute on off selections into automation PAN e Highlight this button to enable the recording of pan and surround positions into automation ALL e Highlight this button to enable the recording of all other automation parameters besides fader mute and pan into automation TOUCH e Highlight this button to enable automation data recording by simply moving an automation parameter control e While automation is playing back moving any selected parameter control begins instant recording of that automation parameter TRIM e Highlight this button to move all faders to unity position for TRIM automation e This status adds or subtracts the TRIM fader movement to or from all previous channel automation data Use this feature anytime you want to keep all previously recorded fader moves intact while offsetting the relative track level HIDE OPTS e Click this button to hide the transport and record options in the Locator window HIDE CUES e Click this button to hide the cue list in the Locator window Mix Options Parameters A number of transport related options are available which are mirrored in the Setup Mix Options window These include e Single Btn Rec One Button Punch puts connected record devices into record mode by simply pressing the RECORD button
282. l causes the higher frequencies to roll off faster than the low frequen cies The higher the damping setting the faster the high frequencies roll off This is a unit less measure with a range from 0 to 10 Rolloff This adjusts the cutoff frequency for rolling off the entire reverberant signal This is different from the damping control which rolls off only the higher frequencies over time It is cali brated in Hertz Hz with a range from 500 Hz to 20 kHz It also has a Flat position which bypasses the control Mono Delay The mono delay effect provides an adjustable delay which is returned to the left and right stereo effect return It also provides an adjustable feedback path for a multiple echo effect The mono delay has the following controls Delay This adjusts the amount of time between the original signal and the delayed signal It is calibrated in milliseconds ms with a range from 0 ms to 1599 ms 1 6 seconds Feedback This adjusts the amount of signal that is fed back to the input of the delay It is calibrated in percent with a range from 096 to 99 Rolloff This adjusts the cutoff frequency for rolling off the feedback signal It is calibrated in Hertz Hz with a range from 500 Hz to 20 kHz It also has a Flat position which bypasses the control Stereo Delay The stereo delay effect provides independently adjustable delays which are returned to the left and right stereo effect return It also provides an
283. l device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture Note The following notice concerns the lithium battery located on the motherboard inside the Remote CPU CAUTION DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER S INSTRUCTIONS ATTENTION IL Y A DANGER D EXPLOSION S IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MEME TYPE OU D UN TYPE QUIVALENT RECOMMAND PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES USAGEES CONFORM MENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT Statement of Conformity Mackie Designs Digital 8eBus has been tested and conforms to the following standards and directives of the European Council 13 23 Low Voltag
284. les control of Enables control of Send by HUI layer V Pots Send B Enables control of Send by HUI layer V Pots HUI layer V Pots CIN EM CELIANEEN TI 0 OM RR ae UNE send D Enables control of PT Send D Enables control of PT Send D by HUI layer V Pots HUI layer V Pots oaa RN 8 Rerayai Enables all Rec Ready buttons in PT all Rec Enables all Rec Ready buttons in PT mixer buttons in PT mixer wam 7 axma Bowron f Smits hunieyerto riontoy 8tovownent __________ aa T ENCIGN eroro wama Kua aaa a h uwa ENLCICONMUNNEN ws wawa Displays Plug in Insert settings for selected Insert Channel There are two main views Plug in Edit View and Insert Assign view bavo vos f Nf Changes the assigned Plug in chooses a Plug in Preset or adjusts a plug in parameter listed in bottom line of VFD Scroll to next previous page of plug in parameters in Plug in Edit View Scroll to inserts 1 4 5 in Insert Assign View N Toggle Plug in Parameter listed in top line of in Plug in Edit view Previous Next H Change between normal HUI VFD mode and channel HUI VFD Mode See note below r Insert Assign Mode When lit turn a VFD V Pot to change insert s assigned Plug in resin S the corresponding VFD Select button to choose ee MSE mea
285. lick on Bank to Outputs to send all 24 channels on the current bank to consecutive tape tracks Click on Set Channel to All to send the selected channel to all 24 tape outputs This is a convenient way to track a single mic or instrument while overdubbing for the umpteenth time to multiple tracks Simply select the desired record track on the multitrack recorder The signal will always be there for you ape out 1 ich 25 ape out 2 ch 26 ape out 5 ch z r ipe aut 4 ch 227 pe aut 5 58 29 pe out 50 pe out ch 2312 pe out 8 eh zz pe aut ch 234 pe out 10 ch 34 ipe out 11 55 55 ape out 12 ch 26 ape nut 12 ch 73 ape out 14 ch 587 out 15 ch 39 out 15 407 pe out 17 ch 317 pe out 18 poh pe aut 19 ch 42 pe nut 20 be nut 21 ch 45 pe aut 22 467 pe out 23 ch 3 7 nut 24 t Channel ta set Channel Only eset 1 bank Dutput The Feedback Loop Caution When Bank to Outputs is selected from the TAPE IN bank or anytime you assign to a tape track from a tape return channel then monitor the correlating fader there is potential for a nasty feedback loop To create the feedback loop Select the TAPE IN bank Place the multitrack in record ready Assign a channel to its correlating multitrack input Channel 25 to Tape Output 1 Channel 26 to
286. lightpipe cables simply connect the DlOe8 digital outputs the ADAT lightpipe inputs and the ADAT outputs to the DIO 8 inputs for up to 32 tracks 8 channels per card of flexible and assignable digital audio including the ALT APOGEE DIGITAL I O 1058 Card rear panel O fed hed bed Cod Red bed Kel 9 OUT Fiber optic Lightpipe ADAT OPTICAL SYNC IN Connecting TASCAM TDIF Multitrack s Install 010 8 card into one or more of the 8 TAPE card slots Using a 25 pin D sub digital cable TDIF connect the D8B Digital 1 O connector to the TASCAM MDM e g DA 88 Digital 1 0 connector Install BNC clock cable and make sure all connec tions are tightly secured If the D8B is to be the slave the sync source should be connected to the sync card BNC Word Clock input and the D8B Apogee Clock should be set to External in the Setup Digital 1 0 window Connecting TDIF Digital Use a 25 pin D sub digital cable TDIF to connect the D8B Digital I O connector to the TASCAM MDM e g DA 88 Digital I O connector for up to 32 tracks 8 channels per card of flexible and assignable digital audio including the ALT I O In addition connect the Sync output from the DIO 8 card to the Word Sync input of the DA 88 This connection indicates use of a DIO 8 Card with firmware version 127v2 rear panel REMOTE INSYNC IN SYNC
287. liseconds ms with a range from 0 ms to 100 ms Thicken This defines the number of delay taps used to generate the chorus effect and how they are distributed across the left and nght channels There are four settings 0 one mono voice 1 one stereo voice 2 two stereo voices 3 three stereo voices Speed This controls the rate of the chorus modulation and applies to all voices It is cali brated in Hertz Hz with a range from 0 05 Hz to 5 00 Hz Waveform This defines the waveform that is used for modulating the voices There are three settings including sine triangle and random The random setting applies random sine triangle waveforms to each voice independently The Digital 8eBus also comes with a library of effects settings patches stored on the hard drive that can be readily selected Click in the preset title box at the bottom of the Mackie Effects window to select from the list of Factory Presets in the dropdown box You can also create and save your own effects click the MENU button and select Save User Preset As Check our website for additional plug in effects as they become available D8B Manual e Appendices page 159 Appendix D Shortcuts Feature New Session Open Session Save Session Save Session As Save As Template Toggle Desktop Shutdown Preferences Undo Redo Cut Channels Copy Channels Paste Channels Delete Events Set Default Levels Modify Levels Insert Time D
288. lled substitute these steps for steps 3 6 in the above directions 3 4 5 Launch ShrinkWrap Select Write Image back to Disk from the Image menu command B Locate the image file labeled d8b5xxxx Install 1 img that was extracted onto your hard drive ShrinkWrap will prompt you to insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive D8B Manual Chapter 1 gt page 0 Summary This chapter has been specifically designed to help you understand the basic concept of the Digital 8eBus architecture The following two chapters describe the physical surface controls and the software features and capabilities The last chapter describes specific applications as they pertain to unique recording tasks and needs Chapters 2 and 3 support what you ll encounter in Chapter 4 Feel free to jump ahead but keep in mind that you ll probably need to use these second two chapters as a reference for the terms and controls that are new to you Where Is It D8B Manual e Chapter 2 e page 21 Its Time to Locate Everything No matter how fast you want or need to get started take advantage of this simple map of the territory it provides the Fast Track overview of the D8B It s amazing how artistically supportive this console is It s well worth your time to take a look at all the controls so you can put them to Work efficiently Rear Panel Description This section describes rear panel connector types their functions and as
289. lways save your custom presets to the User Presets folder Presets saved to the Factory Presets folder could be written over by future plug in updates It is still possible to use the up down arrows to scroll through the patch names 415 NE A Vibrato User Presets Use Default Folder ST POST POST CHR_AcouGtrChorus CHR_Br ight warble CHR_ChorRetOffFeedsSlap CHR_ChorusGetsBuzz CHR_GuitarChorus1 CHR_GuitarChorus2 CHR_GuitarChorus3 CHR_Guitar ibrato CHR_PadChorus1 CHR_PadChorus2 CHR_SimpleChorus1 CHR_SimpleChorus2 CHR SlightVibrato 1 CHR_Slow wash ideChorus1 DLY_100msPPong DLY_200msPPong DLY_300msPPong DLY_400msPPong DLY_SOOmsHardRolloff Us DLY_S00msPPong DLY_600msPingPong DLY_8 ObpmTriplet DLY_8OmsTrpltGruy DLY_BuzzFeedsChorus DLY BuzzVerbi DLY_Buzz erb2 DLY BuzzVerbi DLY_Doubler DLY_SlapRetFromChor DLY_StereoGtr DLY_StereoSpace Drum Slap Hall Even Flip Flop Guitar Chorus Guitar Room Large Empty Hall Large Stage Large Wet Warehouse Lopsided Stereo Delay Medium Stage Mono Tape Delay Rolling Bass Chorus RVB_BoomyDullRoom RVB_Br ightA mbience RYB_Br ightSlap2 RYB_Cavernous RYB_Clapverb RVB_DrumRoom RVB_DrumRoom2 RVB HugeRoom RVB HugeRoom2 RVB_LargeHall RVB_LargelyPlate1 RVB_LargelyPlate2 RYVB_LargelyPlateS RVB LargeVocalHall RVB_MediumDrumRoom RVB_MediumHall RVB_MediumP late ish RVB_Mediu
290. m Antares Autotune MDW Mono EQ Mono Delay Drawmer Dyn DSR 1 RTA31 Saturated Fat 2 Click OK in the Alert dialog box Delete the current plugin and clear ALL Undo History Warning Deactivating a plug in erases all automation data for the plug in Saving Loading and Resetting a Preset Plug in settings can be saved and recalled from the hard drive You can save and load files to either Memory A or Memory B To Save a Preset 1 Click and hold the Menu button 2 Select Save User Preset to overwrite the file currently opened 3 Select Save User Preset As to save to a new file name The Save Preset File As dialog box appears Menu Bypass E Undo 2 Fedo Ctrl Shitt 2 Load Antares Autotune Save User Preset As k Reset Antares Autotune User Preset Cut Antares T Copy Paste AntaresAT 4 A default name for the preset is automatically displayed such as Preset 1 If you want to rename it simply type in the name you want using up to 20 characters Location File Types Type Name E pitcntix 12 18 2002 11 02 36 Preset ti 12 18 2002 11 02 22 FLOPPY A new sub folder can be easily created to help organize custom patches 5 Select INTERNAL default hard drive or FLOPPY 6 Click Save to complete the operation To Load a Preset 1 Click Mem A or Mem B to choose the memory location from which
291. m labeled MIC is pressed down for a microphone or is in the up position for an instrument When working fast this button is sometimes overlooked If it s in the wrong position there won t be any signal to play with That s bad Get in the habit of following the signal from the source to the destination step by step If you dont leave any steps out you ll be successful every time Figure 1 1 Completing the Microphone Signal Path Follow this graphic map to quickly complete a signal path using a microphone to capture the Fast sound source Speakers On and Connected to Mixer 15 2 5 0 40 50 60 BUS 7 BUS 8 Mic into Mic Trim Up Until Select L R in ASSIGNMENT then Channel Meter Reads Verify Assign on Channel Strip Around 5 u E gt gt 5 Start with gain TRIM down While talking into the mic or playing the instrument turn it up until the level stays around 15 to 10 on the channel one meter Note The TRIM and MIC button status are two of the only controls that are not written into automation or snapshot data That s a disadvantage of analog circuitry but these controls are necessary Running a strip of white safe release tape across the top label strip allows for careful recording of each channel s TRIM level and MIC button status This kind of tape can be removed and folded for storage with session documentation guaranteeing accurate settings whenever you nee
292. mRoom RVB_PercussionRoom RYB_Plate Like RYB_ShortRoom RYB_SlapHall RYB_SlapHall2 RYB_SmallBrightRoom RYB_SmallHall RYB_SteelTank RVB_SweepTheMIDfreq RYB_The RVB_TightSpace RYB_TiledRoom Slick Jazz Chorus Small Room Small Vocal Room Smooth Vocal Chorus Stereo Delay Shimmer Symphony Chamber DLY_SObpmsth RVB Br ightSlap RVB SnareSmash Ch 6 Ch 7 58 59 6 Ch 40 Ch 5 Click on the AUX button in the V Pot select Section that corresponds to the plug in you want to use UE LEWEL 1 CUE FAM 1 E N 6 Use the channel V Pots to set individual channel send to the selected aux bus Note Alternately you can click and drag on the horizontal bar in the auxes section at the top of the channel strip to adjust the aux send level Jom ou pl 11 m i ECORD F HEITE 22112 7 Click and drag on the Master V Pot to adjust the overall aux send level to the selected effect You can click on the SOLO button in the Master V Pot Section to monitor the aux send signal CUE LEVEL CUE PAR 1 FAM Note The default setting for each Aux Master level is 0 0 dB This typically provides sufficient send level and doesn t usually require adjustment 8 Click on the EFFECTS button to select Fader Bank 3 Click and drag or physically move the FX return fader s corresponding to the selected effect to co
293. martChord SmartChord uses the intelligent harmonies of the Vocal Studio in conjunction with a MIDI keyboard hooked up to the D8B On the keyboard you would play the chords of a song in real time with the lead vocal IVL Vocal Studio recognizes the chords and creates correct harmonies SmartChord mode will follow the melody of your voice while staying musically related to the chords on the MIDI control track To get harmonies in SmartChord mode you first need to select intervals for one to four of the harmony voices You can select the intervals from the Interval edit window See the previous section on Intervals SmartChord mode on the other hand will follow the melody of your voice while staying musically related to the chords on the MIDI control track SmartKey With the right combination of input vocal melody and underlying chord structure the SmartKey mode can produce harmonies that sound unbelievably real When you have a song that has a simple chord structure like those found in country and blues you can dial up SmartKey mode and be on your way to a killer harmony line in mere moments The key to making SmartKey work properly is to set the key and scale correctly While it sounds like you d need some music theory background to do this don t despair if you can lean over and tell a fellow musician what key you re going to play the next song in you can set up SmartKey mode effectively Let s break it down into the tw
294. mation filters There are two modes Enabled and Locked where Enabled allows automation to be written and Locked prohibits the overwriting of moves on the channel s dynamic automation track Toggle the Write mode by clicking on the Write column in the specific channel s row From the console hold down an individual channel strip s SELECT button for 2 seconds and then press the SELECT button under the Write mode in the Fat Channel Display to toggle between the enabled and locked states Shortcuts Note the previous click shortcut the last click has a memory if it was on a like parameter You can also click and swipe down the list to change the column to the value that s toggled by the click Isolate This turns Solo Isolate on and off When Solo Isolate is on the channel or track remains on when another channel is soloed Filter This noise shaping filter can improve the signal to noise ratio for particularly noisy analog input sources If you have Digital I O cards 01096 PDIe8 OPTe8 installed in channels 26 through 48 turn the filter off for those channels Save the settings in your template so they carry over from session to session Open Channel Location File Types OCT 81 CT Type Name Date brady 0422422002 Fred voice over 06 18 2002 eo hihat 10 17 2002 FLOPPY jason HH 04 14 2021 jason hi tom 04 14 2021 jason kick 04 14 2021 jason lo tom 04 14 2021 jason mid tom 1 04 14
295. mmon use for this feature P Solo Isolate Hold the Alt key and click or click and drag across any number of channel SOLO buttons to isolate them from the solo action Alt click on a Solo that s in Isolate mode to remove it from Isolate status Channels in Solo Isolate mode have blinking SOLO buttons In AFL and MIXDOWN solo modes they ll be heard even when other channels are soloed For example if you always want to hear the FX along with any soloed channels put the FX channel in Solo Isolate mode e Not active during PFL solo status e Can also be turned on and off in the Channel List Ctrl B Quick Select Fat Channel Simply double click the control surface SELECT button to instantly open or close the Fat Channel On screen double click the select button click on the Fat Channel tab at the bottom of the screen or press Ctrl 6 to open the Fat Channel To close it press Ctrl 6 again or click the Fat Channel tab at the bottom of the screen EELECT EELECT OLG MUTE MUTE HUTE HUTE Snare Rack L Rack 1 Rack F SELECT e Activates a channel for modification of any FAT Channel parameters Double click Select to view on screen Fat Channel V Pots The onscreen V Pots like the onboard V Pots are multifunctional Click Drag up to increase pan right etc Click Drag down to decrease pan left etc Control click to set default value RECORD RECORD R
296. n Select Fader Bank Alt A Sends Sequencer Seriale9 Service Session Setup Section DIGITAL I O GENERAL GROUP LOAD NEW PLUG INS SAVE SAVE AS III IIl III eooo III III 00000 III III III eooo 00000 eooo 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 III 0000 III 00000 III 0000 eooo eooo eooo 000000 000000 4 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 000000 III 0000 eooo III eooo 0000 eooo eooo 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 48 88 53 55 92 60 36 60 23 71 115 137 62 142 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 55 54 138 39 96 113 33 68 66 97 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo III 00000 III III eooo eooo eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 eee 000000
297. n if required e Fader Bank 1 MIC LINE selected e Press the MIC button down when using a microphone leave it up for an instrument e While sound source is active adjust TRIM for a reading around 15 on the channel 1 meter e Select L R in the ASSIGNMENT section then verify that the ASSIGN button on Channel One lights up green e Inthe CONTROL ROOM section select MASTER L R e Select the desired SPEAKERS in the CONTROL ROOM section e Set the SPEAKER LEVEL V pot to about 11 00 e Turn the MASTER L R fader up to unity e Slowly raise the level of the Channel One fader until you hear sound e The Master L R meters should display levels e Rejoice in the sense of accomplishment while listening to crystal clear audio Refer to Figure 1 1 for the Fast Track Graphic description of this procedure Details 1 Especially for digital connections it s important that the Digital 8eBus is powered up first This procedure helps establish the mixer as a primary source in the digital sync scheme 2 Be sure you ve noted which output is connected to the monitor system s and be sure they re powered up 3 Be sure the microphone or instrument is plugged into Channel 1 and that Fader Bank 1 MIC LINE is selected It doesn t take long to get used to selecting the fader bank you really need to access however at first make a conscious effort to include this step in your routine 4 Be sure the button below the gain tri
298. n the Options Transport menu With Record Safe selected checked neither the D8B nor any connected devices will enter record mode SELECT SELECT SELECT PPIP EET imi MUTE MUTE HITE HUTE D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 44 Point and Click Aux Sends To increase the send level click to the right of any Aux and drag to the right drag to the left to decrease the send Control click any Aux to set it to unity gain n om LU LU n m 1 LU gt AUX Send Levels Click and drag on the level indicator bar from left to right to increase the Aux send and drag from right to left to decrease the level The red bar indicates post fader Aux level The yellow bar indicates pre fader Aux level Control click next to any channel Aux to set level to unity Shift click an Aux level to mute and unmute it Alt click an Aux level to toggle the Pre Post status Red bars indicate post fader and yellow bars indicate pre fader AUSES AUSES AUKES AUSES 2 1 U 2 1 F dod sJ U dod oJ m un F n To copy an Aux level across multiple channels right click on a level indicator then drag across several channels A numerical Aux level readout displays directly below the Aux grid where channel numbers normally display Globally change the Pre Post status for all channels in the Setup Mix Options window Aux Pans 9 1
299. n the Studio Solo Section Make sure the SOLO LEVEL control is turned up in the Studio Solo Section and the Control Room LEVEL control is turned up in the Control Room Section If the signal sounds bad with PFL SOLO selected the problem lies somewhere before the channel fader with the source itself or the input settings on the console If the signal sounds okay the problem lies somewhere after the channel fader with the output settings or the amplifier speaker combination after the console Noise Hum Check the signal cable between the console and the power amplifier Make sure all connections are secure Make sure signal cables are not routed near AC cables power transformers wall warts or other EMI sources Is there a light dimmer or other triac based SCR device on the same AC circuit as the console Use an AC line filter or plug the console along with all other audio equipment into a different AC circuit If you re connecting an unbalanced source to the balanced input using an XLR or TRS connector try disconnecting the unbalanced ground from pin 1 XLR or sleeve TRS D8B Manual e Appendices page 143 Appendix B IVL Vocal Studio About the IVL Vocal Studio The IVL Vocal Studio is a truly unique tool that offers natural sounding harmonies wild vocal effects and vocal utilities You will hear that Vocal Studio can help you to quickly create killer vocal tracks In order to get you excited and for your gene
300. n the control surface or keyboard while adjusting the speaker level to create an offset between the speaker levels This is a convenient way to match monitor levels between speaker systems while still linking the overall volume changes gt Hold Ctrl while adjusting Speaker Level to delete the offset Automation Sub menu Options Plugins Windows Solo Latch Link Speakers Automation Transport Meters Trim Levels w Auto Touch Faders to Tape y Faders v w Pan wf All Use Nine Pin Control HUI yf Write Flyback Write Ready Mode URES AUS ES Bypass With this command selected Bypass button lit in the Automation section automation data is neither recorded or played back With this command deselected no light all write selected parameter adjustments are written into automation data and referenced to time code Trim Levels This mode sets all faders to unity position and assigns all parameter controls except mutes to globally add or subtract from existing settings and recorded moves Actual fader settings appear in the meter bar on the right side of the faders if Show Meters in Trim Mode is not checked This is perfect for raising or lowering a complete set of moves For example if the vocal track automation 5 perfectly crafted and structured yet the entire track needs to come up a couple dB in the mix fear not Select Trim Lev
301. nal data like fader and pan or surround front rear pan vs L R pan The D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 79 foreground data curve is subject to all clipboard operations while the back page curve remains untouched To update either the foreground or background view click on the drop downs drag across the type field or channel and release the mouse on the highlighted desired item Ch 3 ee i Flip View Button This button swaps the Page and Back param eter views in the Mix editor For example if Fader is foreground and Mute is background clicking on the flip button toggles the view to show Mute as foreground and Fader as background Toggling the flip once more flips the view back to the original view of Fader as foreground and Mute as background Channel Params Views e When Params Parameters view is selected the Mix Editor provides a view of a single parameter across multiple channels The parameter is selected in the Page pull down box e When Channel view is selected you can view multiple parameters of a single channel The channels are selected in the Page pull down box which include Channels 1 48 the Master Fader Groups 1 8 Buses 1 8 Plug ins 1 16 FX 1 16 Returns 1 8 and MIDI channels 1 8 Comp Bt Gate 5 VIEW Channe Params EQ F M P PAGE p O 4 CURSOR Auto Scro conn Buses E sj lt i gt START Auto Foli 8 5 EH NODES te A
302. ncredible creative flexibility How ever there are instances where Write Ready mode provides the perfect mode for a particular task Write Ready Mode is very useful when several channels must be placed into automation record mode at the same time Toggle the AUTO TOUCH button off Activate the Desired Automation Parameters e Engage FADERS MUTES PAN and or ALL in the same manner as previously described Select Write Ready Mode gt This option is located in the Setup gt Mix Options window as Use Write Ready and in the Options Automation Menu as Write Ready Mode e In this mode the Transport RECORD button is necessary for completing an automation pass Press WRITE on All Desired Automation Channels gt yellow light or icon blinks indicating record ready status Start the Playback Device e Even when the playback device starts the automation system remains in ready status yellow lights blinking until the RECORD button is pressed in the control surface Transport section or the on screen Locator window Press the D8B Record Button e Press the RECORD button on the control surface in the transport control section or in the on screen Locator window e Once record status has been achieved the blinking yellow lights remain solid until the transport stops or the WRITE button is pressed e For the writeready channels fader mute and pan au tomation data is written as soon as record is pressed e For all othe
303. nd pan e In order to record an automation pass record ing every automatable parameter FADERS MUTES PAN and ALL must be activated e Parameters selected by the ALL button are Aux 1 12 levels Aux 9 12 pans Master Aux levels Digital Trim all channel DSP functions EQ and Dynamics plus Plug in Effects parame ters bus assignments surround panning etc AUTO TOUCH Mode Activates Auto Touch write mode for auto mation data All activated automation control points be come write enabled and enter automation record mode at the instant they re modified from their current state It s not necessary to engage individual chan nel WRITE buttons in this mode Manually engaging WRITE in this mode only affects fader mute and pan writing if they re acti vated in the Automation section The channel WRITE button illuminates as soon as a channel function is manually adjusted and the corresponding filter is activated One or more of the automation buttons FAD ERS MUTES PAN or ALL must be activated or nothing will be written to automation Note Fader mute and pan data may be over written if these filters are activated and the channel is write engaged See page 137 Us ing Basic Automation for more information TRIM LEVELS button Activates Trim Level automation on all write enabled channels This refers to trimming automated moves up or down not to analog or digital level trim controls All faders move
304. ne status is also displayed at the end of this line D8B Manual e Appendices page 179 Appendix G Compatible Cables Analog and Digital Multitrack Cables The following companies supply analog and digital multitrack cables for use with the HDR24 96 I O cards Horizon Music Inc P O Box 1988 Cape Girardeau MO 63702 1988 Tel 800 255 9822 Fax 800 455 3460 http www horizonmusic com 1098 Analog Interface Cables HDAS Series DB25 to specify connector Connector options 8 male XLR 8 female XLR or 8 1 4 TRS Standard lengths 5 10 15 20 25 feet DIO 8 TDIF Interface Cables TDIF Series DB25 to DB25 standard lengths 5 10 15 feet PDIe8 AES EBU Interface Cables HD44 Series DB25 to specify connector Connector options 4 male 4 female XLR or DB25 standard lengths 5 10 15 20 25 feet Hosa Technology Inc 6920 Hermosa Circle Buena Park CA 90620 Tel 714 736 9270 Fax 714 522 4540 http www hosatech com 1098 Analog Interface Cables DTP Series DB25 to 8 1 4 TRS DTF Series DB25 to 8 female XLR s DTM Series DB25 to 8 male XLR s Standard lengths 3 4 5 7 meters DIO 8 TDIF Interface Cables DBK Series DB25 to DB25 Standard lengths 3 15 feet 8 DIO 8 ADAT Optical Interface Cables OPT Series standard ADAT Optical cables OPM Series Jacketed ADAT Optical cables w metal headshell OPT lengths 3 6 10 13 17 30 50 feet OPM lengths 3 5 10 15 20 30 50 feet PDIe8
305. ne status is also displayed at the end of this line D8B Manual e Appendices page 173 e D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For DP3 1 16220 Woodinville Redmond Rd NE Woodinville WA 98072 Tel 800 258 6883 Fax 425 806 6312 e mail techmail mackie com Last Updated 2 07 03 D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments DP3 1 Function 72 channel v pott 8 Move corresponding DP3 channel Pan or Send Level warma 0 86724 Solo corresponding DP3 channel Gara r r ENG 0724 fo Toggle Pre Post of corresponding PT channel Send for selected Aux 1 5 If Level Tape HUI Aux Mute is lit then it will toggle the mute status of the corresponding PT channel send for the selected Aux 1 5 _ __ TUI 121221 ne nae sasore aeoea aoc venran verea veeosa rer Cs poene mm wawana a omm se KXECORUE C NEISEEMIT IL 70 aaa 6 4 Enables control of DP3 Mixing Board Aux 4 by HUI layer V Pots mer i s emm m nrn ramara wauu w om ME wah pevDDS Displays Plug in Insert settings for selected Insert Channel There are two main views Plug in Edit View
306. nked together via their individual Ethernet connections they communicate and respond according to the selections in the Link Options list e Whichever parameters are selected are transmitted and received across the network on two or more D8Bs e Whichever parameters are not selected act independently on each individual D8B Console Linking options are enabled and disabled according to what control surface actions you want to have linked on two or more consoles assigned to the same Network Channel e Fader Banks This option provides for bank selection across the network from any Digital 8eBus sharing a common Network Channel number e Aux Strip This option links the selection of any aux bus across the network For example if Aux 1 is selected on any networked Digital 8eBus console it will be selected on all networked Digital 8eBus consoles with Aux Strip selected e Bus Assign This links the BUS ASSIGN selection across the network For example selecting Bus 1 8 L R or Route to Tape in the ASSIGNMENT section selects that assignment status in each networked 82 with Bus Assign selected This allows the ASSIGN buttons to function identically on each D8B e Cue Controls This links the Phones Cue selection across the network For example selecting any parameter in the PHONES CUE MIX 1 section selects that parameter in each networked D8B with Cue Controls selected Solo Logic This links the SOLO STUDIO selection across the n
307. ns 8 Setup Snapshots Surround Locator MixEditor Fat Channel Panninc adi ack Shi Close There are four EQ types to choose from The Fat Channel overview is opened and e 4 Band Parametric closed by clicking on the Fat Channel button in e 20 20 EQ the lower menu bar or by pressing Ctrl 6 on the British EQ keyboard The shortest way to open and close the 0 Fat Channel is to double click on a channel British H P SELECT button The default EQ type is the 4 Band Parametric EQ A quick summary of the EQ choices follows EQ 4 band Parametric 4 parametric bands with analog style overlaps 20 20 0 4 parametric bands with full 20Hz 50 72 frequency sweep on each British EQ gt Low band shelving filter 2 mid parametric bands and a high band shelving filter 4 0 dB Ip British H P TT High pass filter 2 mid parametric bands and a high band shelving filter MORPH 2 0sec Lu iie EQ types are saved and recalled with patches snapshots and sessions and transferred via clipboard operations e Click the ACTIVE button near the bottom of the EQ window to turn on the EQ for the selected channel D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 84 e There are three methods to modify parameters in the EQ e Click and drag on the editing ball in the display window Drag up and down to change the gain left and right to change the frequency and right click or Alt click and drag left and nght to
308. nt information for the session You can manually enter the information about the studio and client at the top of the left column and there s room for general notes at the bottom of the column Additional notes for the selected channel can be recorded in the Channel Notes window Channel Channel Notes Ctrl Shift T or by clicking on the channel number in the Track Sheet window D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 92 e Any channel with notes appears with an orange outline in the Track Sheet This makes it easy to find notes at a glance e Session setup information is automatically loaded by clicking the MENU button and selecting Refresh Session Info File Edit Channel Options Plugins Windows MENU Refresh Session Info s Bouncing Ball Studios LINE STUDIO Bosco Export to Text File Export to HTML File e The track sheet can be exported as a text file or as an HTML file from the MENU list The Save Track Sheet To window opens allowing you to name the file and choose the location to save it Once saved the file can be copied to a floppy disk and transferred to a computer where it can be saved or printed Note It s a good idea to select Refresh Session Info before exporting the track sheet as a text or HTML file to make sure all the information is up to date Another Note We recommend taking detailed notes of your session and printing a copy to keep with your backup audio data CD ROM M90 ADAT etc Yo
309. nt lines in the same manner as DSP patch file references D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 91 Visually when a session using Events is loaded the OS performs a match against the dependent files and displays any detected changes by adding an asterisk to the Action column to any or all Event lines Event lines must be highlighted first before performing a sync operation Delete Events Alt Delete Guess what Select this item to delete any selected automation events Commit Events Alt M e Select this to convert the selected event to the mix editor as a mix node or nodes It no longer appears as a Separate event in the Event List or the Mix Editor time bar e You cannot Undo this action other than opening the Mix Editor and editing or deleting the nodes that were created from the event e See Commit Events in the Mix Editor section on page 82 for more information Select All Ctrl A Choose this item to select highlight all automation events on the list Mute Icon Highlight any of the M icons to mute the triggering of automation event playback Current List Item Arrow e The arrow in the far left column represents the current or last triggered automation event e The arrow moves to the next event as soon as the time code reaches the automation event time it remains there until another event time is passed Track Sheet Ctrl T e The Track Sheet window allows you to keep track of all the pertine
310. ntal parts in your composition As there are often pad chords on a synth or piano track these can also be used to trigger harmonies When you choose Manual mode in this situation the harmony parts won t follow the melody lines you sing they ll stay on the notes played on the instrument track Because you ll probably want to add notes here and there to your control track it s often a good idea to copy the instrument track to another open track in your sequencer and use the copy as your starting point In manual mode there is an editing parameter called Envelope You can use Envelope to shape the entrances and exits of harmony notes triggered through MIDI VOCAL S TUDIO Harmony Pitch Correction amp Reverb o CONTROL Menu Manual SmartChord SmartKey PitchShift meer mm HARMONY ENSEMBLE 1 ON Envelope PROCESSOR MODE Gender Harmony OUTPUT MODE Detune Quad VOICE MUTING USE MIDI 2 Mute 3 Mute 4 Mute Ch u sD The graph in the Envelope window represents volume against time Adjusting the Attack time with the spin dial will vary the slope on the leading edge of the graph A shallow slope will fade in the harmony notes after Vocal Studio is triggered through MIDI Adjusting the release time will vary the slope on the trailing edge of the graph A shallow slope will fade the harmony notes out after the MIDI trigger is released Steep slopes will make instantaneous attacks and releases S
311. ntrol the amount of processed signal returning to the left and nght bus Note Currently the D8B OS doesn t store effects or any DSP module names If you create some effects that you really like we suggest that you name them and store them to disk For ease of retrieval and organization create a dedicated effects folder and keep all your working effects patches there Don t forget to use the EQ portion of the effects module during patch creation It certainly can enhance the sound of any given patch Setting Up Plug ins e Press Ctrl P on the keyboard or click Plugins in the upper menu bar and select Plugins to open the Plugins Configuration window e Adjust aux send levels from any applicable bank channels e For MFX Plug ins each card utilizes two separate mono sends which are monitored as two separate stereo returns from the MFX plug in e UFX Plug ins reside in groups of four on each card 2 stereo 4 mono or 1 stereo and 2 mono e Select the EFFECTS bank to adjust effects return levels at the appropriate faders e Pan effects returns left and right in pairs e isten to playback e When tracking it s best to monitor the tape returns Note See the Plug ins Manuals for specifics on individual plug in functionality D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 113 Dynamics and EQ Applications Dynamics and equalization are typically applied in one of three ways 1 Processing Dynamics and EQ Before Tape e Sele
312. nu then selecting New MIDI Route from the MIDI Map Edit menu or simply clicking the NEW button at the bottom of the MIDI Map screen A Route is made up of the following attributes e Selection The first column with no column header denotes the Route number and selected Route within the map list The number is a simple identifier as there is no sorting mechanism for the MIDI Routes The selection paradigm is the same for any D8B listing function Shift click allows for multiple selections and Ctrl click allows for discontinuous selections gt MIDI Type This choice offers the type of MIDI message as XNh where X is the status type N is the MIDI channel and h denotes that it s listed in hexa decimal values If the Route is mapping a switch parameter with two value states it will be assigned as a Note On message If the parameter is continuously variable the Continuous Controller BNh or Polyphonic Aftertouch ANh may be used e Number This assignment is in the range of 0 127 deci mal values 00h 7Fh for the associated Status type A static value is selectable for a switch message type in the range of 0 127 decimal values 00h 7Fh It is not selectable and is the implied variable dynamic changing whatever output when using the continu ous type status messaging Note that for D8B controls that use less than 256 step resolution e g EQ type uses 4 values whereas a fader uses 256 values the full range
313. nual e Chapter 3 gt page 50 MICI 1 MID 82 MILI 5 MIB 84 MILI 5 MID 86 HILI S7 MILI 88 Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 3 Bus 4 Bus Bus amp Bus 7 Bus amp May See A Menu Please Open Session Ctrl 0 e Press Ctrl 0 or click the File menu drag down to There s amazing power and flexibility in the Open Session and release Menus and Screens built into the Mackie OS This e Use this to open a preexisting session file guide will serve as an excellent Quick Reference e As soon as the session is opened the faders and for each menu and screen all other parameters move to their proper settings for the current time code location Close Window ESC e Press Ctrl W ESC or click the File menu drag down to Close Window and release e Closes the front window Setup Snapshots Locator Surround Event List Mix Editor Fat Channel or any menu screen with a CLOSE icon in the upper right corner The File Menu Contains e New Session Ctrl N e Open Session Ctrl 0 e Close Window ESC e Save Session Ctrl S e Save Session As Save Session Ctrl S e Save As Template e Press Ctrl S or click the File menu drag down to e Reset Template Save and release Desktop Ctrl D e Saves the current session to its assigned hard drive or floppy disk e f you don t choose to activate the D8B automatic save feature press Ctrl S often to ensure against lost work stuff happens e Shutdown Ctrl Q File Edit Ch
314. o Volume Formant Preserving Pitch Shifting Intelligent Harmony Menu On Off Operation Harmony Output Mode Quad Stereo Pitch Correct Mode Keyboard Octave Select Pitch Bend Range Pitch Bender Pitch Controller Slope Pitch Recognition Processing Mode Harmony Pitch Correct Voice Muting III 0000 III eooo eooo III III eooo eooo 000000 000000 0000000 000000 III eooo 000 0000 III 0000 eooo 0000 eooo 00000 III III eooo eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo 00000 0000 III eooo III eooo 000000 000000 000000 000000 III eooo eooo III eooo eooo eooo III III 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo 00000 III 0000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 00000 0000000 000000 000000 4 000000
315. o Outs are located in another room to avoid feedback when the TALKBACK TO STUDIO button is depressed CLEAR SOLO button Disengages all engaged solo buttons throughout the entire console This is especially convenient considering sections may be soloed across multiple fader banks SOLO LEVEL button Assigns the V Pot in the Studio Solo section to adjust the solo level being fed to the Control Room outputs Not applicable to mixdown solo use L R fader to adjust mixdown solo level STUDIO LEVEL button Assigns the V Pot in the Studio Solo section to adjust the output level being fed to the Studio monitor system TALKBACK LEVEL button Assigns the V Pot in the Studio Solo section to control the preamp level for the in panel Talkback Mic RUDE SOLO LIGHT Blinks whenever a Solo button is engaged Phones Cue Mix Section PHONES CUE 1 PHONES CUE MIX 2 AUX 9 10 COPY MIX TO CUE AUX 9 10 COPY MIX TO CUE CONTROL ROOM AUX 11 12 CONTROL ROOM AUX 11 12 LEVEL Phones Cue Mix 1 and 2 select the sources and sets levels for the Phones outputs AUX 9 10 Assigns the Aux 9 10 mix to the Phones output D8B Manual e Chapter 2 page 4 AUX 11 12 Assigns the Aux 11 12 mix to the Phones output COPY MIX TO CUE button Pressing this causes all channel settings to be copied to the channel V Pots for the selected CUE MIX 1 Aux 9 10 CUE MIX 2 Aux 11 12 or aux pair Aux 1 2 3 4 5
316. o components of key and scale Determining the key is easy it s often the first chord in a song However some songs are in a different key than the first chord such as Sweet Home Alabama which is in G but starts with a D chord Scale can be either major or minor and depends on the notes that make up the scale VOCAL S TUDIO Harmony Pitch Correction amp Reverb i d ae CONTROL MODE PitchShift Manual SmartChord SmartKey HARMONY ENSEMBLE aca Key Scale interval Key Scale PROCESSOR MODE 1 Scale Gender Harmony 4 Detune OUTPUT MODE Volume id Pan Styles Stereo VOICE MUTING 2 Mute 3 Mute 4 Mute D8B Manual Appendices page 149 To select Key and Scale you want to be in the Key Scale Edit mode shown above Once in this editing window Key is selected by clicking on a note on the piano Select the scale using the spin dial above the piano keys The Difference SmartKey harmony usually requires you to enter the one key that works for a whole song SmartKey harmonies will sound correct in many songs but not all and this is why you have a choice between it and SmartChord SmartKey harmonies are also more active in harmony motion SmartChord harmony requires you to input a different chord change for every chord in a song They can be applied to almost any song you can play This is the only practical difference between the two harmony types Pitch Shift This mode doesn
317. oad into the internal FX card Refer to the individual Plug ins manuals for specific implementation DIGITAL 1 0 button e Brings up the Digital I O configuration menu in the Fat Channel display gt For selecting Tape I O Alt I O and Stereo I O settings e For selecting and setting the internal sample rate or assigning the console to sync to external word clock Transport Section SMPTE VIEW button This section provides control for external recorder This button toggles between SMPTE MTC time transports time display snapshots locates and loops and BBT Bars Beats Ticks in the Position display POSITION display Number Buttons 0 9 e Shows the numeric representation of SMPTE e Used to numerically enter Snapshot Locate or MIDI Time Code Hours Minutes Sec onds Frames or a musically referenced display Bars Beats Ticks 4 e When the console is receiving time code this display continually updates according to the time code position e Displays entered values for Locate storage and Loop points in the Range display and time values in the Position display When numeric buttons are used to enter data you must press ENTER to complete the action Pressing the number keys while holding CON TROL scrolls through the on screen interface windows RANGE display ENTER button e Shows the snapshot number in Snapshot mode e Shows the most recently entered MMC locate point when in Locator mode e When looping
318. older and automatically names the file Surround X e To rename the file simply type the desired text into the auto highlighted File Name field or if necessary highlight the existing text and type the new file name e Click Save to complete the action Cut e This action cuts all settings from the selected channel and resets it to the default settings Pan is centered speakers are deactivated Depth of Center is set to 0 and Low Freq Effect is set to 0 0 Though the result of a cut is like the result of Reset settings that are cut are stored on the Clipboard and can be pasted into a selected channel Channel settings that are Reset are not stored on the Clipboard e Morph selection and time adjustments are not part of the Cut action They are unaffected by cut copy or paste Copy e This action copies all current surround channel settings to the Clipboard Copied settings can be pasted to other selected channels e All Surround Sound parameters are copied and are part of the Paste function However only data for the selected memory MEM A or MEM B is copied e Morph selection and time adjustments are not part of the Copy action They are unaffected by cut copy or paste Paste Surround e This action replaces any current settings on a selected channel with previously copied or cut surround data e Morph selection and time adjustments are not part of the Paste action They are unaffected by c
319. on D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 100 Installation of Cards IMPORTANT Shut off power to the Digital 8eBus Remote CPU before installing or removing cards E 5 gt 1 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver unscrew the blank cover plate corresponding to the I O card slot you want to fill Remove Cover Plate for Tape I O Card 2 Holding the I O card so that the components on the green circuit board face to the left see diagram line up the card so the top and bottom edges fit into the white guide slots Do not touch any of the circuit board components or solder joints 3 Be sure to push the card in all the way until the front of the I O card is flush with the back panel of the 85 This may require a good solid push so don t be shy Installing a Tape I O Card 4 Tighten the spring loaded screws on the 1 0 card securely using a slotted screwdriver DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SCREWS or you run the risk of stripping the threads in the D8B Tighten Screws on Tape I O Card D8B Manual Chapter 4 page 101 Checklist for Basic Operational Functionality Basic system functionality depends greatly on the accurate selection of a few key items Work through this checklist to verify console settings The previous chapters provide an explanation of each item This checklist simply provides a mental road map to verify proper functionality J Control Room selection correct
320. on Fader Bank 3 Channels 49 72 Internal Effects Returns FX 1 16 and ALT RETurns 1 8 e MASTERS button Fader Bank 4 Virtual Groups 1 8 MIDI Controllers 1 8 Bus Masters 1 8 e SHIFT MASTERS button Fader Bank 5 with HUI Mode active This architecture provides a total of 56 inputs with Fader Banks 1 and 2 providing 48 inputs and the 8 ALT Returns in Fader Bank 3 providing another 8 inputs One of the primary applications the Digital 8eBus was designed for is multitrack recording generally up to 24 tracks This involves tracking and monitoring bouncing overdubbing and mixdown You can think of Fader Bank 1 and Fader Bank 2 as two separate mixing consoles where Fader Bank 1 is used for tracking and Fader Bank 2 is used for monitoring and mixdown Two 24 track machines can easily be connected to the D8B for mixdown one into the Fader Bank 1 line inputs and the other into the Fader Bank 2 Tape I O cards This setup provides an amazing amount of control through automation routing and DSP Note Although the D8B is perfectly set up for 24 track recording it s possible to route channels to 46 outputs all at the same time 24 direct outputs 3 cards 8 buses Alt I O 2 main stereo outputs and 12 auxes D8B Manual e Chapter 1 gt page 8 Let s Get Some Sound Happening e Mixer Power On e Monitors connected and on e Microphone or Instrument plugged into Channel One e Phantom Power button pushed i
321. on 5 3013390 D8B Manual e Chapter gt page 3 Introduction T Guide reflects the newest and most progressive features and options available on the Mackie Digital 8eBus The D8B is designed to grow with the audio industry Each software revision provides new features and capabilities updating your console and ensuring that your investment remains current for many years to come An increasing number of other manufacturers have jumped on the D8B band wagon Through affiliations with companies like Acuma Labs Apogee TC Electronics Massenburg dbx and Antares Mackie Designs has provided an environ ment where third party plug ins let you design the perfect system for your needs all within the Digital 8eBus architecture About This Manual This manual is the let s just do it guide Each chapter covers an important consideration e Chapter 1 describes basic setup procedures with an emphasis on achieving successful routing of an audio source to your monitors e Chapter 2 briefly describes all surface controls e Chapter 3 describes the on screen interface e Chapter 4 highlights some typical applications If you d like to move ahead at light speed try jumping directly to Chapter 4 using Chapters 2 and 3 as a reference If you crave details or if you re new to recording especially digital recording don t forget to check out our website for more info at www mackie com CAUTION aaron I
322. onfiguration 2 If the HDR24 96 is the clock master set the Sample Clock to Internal If the HDR24 96 is a clock slave set the Sample Clock to Word Clock and depress the 75Q termination button on the Sync card 3 Set the Sample Rate to 44 1kHz or 48kHz according to your preference D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 122 Console Settings 1 If you have DIO 8 cards installed set the Tape Input and Tape Output format for each card to ADAT 8 cards need no configuration 2 If the D8B is the clock master set the Sample Rate to either 44 1kHz or 48kHz and set the Apogee Clock to Internal in the Digital I O Setup window If it is a clock slave then set the Apogee Clock to Word Clock Set the Sample Rate to match the Sample Rate selected on the HDR24 96 ADAT Optical Hookup with OPTe8 8 Cards Apogee Clock Card 22 10 Word SYNC Clock Out ADAT Optical Out APOGEE Word Clock In OPT 8 OPT 8 OPT 8 poseen Word Word A B I Depress the Termination button if the HDR24 96 is set to Slave Clock Out Clock Out Sync HDR24 96 as Card as Master Master oe Word Clock In Word Clock Out ADAT Optical In OPT 8 OPT 8 8 8 Cards Digitale8 Bus ADAT Optical Out HDR 24 96 D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 123 AES EBU Hookup to HDR24 96 PDIe8
323. onfirm Assign lights on for all desired channels Or look onscreen to verify all necessary channels have L R button highlighted in Bus Assign section set Master Fader to Unity position Turn channel faders up to hear instrument or mic As each channel is verified and audible press channel mute Assign Fader Bank 1 channels to desired tape track inputs L Set Master Fader to Unity position Turn channel faders up to hear instrument or mic ey EI Place tape inputs in record ready to verify signal at machine It s typically best to monitor signal from the multitrack rather than from the channel input If levels on the multitrack appear too hot or cold adjust level with the LEVEL TO TAPE control Select TRACKING LEVEL This sets the channel V Pots to adjust the D amp B output level to tape Remove Fader Bank 1 from the L R mix Adjust control room monitor mix from Tape return in Fader Bank 2 Set levels in headphone system for musicians Adjust headphone monitor volume in the PHONES CUE MIX section Adjust channel aux levels to onboard or outboard effects from Fader Bank 2 Verify that Master Output is connected to the mixdown machine Record a pass on the multitrack Play multitrack back Once each channel is verified and audible press channel mute D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 105 DIT tape out 1 ch 23 tape nut 2 ch 26 tape out 3
324. only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer A Component and cart combination should be moved with care Quick stops excessive force and uneven surfaces may cause the Component and cart combination to overturn 8 Power Sources This Mackie product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in these operating instructions or as marked on this Mackie product 9 Power Cord Protection Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked upon or pinched by items placed upon or against them paying particular attention to cords at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit this Mackie product 10 Object and Liquid Entry Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into this Mackie product 11 Damage Requiring Service This Mackie product should be serviced only by qualitied service personnel when A The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or B Objects have fallen or liquid has spilled into this Mackie product or C This Mackie product has been exposed to rain or D This Mackie product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance or E This Mackie product has been dropped or its chassis damaged 12 Servicing The user should not attempt to service this Mackie product beyond those means described in this operating manual All oth
325. ontains a wide dynamic range you might not be able to resist the urge to use dither as you record to the multitrack In this case plan to use the UV22 process twice use it once on the multitrack tracks on the Low setting use it again on the final printing of the master take on the Low setting If you use the UV22 process twice using it on Low setting both times will closely equate to the dither noise resulting from using it once in Normal position D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 119 2 Connect three snakes between the D8B HDR24 96 Setup HDR24 96 Outputs top connector and the corresponding D8B Tape Hookups Inputs bottom connector This section shows how the D8B is connected to the Mackie HDR24 96 These examples assume HDR24 96 Settings that the rest of your studio equipment monitors 1 Set the Sample Clock to Internal sound sources outboard processing etc is 2 Set the Sample Rate and Bit Depth already connected according to your preference It is not Before you begin note how the three eight necessary to set the D amp B and channel I O cards are arranged on the HDR24 96 HDR24 96 to the same Sample Rate rear panel 1 8 is on the left 9 16 is in the center since with analog connections the and 17 24 is on the right Labeling cables before sample clocks on the two units are not you begin will make connecting the HDR24 96 to synchronized your D8B easier The specific hookups for each D8B and Console Set
326. oo 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 III eooo eooo 0000 eooo eooo eooo 0000 III III eooo 0000 eooo 0000 eooo eooo III eooo eooo 0000 III III 0000 III eooo 0000 III eooo eooo eooo e 132 33 x 3 4 33 iius 33 4 4 inn 34 asus usn ssi e 10 e 10 ins 14 Studio Vision Pro Studio Solo Section AFL SOLO CLEAR SOLO MIXDOWN SOLO PFL 5010 RUDE SOLO LIGHT SOLO LEVEL STUDIO LEVEL TALKBACK LEVEL TALKBACK TO STUDIO Subnet Surge Protector Surround Surround Mode Surround Modes 51 61 7 1 SDDS LCRS Quad Stereo Surround Out Surround Window Ctrl 3 Divergence Flyback Low Frequency Effect MENU Copy Cut Lock Monitor Levels Open Surround Paste Surround Reset Save Surround As Undo Monitor Levels Morph Morph Time Output Assignment Pan Ball Surround Panner SVGA Monitor Sync Connection Synchronize Events eooo 0000 III 0000 III 0000 III 00000 eooo 00000 eooo eooo 000000 4 000000
327. op 3 Connect MIDI cables between the MIDI OUT connector on the Digital 8eBus Remote CPU and the MIDI IN connector on the Sync Box and between the MIDI IN connector on the Digital 8eBus Remote CPU and the MIDI OUT connector on the Sync Box Settings D8B 1 Open the Setup window by pressing Ctrl 1 or clicking Setup in the bottom menu bar on screen 2 Click Digital I O to open the Digital I O dialog box 3 Click each Tape Input and Output box and select ADAT for each 0 8 card installed General Network Digital 0 Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI FTP Server Tape 1 8 Tape 9 16 Tape 17 24 Sample Rate Apogee Clock D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 128 4 Set the Samplerate to match the sample rate of the formatted ADAT tapes typically 48 kHz or 44 1 kHz ADATs 1 Select DIGITAL IN on the ADAT front panel on 0 INPUT DIGITAL INPUT SELECT INPUT MONITOR UO _ INT O Notes e When powering up turn the Digital 8eBus on first then turn the on SYNC BOX A Examples JLCooper dataSYNC or MIDI OUT Steinberg ADAT XT MASTER DECK TRACKS 1 8 PLA PI L E PLAY f PUNCH DIGITAI LRC REMOTE IN OUT iNi 6 9 6 ADAT XT SLAVE DECK TRACKS 9 16 INPUT OUTPUT N Y 1 9 ADAT XT SLAVE DECK _ TRACKS 17 2
328. or click out of the field to complete e Press Tab to enter the SMPTE window starting at the Hours field and enter the desired setting Press Tab to move from field to field press Return to complete action and to exit data entry mode e Press the SET TIME button in the Transport section on the console to enter a locate time Using the numeric keypad on the control surface enter the desired time in hours minutes and seconds then press Enter to complete Store locate time by selecting LOCATOR mode entering the locate number then pressing Store followed by Enter gt Locate points can be entered on the fly by simply clicking the New button at the desired time during playback e Selected Locate points can be updated by clicking the Store button to overwrite with the current time Automation Parameters These settings activate and deactivate the write status of all automation parameters In addition Bypass controls the read playback status for all automation data BYPASS e When this is highlighted automation data is completely ignored e When this icon is not highlighted all previously recorded automation data plays back and any selected automation data can be written as long as channels are in automation write mode and time code is received at the MTC input D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 77 e See the Playback column in the Channel List under Channel in the upper menu bar for individual channel automation playbac
329. ord status JOG amp SHUTTLE button Engages the rotary dial below the REWIND FAST FWD STOP and PLAY buttons to advance external machines forward or backward with single frame accuracy when using MMC When Jog amp Shuttle is enabled the REWIND and FAST FWD transport buttons send out MMC shuttle commands usually corresponding to fixed speed increments 1 6 1 4x 1 2x 2x etc Rotary Dial Encoder This multifunction dial enables the scrub function D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 41 RECORD ES SELECT MMUTE Ch 25 Using the Graphic User Interface GUI The Beauty of It The Digital 8eBus provides exceptional power from the control surface alone However when combined with an on screen Graphic User Interface GUI the console offers yet another facet of audio bliss Some features are only available on screen and are much easier to perform on screen Yet some control surface features are more efficient like multiple fader moves or inverse fader moves The software functions included herein are definitely in the I always wanted to be able to do that category In this section we touch each control and parameter section by section The Mouse All references to mouse clicks imply left click on the PS 2 mouse unless otherwise specified Certain keyboard commands combine with mouse clicks to increase capabilities of the OS and to help increase speed and accuracy
330. ormance EQ plugin compressor etc simply filter that parameter out of your saved set of snapshots All your changes will still happen on cue as you scroll through snapshots but your updated parameters will remain constant uo uni ui 8njd 0 e se osje ue UNO NY saJejuy SJO IUOW aSejs 6 sxnv 9xnv gt a JapeJ un m k yed 16481 quanay yc oipny 1231810 Exueg eu93u lt lt XJ 01 NINN NIANI NANT NIANI NANT NIANI NISNT NIANI NIANI NIANI ssop1UOWy OS7WYS pyeoq ay fopiun 40 02J9 S 6 1111 8 xnv OLXnv LLXNY LXnV SJO UOW 8 15 Se 5006 pue sdwe 1004T W ooh ddl JOSSa20Jd 1239J3 09415 peo 5 puas jeyiip uan 1 nnn 3131313131313131313 0000000000000000000 0000000000000000 5105592010 15 spyeoq ay Ar1 punos Ar1 104 sngeg e3 3iq 3 S3IW uon2as WOH S3IW wing S3IIW 01551219 siayeads H0J sduieaJq spJe 89019 jeuondo 3dV1 EXE MO
331. orporating a time reference like MTC along with sample accurate sync enables time stamping of data changes like start stop time snapshot placements real time automation data etc Hence ultimately flexible and way cool automation capabilities of virtually every control on the Digital 8eBus Yahoo The optional Clock I O card for your Digital 8eBus provides a means to send and receive digital word clock This card is necessary e When digitally combining the Digital 8eBus with a computer based DAW MDMs video recorders etc gt When the D amp B must send or receive word clock other than through ADAT lightpipe or AES EBU connections sync data can transmit directly through ADAT Lightpipe and AES EBU connections However a complete sync system needs two main ingredients e Word clock sample accurate sync This is provided through the Digital 8eBus optical AES EBU connections and through the optional Clock I O card e Time reference to stamp automation data for accurate playback This is typically provided through MIDI Time Code MTC Proper Sync Connection Every digital system needs a master sync source The D8B prefers to be the master source but will function as a master or slave Follow these simple steps to help assure a successful digital setup e Determine which piece of gear is the master The master must be able to generate proper word clock that can be read by all other digital equipment e Set all digital
332. osition of the first eight faders in the currently open session If they don t repeat the above instructions For the D8B s internal automation to function you must also set up your DAW to send MIDI Time Code MTC to the D8B This is done as follows Pro Tools Go to Windows Show Session Setup On the left side of the window you will see a check box and pull down menu for Send MTC to Port Check this box and choose the MIDI port you have connected to the D8B DP3 1 Go to Basics Transmit Sync Check the Send MTC check box and choose the MIDI port you have connected to the D8B Nuendo Go to Transport Sync Setup Under Send MIDI Timecode check the MIDI port you have connected to the D8B Now if you press Play the blue time code read out top right corner of the D8B GUI should display the incoming time code If during play back it stays at all zeros then the D8B is not receiving code properly and you should repeat the above instructions Your D8B is now connected correctly Operation The real HUI and thus the HUI layer only has eight faders To control more than eight faders in a DAW we put bank buttons on the HUI to shift eight faders at a time to the right or left This allows you access to all your faders in the DAW since the D8B doesn t have bank left or right buttons or many others that are on the HUI we remapped the buttons on the D8B HUI layer to perform different functions when in HUI Mode D8B
333. ough any undone actions in reverse order the last is first and the first is last Cut Channel Ctrl X e Removes selected data channel track automation dynamics etc e Information that s been Cut is stored on the clipboard awaiting reassignment or purging e Information in the clipboard can be pasted to another channel track region etc D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 54 Cutting data typically restores selected channels or regions to their default settings or to off The History List keeps a running list of the Edit choices for later recall Copy 5 Ctrl C Places selected data on the clipboard awaiting reassignment Copying data has no effect on the data being copied Copied data is reassigned using the Paste command Paste Channels or the Paste button in the onboard Clipboard section Paste Channels Ctrl V Replaces the data in a selected channel region or area with relevant data residing in the clipboard When multiple channels are on the clipboard data from the lower channel numbers are pasted first when there are fewer number of target tracks selected Paste can be undone Delete Events DEL This action deletes any selected events or range of events This action is entered on the History List and available for Undo as long as it remains on the list Set Default Levels Remove Selected Fader s Automation and insert current position Are you sure This is a very
334. p back to the original level state upon punch out There are also applications when you may not necessarily want to have the automation track return to the original level such as an ending track fade where the levels started high but end low or for an effects parameter that goes from one state to another and remains that way for the rest of a song Disable Write Flyback when you don t want the OS to create final levels for you MIDI Snapshots e When enabled incoming MIDI program changes received on any MIDI channel can recall snapshots numbered 0 09 on the console e The D8B sends MIDI Program changes on MIDI channel 1 by default selectable in the Snapshot Window when snapshots are recalled on the console either via the event list or by manually recalling a snapshot from either the snapshot window or the control surface e Incoming program changes may be used to write snapshot events into the dynamic automation track Please note that incoming program changes do not currently update the snapshot number displayed on the panel transport 7 segment displays To avoid a snapshot thru MIDI feedback loop we recommend as is normal practice with any MIDI instrument that you avoid looping the MIDI Out to the MIDI In unless it is meant to be done intentionally e g a normal exception is master keyboard control over a workstation type instru ment through a sequencer Bottom line avoid mapping the D8B to control itself through a
335. pair of buses Bus 1 8 Copy Mix to Cues button now provides the option of copying the current L R mix to any consecutive odd even pair of aux sends including the cue mixes Aux 9 10 and 11 12 Global Aux Pre Post Assign in the Mix Options Setup window now includes Aux 9 10 and 11 12 Reset Selected Channel provides an easy way to reset all the parameters on the selected channel to their default values Screen Saver option can be set to activate after 1 minute and after up to 1 hour of inactivity Extended Memory Usage now supports up to 250 MB of RAM D8B Manual gt Preface page 2 Note If you are updating from version 3 0 to the v5 1 OS when you open a session that was created in version 3 0 you may experience anomolies in some of the EQ settings due to the new EQ alogrithms in v5 1 You may want to finish any sessions you ve already started in version 3 0 before updating to v5 1 If you do update midway through a session be sure to double check your EQ settings and make sure they are set correctly Alternately there is an option to select version 3 0 EQ settings under Mix Options in the Setup window This instructs the DSP to use the version 3 0 algorithms for the EQ rather than the new and improved algorithms for vo 1 Another Note You re probably wondering what happened to version 4 Version 5 has so many new features and enhanced graphics that we thought it was appropriate to skip version 4 altogether and jump up to versi
336. panned channel is routed to the center speaker only speaker 3 e With a Divergence setting of 100 the center panned channel is routed equally to the front left and right speakers speakers 1 and 2 Low Frequency Effect e This control varies the channel send level to the subwoofer speaker 4 e This is the only control over channel levels to the subwoofer speaker 4 e The pan grid has no effect on this adjustment e With this control set to OFF there is no send level to the subwoofer gt Unity gain is achieved when this control is set to 0 0 61 MORPH e Notice the speakers are numbered 1 3 2 5 4 7 and 6 Speakers 1 and 2 are Front L R speaker 3 is Front Center speaker 4 is the Subwoofer speakers 5 and 6 are Rear L R and speaker 7 is Rear Center Divergence e This control continuously varies the center image from dead center speaker 3 to a phantom center equally split between speakers 1 and 2 e With a Divergence setting of O the center panned channel is routed to the center speaker only speaker 3 e With a Divergence setting of 100 the center panned channel is routed equally to the front left and right speakers speakers 1 and 2 Since there is a rear center channel in 6 1 surround mode the Rear Divergence is not adjustable and is fixed at 0 Low Frequency Effect This control varies the channel send level to the subwoofer speaker 4 This is the only con
337. pendices page 151 Appendix C Plug in Configuration and Routing Configuring the Plug in After installing your UFX or MFX card all you need to do is assign a plug in to the card Assigning the Plug in to a UFX or MFX card Click the Plugins menu and select Plugins 1 or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl P Plugins Ctrl P 2 In the Plugin Configuration window locate the card slot that contains the UFX or MFX card to which you wish to assign a plug in 3 Inthe MODE column click the MONO STEREO toggle button and set it to mono or stereo depending on the plug in and the card x Card Slot Input Source hode Plugin Select Destination amami x 4 In the Plugin Select column select a plug in from the pull down menu It should look something like this none Pro Audio Lab DelayFactor Drawmer Dyn FilterMachine MDW Stereo EQ pre TC Leve mj TimePak Note A plug in can also be loaded from the Setup section on the console Assigning an Input Source to the Plug in e Click the plug ins INPUT button to select input source In the following example we have chosen the Aux 4 Bus as the input to the plug in installed in slot 6 D8B Manual e Appendices page 152 Card Slot Input Source hode Plugin Select Destination Aux 4 default Mix L e When a plug in is
338. playback the Punch Out point to the current cursor position Can be used Set the Punch Out point to the current cursor position Can be used during playback playback EXE AR asa Highlight DP3 current locator position Use D8B keypad to enter in numbers Press enter to confirm and go to the new locate point 8 Her Toggles D8B snap Press to enter D8B snapshot mode Type a snapshot number and press Enter to recall a snapshot napano recall mode Press Store m a number and press Enter to store a snapshot Exit snapshot mode by pressing Snapshot or Enter Rewind Rewind Rewind DP3 Rewind DP3 transport Alt Rewind a Return DP3 locator to beginning memory locate point Press again to return to beginning of timeline ES Fast Fwd Fast Forward FastFoward Y Fast Foward DES A Forward DP3 muwu Start Recording in DP3 Press during playback to punch into record press again to punch out ES Jog amp Shuttle Jog Shuttle Y Pres once to go into jog press again to go into shuttle and press again to go back to normal Jog Wheel Jog Wheel Turn wheel to either Jog or Shuttle If you are pop editing a soundbite and you enter jog audio will be heard while you scrub og og vinee the soundbite If you are editing soundbite in the Soundbite Edit window you can also scrub the audio Cut Zero Set Cut selection sound bite Undo Undo Press to undo previous command Press aga
339. pressor section indicates either the output signal level from the compres sor or the amount of gain reduction depending on the setting of the METERING switch next to the meter This setting is global and 15 not recalled with any individual channel The default meter setting is OUT Output level Click on the meter to change to the alternate meter view This can be useful for lower level signals OUTPUT OUT RED SOFT THRESHOLD ATTACK RELEASE D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 85 OUTPUT THRESHOLD ATTACK When there is no signal applied the Reduction meter indicates 0 dB of reduction with the needle all the way to the right As the signal level in creases above the Threshold setting of the Com pressor the needle moves down indicating the amount of compression being applied at any given moment in time to a maximum of 20 dB of reduction Additionally there is a signal present indicator the green LED near the top of the meter which simulates an analog signal present LED It begins to light at 40 dB and becomes fully lit when the signal passes 20 dB Note that the Reduction meter is triggered by the Compressor function only and does not indicate the closing or opening of the gate THRESHOLD e Determines the level at which the compressor begins to act on the incoming signal It is calibrated in decibels ranging from 60 0 dB to 1 0 dB ATTACK e Determines how fast the compressor reacts once
340. process and therefore provides a more transparent reconstruction As a practical application if your music is to be mastered by someone else in a professional mastering facility you might not need to use the UV22 process too much dither can accumulate too much noise If you re seeing the project through to the end you have three primary options Don t dither If your music is always loud loud loud loud you might not need to worry about dither because dither really only helps audio quality at low levels However if there is a fade out in your song then of course everything isn t always loud and you ll want to take advantage of the UV22 process to feather the fade out with excellent audio clarity e Dither once The conventional approach has been to avoid dithering until the final version is mastered prepared for duplication In this case wait until the final mix is printed to the replication master then use a Normal UV22 setting on the Stereo I O in the Setup window Dither only once on Normal setting dither noise is cumulative so too much dither equates to senseless noise If your music contains only a few low level passages try using the Low setting on the Stereo I O Low equates to a lower level of noise and though it might not provide as much smoothing of low level audio it might be quite sufficient and less noise just seems like a better choice wherever appropriate e Dither twice If your music c
341. ption SmartKey musical description octave below lead root of chord lowest octave down Baritone low 3rd of chord in low 3rd of chord in the octave down the octave below Tenor just underneath 5th of chord in just underneath 5th of chord in lead the octave below the lead the octave below Unison unison the same note unison as the lead Alto just above 3rd of chord just above intelligent 3rd lead the lead Soprano highest an octave above highest octave above lead the root When using the Pitch Shift control mode Interval works in a different but simple way Pitch Shift interval is set from 24 to 24 for each voice Each digit corresponds to one semitone above or below the lead pitch For example 24 would be two octaves below the lead 12 would be an octave above the lead The intervals for Pitch Shift are represented with numbers as they are not intelligent intervals Pitch Shift intervals are always a parallel distance away from the lead note no matter what the key and scale of the music Gender Gender M GENDER Using these sliders you can adjust the gender of each of the four harmony voices So what is this gender thing gender jen der m 1 The condition or quality of being of the male or female sex In IVL Vocal Studio Gender will give your harmony voices distinct character When the gender amount is set at O in the middle there
342. r L R button then sweep across adjacent channels to assign the selected bus output to multiple channels e To assign multiple channels to a mono or stereo set of tape outs assign them to buses or a pair of buses then route the buses to the tape output s Stereo pairing is selected by assigning a channel to any odd even bus pair 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L R etc In this case the PAN control positions the channel between the bus pairs The Master Strip Master Fader Controls the Master L R Mix level e Ideally set at unity gain Control click anywhere in the fader throw to automatically set the fader to unity Click anywhere in the fader throw to instantly snap to that level MASTERS EFFECTS TAPE AND LINE buttons These are the on screen fader bank selectors LINE is Fader Bank 1 TAPE is Fader Bank 2 EFFECTS is Fader Bank 3 MASTERS is Fader Bank 4 HUI is Fader Bank 5 only available when HUI mode is active MASTER MARTE METERS TRACKING TRIM AUSES 1 UN r CUE LEVEL 1 CUE PAM EFFECTS MASTERS D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 47 SERT UI mra MASTER METERS TRACKING LEVEL TRH ALISES 1 CUE LEVEL 1 CUE PAM 1 front TAPE EFFECTS HASTERS MASTER V Pot e Functional as a master Aux level control
343. r parameters other than fader mute and pan even though RECORD is pressed automation data isn t actually recorded until a parameter change is made Note Operation characteristics of the Transport RECORD button are determined by the settings in the Setup gt Mix Options window Select One Button Punch to enable record status by simply pressing the RECORD button alone If One Button Punch is not selected you must hold PLAY while pressing RECORD to enter record mode Press Play or Stop to punch out of record Exit Record and Rewind to Beginning of Track Start Playback from Beginning of Track Repeat this Action for More Parameters Write Punch in Mode This mode functions in a very similar fashion to Write Ready mode However in this mode the Transport RECORD button is not needed Exit AUTO TOUCH Mode Deselect Write Ready Mode e This option is available in the Setup gt Mix Options Menu and in the Setup gt Mix Options window Start Playback Device then Press the Write Button s on the Desired Channels e In this mode pressing the channel WRITE buttons immediately places the channels into automation record mode e Pressing an active WRITE button yellow light solidly on immediately punches out of automation record mode for that channel Adjust Automation Parameters on the WRITE Enabled Channels e 5 always important to verify the correct selection of intended automation parameters Exit Record and Rewind to B
344. r the amount of gain reduction depending on the setting of the ME TERING switch next to the meter This setting is global and is not recalled with any individual channel The default meter setting is IN Input level THRESHOLD ATTACK RELEASE The Input Signal meter displays the channel s input signal as measured at the post Digital Trim pre Compressor point When there is no signal applied the Reduc tion meter indicates 0 dB of reduction with the needle all the way to the right As the signal level decreases below the Threshold setting of the Gate the needle drops down indicating the amount of gain reduction being applied at any given moment in time to a maximum of 20 dB of reduction With normal gating the amount of reduction is minus infinity or OFF With EXPAND turned on the amount of reduction is determined by the RATIO setting Click on the meter to change to the alternate meter view This can be useful for lower level signals The red LED near the top of the meter is a gate threshold indicator and lights up to indicate when the Gate is on THRESHOLD e Determines the level at which the gate acts on the incoming signal It is calibrated in decibels ranging from 60 0 dB to 1 0 dB ATTACK e Determines how fast the gate opens once the threshold has been exceeded It is calibrated in milliseconds ranging from 0 1 ms to 2500 ms 2 5 seconds RELEASE e Determines how fast the gate closes once the si
345. ral information here is what s packed into IVL Vocal Studio e Formant Preserving Pitch Shifting e Intelligent Vocal Harmony with four operating modes e Pitch Corrector e Vocal Special Effects e Integral Reverb Effect Technologies Used Formant Preserving Pitch Shifting No chipmunks or Darth Vader here With IVL s patented formant preserving pitch shifting algorithm the Vocal Studio uses precise analyzation techniques on the input voice to naturally shift it higher or lower Pitch recognition IVL does more than just take a note and shift its pitch The pitch shifting algorithm detects the exact pitch of the note in order to provide the most natural shifted sound Intelligent Harmony The Vocal Studio has musical knowledge It took lessons from some amazing musicians By using different control modes you can choose how much of this intelligence the Vocal Studio will use when creating your harmonies By selecting the key and scale that the vocal passage is in and with IVL Vocal Studio s pitch recognition an intelligent harmony can be created with 1 to 4 voices Voice Muting These buttons allow you to mute individual voices When Voice Muting is ON the audio signal passes through Vocal Studio s processing When MUTE is selected the audio signal is muted for that voice The small number to the left of each button corresponds to the Harmony Ensemble voice that it affects Note The Digital 8eBus ships with one MFX M
346. re Snapshot Studio Level Button Studio Out L R 00000 III eooo 0000 eooo eooo 0000 0000000 000000 000000 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 eooo 0000 III eooo 0000 00000 0000 eooo 0000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 00000 eooo IIl III 55 77 78 000000 0000 00000 000000 000000 000000 00000 III 0000 III III III 00000 eooo eooo eooo III eooo eooo III 0000 eooo III eooo 00000 000000 000000 000000 000000 III III III eooo 00000 eooo eooo eooo eooo 0000 0000 00000 III 000000 000000 000000 000000 III 0000 0000 0000 0000 eooo 00000 000000 eee
347. re than four adjustments can be made e The PREVIOUS button scrolls the VFD to the left e The NEXT button scrolls the VFD to the right e An arrow on the left hand side of the VFD pointing left indicates a previous page is available e An arrow on the right hand side of the VFD pointing right indicates the next page is available lt D8B 5 INPUT 72 CHANNEL DIGITAL MIXER 05 Jed SUPER CD ENCODING SELECT SELECT PREVIOUS LOW LOW MID ON SETUP EQ GATE COMPRESSOR The Fat Channel D8B Manual e Chapter 2 page 32 SELECT SELECT HELP NEXT MEMORY A MEMORY B PLUG INS LOAD PATCH SAVE PATCH ON button Toggles the selected Fat Channel DSP control parameters on and off in bypass fashion SETUP button When EQ is selected in the Fat channel the Setup button lets you select the type of equalization and activate the EQ to Dynamics mode MEMORY A and B buttons e Each channel has two memory locations for EQ compressor gate plug ins and surround parameter comparisons e Any changes to the above controls are temporarily stored in the selected Memory A or B buffers e Simply press Memory A to instantly recall the settings you developed while Memory A was selected Press Memory B to instantly switch to alternate settings e Automation of the parameters will overwrite the buffers unless bypassed EQ button Press this button to see EQ parameters for the selected channel in the onbo
348. rent Locator time position to the time reference window of the highlighted Event Automation Track item Run Event Alt R e Click any where in the event row to highlight it e Choose Run Event from the Edit menu to activate send all event data to the designated destination For example when Run Event is selected while a snapshot event is highlighted the snapshot data is instantly loaded into the D amp B e Avoids having to run time code to preview the event Synchronize Events Synchronize Events is used to match file data from the current opened session with the DSP patch files EQ Comp Gate Channel Plug in on disks that are referenced by the Session s Event Automation Track In short it is a Disk to RAM correlation DSP files that the Event track refer ences may need to be resynchronized due to the files having been renamed deleted updated or moved An important thing to keep in mind is that a session saves all of the Event Automation Track parameters whether or not the original referenced DSP files exist at all This safety net of reproduc ibility was an important design issue a session should completely reproduce snapshots and dynamic automation playback regardless of file dependencies outside of a session Synchronize Events does not act upon snap shots because it does not directly reference snapshots from disk Any changes to snapshots within a session operation will not be displayed as modified Eve
349. reo or one stereo and two mono inputs For each UFX card no matter what the Aux input selection returns appear at the FX faders numbered the same as their respective slots If all UFX effects are mono each return correlates directly to the Slot number 9 to 9 10 to 10 etc e When stereo effects are selected re gardless of the Aux input selection returns appear at the FX faders num bered the same as their respective slots For stereo effects with mono inputs the effects return at the respective slot numbered pair input 9 returns at FX 9 10 input 11 returns at FX 11 12 etc X lt 22 X 22 X 22 X 22 X X lt 22 NS 2 STZ 2 NS NS NS 722 722 722 AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ZX S NS AUX 12 Note Patching from an Aux output does not interrupt the internal sends to the FX Cards so it s possible to run both internal and outboard effects at the same time AUX OUT BAL UNBAL PARALLEL lt lt a Lu e z 5 0 KEYBOARD Remote CPU Description Data and Synchronization I O These connections are specifically pertinent to non audio functions or in plain English these aren t audio connections Connecting a Mouse Keyboard and SVGA Monitor The Digital 8eBus is designed to work as a stand alone console However you ll increase your options and productivity by using a mouse key board and
350. responding Soundscape channel Output Element Record Ready 17 24 Record Ready 1 8 Record Arm corresponding Soundscape channel Track Insert only one track insert can be controlled Assign 17 24 VSel 1 8 EXE Toggle Mute Status of corresponding Soundscape channel Send for selected Send A E If Level To Tape HUI Aux Mute is lit then it will toggle the mute status of the corresponding Soundscape channel Input Element Alt Assign 17 Insert 1 8 E ILE Select corresponding Soundscape channel for Effect Editing in VFD Pe ee eee wd x ne ti nae 2 WE COE oe em 9 Ad smaa N Enabies control of frst Aux send on a channel with HUI layer V Pots 4 Sma Enables control of second Aux send on a channel with HUI layer V Pots 6 CIS I 70 D 7 8 TRI Ne y aaa waspi 10 BankRight __ 11 n 00000000 Shits Hut layer to teft by 1 to view previous fader TI 12 11 12 Chameli N __ Shits HUI layer to rignt by ttoviewnextfader Pa P j n Enables control of VST Channel Settings Pan on HUI layer V Pots E E _ shit Masters pevroDsis 0000 f Dislays Plug in Parameters and values for the selected insert Channel
351. s If cue points are not created progressively from the beginning of the recording to the end the Locator numbers left of the Cue name might become random Click Renum to restructure the cue numbers into ascending order from the beginning of the recording to the end Store Cue e Click Store to enter the current Locator position into the highlighted Cue point e If multiple cue points are highlighted the Locator position is stored in the earliest occurring Cue point only The Mix Editor Window Ctrl 5 The Mix Editor window contains a graphic representation of automation data Though automation data is primarily entered through the control surface knobs buttons and faders it can also be altered graphically in the Mix Editor Precise level and timing information is easily entered and adjusted here The resizable window supports various selectable views from 1 to 24 channels or parameters of data on the Y axis and any length of time region on the X axis up to 24 hours A vertical scroll bar allows for paging or incremental viewing of the channels or parame ters and the horizontal scroll bar allows for paging or scrolling time chunks according to the current time resolution The Mix Editor can view a single channel with all of its parameters or by selecting the Channel View checkbox you can view multiple channels of one parameter type plus a background event of a different type This allows you to view for example 12
352. s while time code is being received on the fly editing before or to the left of the current time or while time code isn t being received at any point on the timeline Shift Pointer Tool e With the Pointer tool selected press and hold the Shift key and notice that the hand turns into a double headed vertical arrow This editing mode allows you to drag automation lines and surrounding nodes vertically without changing the time horizontal value at which the automation occurs This is useful if you want to raise or lower a section of automation as a group e Shift click an automation line to edit the line and the two nodes on either end of the line you click e f you select a region with the Highlighter tool first and then hold the Shift key and edit with the Pointer tool all nodes contained within the selection are edited as a group Again they are constrained to vertical motion only Highlighter Tool Crosshair e Use this tool to select data by time and channel e Select the Highlighter tool and click and drag across a track to highlight a specific time region e Click on another track name field to move the current highlighted region time segment to the selected track e Click and drag across the top timeline bar to select specific sections of time across all tracks e Double click on one track to select the entire 24 hours of data Note You can select multiple adjacent channels in Channel View or multiple adjac
353. s 1 5 and type the letter M and these channels will mute To unmute these same selected channels type either a comma or hold down the shift key and type the letter M Feature Channel List Open Channel Save Channel As Track Selection Multiple Track Selection Move Channel Selection Single Event Selection Multiple Event Selection Store Locate Next Previous Cue New Cue Return to Zero RTZ Rewind Fast Forward Surface Select Shift Select Unselect All Faders Double press any Select Group Group Select Ungroup Group Select Faders to Unity Faders to Off Nudge Selected Faders Channel Link Hold adjacent Select s Unlink Hold adjacent Select s Adjust Channel Delay Reset Channel Delay Reset Selected Channels Reset Channel Layout Write toggle Write Solo toggle Solo Solo Isolate toggle Alt Solo Mute toggle Mute Transport Functions Feature Surface Play Stop Play Stop Play Play Play from Selection Set Selection Start Set Selection End Stop Stop Record Mode Record Location 00 99 in locate mode 00 99 numeric entry followed by Enter Keyboard Ctrl B L R arrow Shift L R arrow or L R arrows Shift Left or right arrow Ctrl G Ctrl Ctrl Alt up down arrows Ctrl L Ctrl U W enable E or Shift W disable S enable D or Shift S disable M enable or Shift M disable Keyboard Space
354. s a format converter be tween either optical and or TDIF ADAT Optical 8 e Two digital ADAT optical fiber optic connec tions e Each card offers I O for 8 channels AES EBU PDIe8 One 25 D sub connector in digital AES EBU format e Each card offers I O for 8 channels ALT I O Card Slot e Separate input output card slot offering 8 more ins and outs e Holds any AIOe8 DIOe8 OPTe8 or PDIe8 e nputs show up at RETURNS faders channels 65 72 e Outputs are assignable to either the 8 bus out puts BUS 1 8 the 12 Aux Sends AUX 1 12 or the MASTER L R outputs e Assignments are made in the Digital I O menu 6 The Clock Card e Provides word clock in and out to connect with other digital equipment e For use as a master or slave clock source e Supports 48kHz and 44 1kHz internal sample rates with vari speed capabilities e Supports external sample rates between 32kHz and 50kHz Note The Apogee Clock I O card replaces the standard clock card that is shipped the SYNC slot with the D amp B The Digital 1 O Card 2 track e AES EBU digital Stereo interconnect for master record machine Input is connected to DIGITAL 1 in the CONTROL ROOM monitor section e S PDIF digital Input is connected to DIGI TAL 2 in the CONTROL ROOM monitor section e Same source output as MASTER L R Digital Effects Card Slots Room for four separate effects cards
355. s a means to shift channels in time relative to each other Select the channels that will remain at the original position all unselected channels will be offset by the selected number of samples 255 This feature helps compensate for phase and timing discrepancies in a synchronization scenario or any multi playback record device setup For example if you place a plug in with 100 samples of delay on a channel the audio will be behind the rest of the channels by that amount To compensate you would select the channel choose Adjust Channel Delay and enter a value of 100 D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 59 Reset Channel Delay Reset the channel delay on selected channels This resets the time altered channels to a status of no offset Reset Selected Channels Resets the selected channels to their default settings L R assign Level to Tape and Digital Trim to 0 dB EQ on and flat Auxes off Pan centered Fader off Gate and Compressor off and at default settings Reset Channel Layout This action resets all channels to the default contiguous channel layout 1 97 It undoes all channel rearrangements across the board Select Fader Bank Alt A Selects all 24 channels in the currently selected fader bank for clipboard automation and other operations pertaining to multiple channel modifications Select All Faders Alt Shift A Selects all 97 channels 96 plus the L R mains in all four fa
356. s automation playback enable and bypass for the individual channels This feature is used in addition to the global automation bypass but works on a per channel basis There are three modes within Playback Run Punch Run and Disabled Run This is the default mode and if dynamic automation is present on the channel automation moves play back when time code is received and the global automation bypass is disabled Disabled This mode simply disables automation playback on the individual channel regardless of the global Bypass status Disabled is a safe area that you can use to prevent automation playback from chasing and overwriting your latest edits before you get a chance to commit the settings The Disabled feature is also handy for setting up parameters within the context of a mix relative to whether other individual channels or sections are automation bypassed Punch Run Once you ve automated a channel you might want to preset a punch in level to drop or boost the parameter of interest especially a fader In Absolute mode Auto Touch off the parameter cannot be altered if it is chasing automation as you can see when you grab a fader knob during automation playback and it fights you For this purpose we created the Punch Run mode Place the channel in Punch Run which releases the playback chase mechanism until the channel has been placed in any automation Write mode When Punch Run is engaged you can roll back the tape
357. s available on the D amp B e All standard mix modes are selectable through the surround Mode list including Stereo Quad LCRS 5 1 6 1 7 1 SDDS and 7 1 TP Auto Arm e Once the Surround Mode is selected Auto Arm provides a quick and easy way to arm all the channel buses to feed the appropriate outputs e Stereo automatically activates all L R assignments for all appropriate channels e Quad automatically activates bus assignments 1 2 5 and 6 e LCRS automatically activates bus assignments 1 2 3 and 4 e 5 1 automatically activates bus assignments 1 6 e 6 1 automatically activates bus assignments 1 7 e 7 1 automatically activates bus assignments 1 8 Clear e Automatically clears all bus assignments whether set manually or activated automatically through the Auto Arm feature Stereo Mode Setup Options gt Choose whether to mute the analog Bus 1 8 outputs when Stereo mode is selected for the surround mode e This is recommended when using the bus outputs for surround monitoring MIDI General Network Digitall O Licensing Mix Opt Surround FTP Server MIDI File Tempo Map Default Tempo ls DE Active Tempo MIDI Device ID s MIDI File Tempo Map e Import a MIDI Tempo Map from a standard MIDI File to synchronize the D8B Bars Beats Ticks display with your MIDI sequencer MTC reference Default Tempo Sets the automatically set MIDI tempo reference for position alignments during an a
358. s linked The following link options are available Link Ch 1 over Ch 2 Channel 1 is linked to channel 2 according the selected parameters All selected parameters are copied from channel 1 to channel 2 when the Link button is clicked Link Ch 2 over Ch 1 Channel 1 is linked to channel 2 according the selected parameters All selected parameters are copied from channel 2 to channel 1 when the Link button is clicked Link Ch 1 over Ch 25 Channel 1 is linked to channel 25 according the selected parameters All selected parameters are copied from channel 1 to channel 25 when the Link button is clicked Link Ch 25 over Ch 1 Channel 1 is linked to channel 25 according the selected parameters All selected parameters are copied from channel 25 to channel 1 when the Link button is clicked e Click the Link button to link the channels you have selected or click Cancel to cancel the linking process To link a pair of channels horizontally from the control surface press and hold the SELECT buttons of the two adjacent channels you wish to link To link a pair of channels vertically from the control surface press and hold ALT SELECT on one of the channels you wish to link In both situations the Fat Channel display changes to the appropriate linking screen after a few moments Press the NEXT button to adjust the parameters you wish to link Press the PREVIOUS button to return to the fir
359. s they feel the sound needs then they perfect the audio during mixdown Many excellent recordings have been the result of these techniques and more Experiment and let your ears determine what works best for you D8B Manual e Chapter 4 page 114 MIDI and the D8B MIDI Basics Your Digital 8eBus works very well when incorporated in a MIDI network utilizing a computer referenced to time code Be sure to connect the D8B MIDI jacks to your MIDI interface Within your computer based MIDI sequencer set the MIDI channel connected to the D B to transmit MIDI Time Code MTC This is necessary to run automation from a Digital Audio Workstation DAW MIDI Interface 9 oom gt lt When you don t include a computer in your setup you need a device like the Alesis BRC to transmit MTC to the D8B for time reference when performing dynamic and snapshot automation YN BRC 2h MIDI Digital 8eBus SYNC 2000000000 O00 L3 A R The Digital 8eBus provides control over some key MIDI parameters These parameters affect your system s ease of use and efficiency and should be verified MMC DEVICE ID Some 8 track digital recorders require that you define the device ID numbers used for each recorder in the MIDI Machine Controller Typically tracks 1 6 are device 0 tracks 9 16 are device 1 and tracks 17 24 6 device 2 so these are the default settings
360. screen What is Pitch Corrector Mode Everyone mixing vocals has experienced out of tune vocal tracks Typically there hasn t been much at your finger tips to fix those nasty notes Some lucky folks have been able to invest thousands of dollars in computer editing suites to do pitch correction IVL Vocal Studio gives a simple yet effective pitch corrector to doctor your vocal tracks with your D8B Vocal Studio s pitch corrector is operated manually Therefore you have control over pitch fixing at all times Generally the less you correct the note the more natural the result However the pitch corrector can force a vocal note anywhere What are the Controls The Pitch Corrector screen is separated into four control areas Pitch Bender is used to bend out of tune vocal notes to the desired pitch The pitch bender works just as a spring loaded pitch bender would work on a keyboard Use the mouse to drag the pitch bender up to raise the pitch Drag the pitch bender down to lower the pitch When you release your mouse button the pitch bender will spring back to the center position where the pitch will be unaffected You can also use an external pitch bender from a MIDI keyboard with the same results Pitch Bend Range sets a maximum amount the pitch can be corrected using the Pitch Bender The pitch bend range is set by grabbing the red circle located in the Pitch Bend Range window with your mouse When the range is set to
361. se the pull down menu to assign them all to a group e This does not override any previous group settings outside the selected channels however a channel can only be assigned to one group The most current group selection does override a previous channel group assignment e This feature provides a way to add faders to an already existing group Ungroup Ungroup selected faders Click Coalesce to combine group master automation with selected slaves automation Click Dissolve to maintain existing pre group slave automation This is not undoable eee Less ess e Provides an easy way to remove channels from a previously established group Select some or all of the grouped channels to remove the selected channel from the group status e Select Coalesce to retain the Group s automation data with the selected channel s after ungrouping Select Dissolve to retain only the channel s automation data pre group after ungrouping Channel Link Ctrl L e Channel linking allows you to control a pair of channels at the same time All channel parameters can be linked or just selected parameters For instance in many cases only the faders need to be linked all other parameters should remain independent for the individual track e Any channel can be linked horizontally to an D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 58 adjacent channel on the same bank or vertically to a channel directly above or b
362. selected PUNCH 1 A remote switch connection for activating the MMC master record function to punch in or out of record Use with a normally open switch TALKBACK A remote switch connection for engaging the talkback function Duplicates the Talkback switch in the CON TROL ROOM section Use with a normally open switch D8B Manual e Chapter 2 e page 24 2 TRACK A B and C e Balanced 1 4 TRS inputs for receiving line level analog signals from a 2 track recorder e The separate left right pairs feed the 2 TRACK A B and C buses in the control room monitor ing section e Can accept balanced and unbalanced signals AUX OUT Section e There are 12 Aux sends available e Auxes 1 8 provide mono 1 4 TRS ana log line level outputs e Auxes 9 and 10 are linked together as a stereo pair of 1 4 TRS analog line level outputs e Auxes 11 and 12 are linked together as a stereo pair of 1 4 TRS analog line level outputs Note Auxes 1 12 simultaneously feed the analog Aux sends and the internal effects cards by default Each MFX card handles two separate mono inputs so auxes are paired MFX effects returns are stereo so each card while receiving two discrete mono inputs returns two sets of stereo outputs to the EFFECTS Bank Internally Aux 1 returns to FX 1 2 Aux 2 returns to FX 3 4 Aux 3 returns to FX 5 6 continuing through Aux 8 which returns at FX 15 16 UFX cards handle 4 mono two ste
363. sition rate between the original vocal sound and the pitch corrected sound Operation Harmony Harmony mode is used to create everything from harmonies to doubled voices To make sure you are in Harmony mode make sure it is selected The Editing Parameters The editing parameters are the tools that allow you to put some spice into your harmonies or doubled voices Some of the editing parameters are used in all control modes and others are specific to one control mode SmartChord PitchShif Interval Gender Detune Volume Pan Styles Envelope Key Scale D8B Manual Appendices page 146 Interval interval INTERVAL Smooth Soprano 4 Using the interval sliders you can adjust the interval of each of the four harmony voices Basically Interval controls the voicing of the harmonies relative to your lead note When in the SmartChord and SmartKey control modes the interval settings are divided into seven coarse steps Each step directs the voice in a different way The following table describes the individual intervals in musical and nonmusical terms Note that although the descriptions for the SmartChord and SmartKey intervals are similar SmartChord intervals follow the lead voice loosely and SmartKey intervals follow the lead voice s every pitch movement SmartChord non musical Step description Bass lowest SmartChord musical description SmartKey non musical descri
364. sociated signal buses Channels 1 2 Inputs 6 5 4 3 2 1 48V 48V 48V 48V 48V 48V PH PH PH PH PH PH 65 MIC 9 MIC MIC MIC MIC MIC LINE IN LINE IN LINE IN LINE IN LINE IN 2 RSS 22 22 22 KS 2 St SJ INSERT INSERT INSERT INSE INSERT XN SY XA ZA s 22 ZA 722 99 Each channel contains e XLR mic input Be sure the MIC button is pressed down on the control surface channel strip e Phantom power On Off button depending on mic requirements e 1 4 TRS line input balanced or unbalanced Be sure the MIC switch is in the up position on the control surface channel strip e 1 4 TRS channel insert direct output jack Channels 13 24 Inputs FN Z ee e 0 22 2 22 227 2 Channels 13 through 24 have 1 4 TRS Tip Ring Sleeve line input connectors that accept balanced and unbalanced signals D8B Manual e Chapter 2 e page 22 Card Cage Section A B 6 D 6 4 1 3 2 2 m APOGEE l 2 LL o 12 AES EBU CLOCK e li 6 DB alu M ss w to 18 2 oa BOWEL 16 z JD JD IN e T 3 5 2 n so e TAN DIGITAL EFFECTS CARDS DIGITAL 6 ALTO L TAPEIN OUTS This is where you plug in the optional I O cards of your choosing to customize the Digital 8eBus for your own application Th
365. ssional singers never hit a note right on pitch They hit their note slightly lower than the pitch they are aiming for and then scoop up to the correct note The scoop presets are created using the amount of scoop how far below the note and how long it takes for the harmony voice to scoop to the actual note m Pros 1 The Pros 2 Semi Pro 1 Semi Pro 2 Swoopy no scooping low amount fast rate scooping high amount medium fast rate scooping low amount medium slow rate scooping high amount slow rate scooping low amount very slow rate scooping D8B Manual gt Appendices page 148 Heavy amp Fast heavy depth fast rate with onset delay Light amp Slow low depth slow rate with onset delay Med amp Slow Heavy amp Slow high depth slow rate with onset delay Chorale i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Portamento is used to limit the hard stepping between moving harmony notes Portamento can add realism to the movement of harmonies With Portamento each harmony note slides into the next at a selected rate The rates are selected with the Portamento spin dial from 0 fastest to 10 slowest PitchBend Range sets the pitch bend range that can be applied to the harmony voices using a MIDI device The pitch bend range can be set from 0 to 12 semitones Key Scale is an edit mode used only in SmartKey mode The use of Key Scale is described farther on under the SmartKey section Envelope is
366. st link screen when you are finished setting link parameters Press either the Link or Link buttons Link T or Link J for vertical linking to perform the Link Remember the arrow points to the source channel Link parameters are copied from the source channel to the other channel e Relative offset Pressing Shift on the console or keyboard while moving any controller function on the D8B console surface or with the mouse allows a relative distance or relative offset of ANY linked parameter For example on two linked faders press and hold Shift move one fader let go of Shift and a new relative position is maintained To maintain a pan spread press and hold Shift move a linked pan V Pot release the Shift and the pans will maintain the offset spread to the extent of the maximum left or right value Remember that pressing Ctrl and moving a controller resets it to a normal or default position so you can always realign and match the relative link to a zeroed offset Inverse Pan linhing Pan can be set to link inversely This means that rotating the Pan control on one channel causes the Pan control on the linked channel to rotate in the opposite direction Inverse Switch toggling You can press Shift and then press the MUTE button on a channel and it will toggle oppositely to the other linked mute This feature can be especially handy for applications such as vocal comps and bus switching Inverse switching is se
367. st two VFD select buttons mirror the Channel L and Channel R functions The name of the selected channel function is displayed in the center of the top VFD line The Online status is also displayed at the end of this line D8B Manual Appendices page 177 D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For Logic 6 16220 Woodinville Redmond Rd NE Woodinville WA 98072 Tel 800 258 6883 Fax 425 806 6312 e mail techmail mackie com Last Updated 2 07 03 D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments Logic 6 Function E Dee npo e m 790246 Channel V Pot 1 8 Move corresponding Logic channel Pan or Send Level Se T 5 solo 17 24 Solo corresponding Logic channel sms rs TI na nts NN Toggle Pre Post of corresponding Logic channel Send for selected Send A E If Level To Tape ME Aux Mute is lit then it will toggle the mute status of the corresponding Logic channel send for the selected Send A E ments Nf Selects track for plug in selection If Bypass 17 is on then it toggles bypass of currently selected insert slot wem erm 22772211 m estera mereri 1 LeveltoTape Auxmute fo When lit assign V Sel toggles the mute status of the selected Send When not lit V Sel will toggle the selected Send Pre Post a 27
368. t Chapter 3 page 75 71 TP MORPH 2 FLYBACK e TP stands for Theme Park This configuration provides a symmetrical distribution of speakers surrounding the listener e Notice the speakers are numbered 1 3 2 7 8 5 4 and 6 Speakers 1 and 2 are Front L R speaker 3 is Front Center speaker 4 is the Subwoofer speakers 5 and 6 are Rear L R and speakers 7 and 8 are Side L R Divergence e This control continuously varies the center image from dead center speaker 3 to a phantom center equally split between speakers 1 and 2 e With a Divergence setting of O the center panned channel is routed to the center speaker only speaker 3 e With a Divergence setting of 100 the center panned channel is routed equally to the front left and right speakers speakers 1 and 2 Low Frequency Effect e This control varies the channel send level to the subwoofer speaker 4 e This is the only control over channel levels to the subwoofer speaker 4 e The pan grid has no effect on this adjustment e With this control set to OFF there is no send level to the subwoofer e Unity gain is achieved when this control is set to 0 0 Right Click Right click in the Panning window to reveal the Surround Menu This menu provides opportunity to e Reset the channel surround parameters e Undo previous action gt Open previously saved surround channel status e Save existing surround channel parameters e Cut Copy
369. t ahead of the locate point e The amount of Pre roll is set in the Locator MMC section of the Setup window e Pre roll is used to provide a set time period for all synchronized device transports to lock together e Ideally pre roll is equal to the sync lock time for the recording system s transports so that synchronized playback is a reality by the time the devices roll past the locate position Record Safe e n Record Safe the channel RECORD buttons will not engage However automation data can still be written One Button Punch e With this option selected record mode is activated by pressing the RECORD button in the control surface s transport section When One Button Punch is not selected the PLAY button must be held down while pressing RECORD to engage record mode e To punch out of record status simply press PLAY STOP REWIND or FAST FWD e One Button Punch affects only the punch in procedure e The punch out procedure is the same no matter what the status of One Button Punch hit any other transport button to punch out Meters Sub menu These meter options apply to the on screen meters and not to the meter bridge on the console which always indicates pre fader levels Meter Type Options Plugins Windows Memory Solo Latch v Link Speakers FFE pre pre FFE FFE FFE FRE 1 z 1 2 1 2 1 2 i fe 1 2 i z 1 2 Automation z 5 s s s s s 5 Transport
370. t and recalled individually on all parameters so Bus 1 and the linked Bus 1 can be inversely locked while Bus 2 and mutes are locked to the same value Holding down Shift and enabling a linked channel mute Bus 1 8 and L R assigns EQ on off Gate on off and Comp on off assignment enables the inverse function To leave this mode press Shift and the linked button again The mode may also be initiated by using the keyboard Shift and clicking on a linked channel s button Unlink Ctrl U Removes a link between channels Initiate by selecting a linked channel and then selecting Unlink under Channels in the upper menu bar or For horizontally linked channels by pressing and holding a linked channel s SELECT button for two seconds and then choosing Link Off in the Fat Channel Display For vertically linked channels by pressing and holding the ALT button and a linked channel s SELECT button for two seconds and then choosing Link Off in the Fat Channel Display Faders to Unity Ctrl Sets the selected channel faders to unity Affects faders only including the MASTER L R fader Does not affect other channel parameters Faders to Off Ctrl Instantly sets selected channel faders to off Affects faders only including the MASTER L R fader Does not affect other channel parameters Adjust Channel Delay Enter the of samples 2 0 255 to offset non selected Channels This feature provide
371. t have the smarts that the other control modes do so you re best to stay away from harmonies and use this for special effects and doubling unless you actually want your harmonies to sound like Gregorian chants You can produce some interesting spoken word effects by muting your input voice and pitch shifting a single effect voice down a few tones or even an octave Combine this with a little male gender and you can get pretty close to a newscast voiceover Subtle pitch shifts are better though for changing male to female and vice versa Pitch Shift mode is also handy for unison or octave doubling effects Turn on all four voices and place the interval settings in the middle If you add detuning and a bit of scoop style this will thicken up your vocal as if you had quadruple tracked your voice You can also take one or two of the effect voices and put them in octave positions for interesting effects too Reverb When any of the harmony modes are being used you can also add a reverb harmony effect However to engage the reverb harmony effect you must be in Stereo Output mode This sends your harmonies to one set of stereo returns on your D amp B and your reverb to another set of stereo returns Reverb can be very useful in placing your harmonies deeper in your mix D8B Manual e Appendices page 150 Operation Pitch Correction Mode To make sure you are in Pitch Correction mode select Pitch Correct from the Vocal Studio
372. te These steps assume that the default input and output selections are made for the plug ins Input corresponding Aux Send Output corresponding FX Return Alterate Input sources and Destinations can be selected if desired Plugins Windows Plugins Ctrl P Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Alt 5 BN Alt 6 Alt 7 8 Mono EQ Alt 8 P9 TCLevell Alt 9 P10 Alt 0 P11 Drawmer Dyn Alt Shift 1 P12 Drawmer Dyn Alt Shift 2 P13 DelayFactor Alt Shift 3 R u 43 Alt Shift 4 P15 Antares Autotune Alt Shift 5 P16 Saturated Fat Alt Shift 6 P 1 VocalStudio N P 5 Mono EQ P 6 MDW Mono EQ P 7 MDW Mono EQ 1 Open the Plugin Configuration window click Plugins in the upper menu bar and select Plugins or Crtl P and select the Input Source Mode Stereo Mono Plugin and Destination that suits your needs for each available slot Card Slot _ Input Source raw w Plugin Select Destination UN AN 4 2 Click the red 1 4 connector on the lower menu bar to reveal the plug in selector buttons 3 Select the plug in you want to adjust by clicking on its button D8B Manual e Chapter 4 page 112 4 Plug ins are organized in the order of the aux buses they correspond to Note In the plug in windows clicking directly on the Effects patch name displays a large pop up menu of Factory or User patch names which points to available patches in your working directory s Presets folder A
373. te connection to your MIDI network using standard MIDI cables This could be a plastic housing adapter or a rattail 9 pin split to 5 pin I O connection MIDI IN receives MTC program changes and controller note and poly aftertouch messages MIDI OUT sends MMC commands program changes and controller note and poly aftertouch messages The MIDI card can be replaced with the Seriale9 card which provides both MIDI and Sony 9 Pin communication D8B Manual e Chapter 2 page 25 6 Ethernet Port e Accepts an RJ45 telco connector Connects to PC Mac for FTP file transfer through a network or peer to peer e Can be used to make peer to peer connections with other Digital 8eBus consoles e Use CAT5 for standard network FTP connections use crossover CATS for peer to peer connections Control Surface Functions We ll divide the D amp B control surface into two sections the Channel Strip section and the Master section Channel Strip Section The channel strip on the Digital 8eBus is very much like the channel strip on an analog mixer Each channel offers the same set of controls with a few exceptions Even with a brief overview of each control you ll find your understanding of the digital mixing concept closely related to what you already know about analog mixers that s the beauty of this console design e There are 24 channel strips e There are four layers Fader Banks of feature sets MIC LINE 1 24 TAPE
374. ters you d like to record as automation data on the first pass This is typically a great time to ride basic fader mute and pan settings However there is no problem with selecting Faders Mutes Pan and ALL so no matter what moves you make they can be re corded and recalled by the automation processor Any Combination of Faders Mutes and Pans on First Pass e Choose automation parameters by selecting them in the control surface AUTOMATION section in the on screen locator window or the Options Automation menu e The D amp B shows no favoritism to any or all parameter writing during automation You ll discover the process that works best for you Note Faders Mutes and Pan all apply individually to the one parameter they name ALL applies to all automation parameters other than Faders Mutes and Pan Safety Net You can undo any automation record pass or series of record passes using the History List You can also redo your undo Or undo your redo Or undo your hairdo Auto Touch Mode Auto Touch mode offers great flexibility and ease of use When AUTO TOUCH is selected automation data is recorded instantaneously for any parameter as soon as you change its setting select AUTO TOUCH by highlighting the control surface AUTO TOUCH button clicking AUTO TOUCH in the on screen Locator window or select ing Auto Touch in the Options Automation menu You ll know you ve succeeded in writing automation data when you see the yello
375. the MFX plug in is selected for display D8B Manual e Appendices page 157 Using the Mackie Effects MFX The Digital 8eBus comes with one MFX card installed to provide two stereo effects Three additional MFX cards can be installed for a total of up to eight mono in stereo out internal effects available simultaneously The console ships with the Mackie FX MFX plug in installed This plug in provides five useful effects that can be globally selected and used with the aux sends and FX returns Each effect has a 3 Band Parametric EQ which filters the signal prior to the actual effect 3 Band Parametric EQ Click the EQ button in the lower right corner of the Mackie Effects window to turn the EQ on and off This provides a low shelving filter with a corner frequency at 100 Hz a mid band fully parametric EQ and a high shelving filter with a corner frequency at 10 kHz Click the EDIT button to change the EQ parameters Low Shelf Gain This adjusts the boost and cut below 100 Hz This is calibrated in decibels dB with a range from 12 dB to 12 dB High Shelf Gain This adjusts the boost and cut above 10kHz This is calibrated in decibels dB with a range from 12 dB to 12 dB Mid Gain This adjusts the boost and cut at the mid frequency setting This is calibrated in decibels dB with a range from 12 dB to 12 dB Mid Frequency This adjusts the center frequency of the parametric EQ This is calibrated in Hertz Hz
376. the timeline cursor located at the screen s halfway point Snap To Cues 314523 SNAP GRID Nodes Left e The box under the Auto Follow button displays Node availability e The maximum number of automation nodes you can use is directly related to the amount of RAM in your D8B CPU iuto Scn E able Snap i Insert New Cue Snap To Cues Insert New Event A amp uta Fallaw Mute All Events NODES E Unmute AI Events SNAP LEFT GRID 2 Bridge Mute Event 00 03 00 00 Enable Snap e Click this button to enable the selected Snap To function see below Snap To Cues e Click this button to allow the highlighter tool to snap to a cule point when in the vicinity of a cue marker Snap To Grid e Click this button to allow the highlighter tool or a cue to snap to the grid as defined in the Snap Grid Drop Down box see next paragraph D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 81 Snap Grid Drop Down Box e Click here to select the Snap To Grid parameter Selections include Rule Mrks Minutes Seconds and Frames for SMTPE time and Bar 1 2 Note 1 2 Note Triplet 1 4 Note 1 4 Note Triplet 1 8 Note 1 8 Note Triplet 1 16 Note and 1 16 Note Triplet for Bars Beats Ticks Insert New Cue e Click this button to insert a new cue the current time cursor point Insert New Event e This button opens the New Event window for inserting new events as described in the Event Track section Mute All Events
377. then after powering up recall this session as the starting point for the new session Remember to immediately save the new session under a different name using Save As so your original settings remain intact Reset Template Restores a new session to the factory default settings for all static parameters To reset the Template to the factory default settings select the File menu Reset Template command The Desktop Window Ctrl D The Desktop offers file management features unavailable from the onboard Fat Channel VFD such as deleting files flushing the toilet mount ing and refreshing drives and copying multiple files or folders Use the Desktop to gt Copy files between floppy disks and the internal hard drive e Flush files to the toilet delete e Create new files e Rename files e Duplicate files e Mount Refresh drives e Drag and drop files and folders between any two open windows Note The destination drive or folder must be opened and displaying its contents for proper placement to occur In other words don t drop files or folders onto closed folders D8B Manual e Chapter 3 gt page 52 Gain access to the Desktop by e Clicking the File menu and dragging down to Desktop e Pressing Control D from the computer keyboard e Clicking Desktop in the window selection bar along the bottom of the on screen interface To close open windows e Press Control W to close the active window cl
378. tings HDR24 96 1 0 card are shown below 1 Set the D8B Sample Rate to 44 1kHz or 48kHz and set the Apogee Clock Analog Hookup to HDR24 96 108 to in the Digital 1 0 Setup window This example describes the analog hookup for the D8B HDR24 96 combination Cables amp Hardware 3 AIO 8 cards for HDR24 96 3 AIO 8 cards for D8B 6 DB25 to DB25 analog snakes Hookup 1 Connect three snakes between the HDR24 06 Inputs bottom connector and the corresponding D8B Tape Outputs top connector This example describes the hookup for the D8B console equipped for analog 1 0 HDR 24 96 Digital 8eBus AIO 8 Cards AIO 8 Cards e I 6 DB25 to 6 2 95 ANALOG ANALOG I O ANALOG I O 25 Analog ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG I O Snakes 9 6 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT 5 vw gt OUTPUT INPUT GEE INPUT 0 INPUT fe III Note Some older AlOe8 cards have the Input jack labeled as INPUT INPUT ee ume S opro INPUT sese eese 96 el From Tape and the Output jack labeled as To Tape Other wise they operate identically Sigh TAPE TAPE long story D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 120 Hookup to HDR24 96 010 8 T bs x OCK In 10 6 Ca
379. tions that support the Mackie HUI Pro Tools Nuendo Cubase SX Soundscape Logic 6 e New metering options offer more flexibility o On screen level meters with choice of bottom view top view or off o On screen level Meter Type options include Pre Fader Post Fader and Post Mute Fader o On screen level Meter Reference Point can be assigned to 10 dB 15 dB or 20 dB to accommodate different program sources o Show Meters In Trim Mode displays the actual signal level in the on screen meters when in Trim Levels Automation mode o Show Peak Holds causes the Overload indicators in the Top meters view to remain lit when triggered by a transient peak e Numeric Fader Reference the fader s current level in dB appears just below the fader Modify Fader Levels calibrated in dB Vertical channel linking Individual Aux Send mutes on each channel Stereo Aux Send Pan sliders Channel EQ window dims when the EQ is disabled instead of flat lining gt Double click the channel EQ window to open the Fat Channel for detailed editing e Improved Fat Channel o Improved EQ algorithms o Larger Channel EQ and Dynamics EQ views by double clicking in either graphic window o Expanded Dynamics View opens graphic views of the Compressor and Gate parameters o Alternate view of the Compressor and Gate meters o Compressor meter switches between Output Level or Compressor Gain Reduction o Gate meter switches between Input Level and Gate Gain Red
380. to A Digital Audio Wo Connecting the Digital 8eBus to Tascam MDMs Figure 1 1 Completing the Microphone Signal Path Figure 1 2 Simple Microphone Connection Basic Live Figure 1 3 Setting Up to Track Figure 1 4 Basic Mixdown Setup Figure 1 5 Signal Flow Diagram Figure 1 6 288 Block Diagram Figure 1 7 088 Gain Structure Diagram Figure 2 1 Aux Sends 1 8 Default Mackie Stereo Ef Figure 4 1 Power up Procedure Figure 4 2 Basic Connection for Multitrack Recordi Installation of FX Cards Installation of 1 0 Cards Physical Dimmensions Quick EQ Quick Select Fat Channel Recording Tracking Hookup Example Signal Path INSERTS TDIF Hookup to HDR24 96 DIO 8 Using PRE Insert for Bus Mastering V Pots File Menu Close Window ESC Desktop Window Ctrl D New Session Ctrl N Open Session Ctrl O Save Session Ctrl S Save Session As Shutdown Ctrl Q 0000 eooo eooo eooo 00000 III eooo eooo III III eooo 00000 0000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 00000 III III eooo III III eooo eooo eooo 00000 III III 00000 III 0000 00000 000 III eooo eooo eooo 00000 eooo 00
381. to control the digital input level pre DSP e Click on the channel V Pot and drag up to increase level drag down to decrease level e Control click on the channel V Pot to set it to unity gain e Right click a channel V Pot and drag across several channels to copy its level to each D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 48 TRACKING LEVEL This button activates the channel V Pots to adjust final post DSP output level to the multitrack outputs Same control as the onboard LEVEL TO TAPE This control fine tunes the channel output levels to the multitrack Click on the channel V Pot and drag up to increase level drag down to decrease level Control click on the channel V Pot to set it to unity gain Right click a channel V Pot and drag across several channels to copy its level to each When Faders to Tape is selected the tracking source channel s fader and Tracking Level V Pot are equivalent functions METERS The BOT bottom button displays the channel meters next to the faders in the faders view The TOP button displays the meters in a larger view overlaid across the Aux section With both BOT and TOP buttons off no metering is displayed WRITE Activates the Master Strip to record selected automation data by the Main Fader or Aux Masters Any moves in the Master Strip will be recorded into automation if the auto mation settings are set to receive them SELECT Activates the Master Fader in the Fat
382. to enter different modes of DAW play back in DP3 and allow you to recall locate points in Pro Tools The time display on the D8B should match that on the Main Locator in your DAW If you are viewing SMPTE for example the D8B should display SMPTE as well Please refer to your DAW s controller or HUI implementation manual for details on how this is mapped D8B Manual e Appendices page 167 D8B v5 1 B445 HUI Layer Control Mapping For Pro Tools 16220 Woodinville Redmond Rd NE Woodinville WA 98072 Tel 800 258 6883 Fax 425 806 6312 e mail techmail mackie com Last Updated 2 07 03 D8B Button Global General HUI Layer Number D8B Button Mapped HUI Button Mode Comments Pro Tools Function Leser Channel V Pot 1 8 corresponding channel Send Level s s eea solo 17 24 30018 806 corresponding PT channel peapea p p PE 1 0 Toggle Pre Post of corresponding PT channel Send selected Send A E If Level To Tape HUI Aux Mute is lit then it will toggle the mute status of the corresponding PT channel send for the selected Send A E r mkauwwawa ns Vr eme ed ee 1 LeveltoTape Auxmute When lit assign V Sel toggles the mute status of the selected Send When not lit V Sel will toggle the selected Send Pre Post a m Perrin sits res 1 n NN Ax2 Enab
383. to solo the channel e Press O on the keyboard to solo the selected channel s e Press on the keyboard to release the SOLO status on the selected channels MUTE e Highlight MUTE to mute the channel e Press M on the keyboard to mute the selected channels e Press the comma key on the keyboard to release the mutes on the selected channels Fader e Use the on screen fader to adjust the selected channel level e Press Control while clicking anywhere in the fader throw area to snap the fader to unity gain PRE DSP INSERT e Click the PATCH button to insert a channel aux bus return or plug in into the signal path before the channel s DSP e This insert is at the beginning of the signal path just after the A D converter and before Digital Trim EQ Dynamics or other processing POST DSP INSERT e Click the PATCH button to insert a plug in into the signal path post EQ Dynamics and other processing KEY INPUT e Use another channel s audio to trigger the dynamic processor of the selected channel e Click the PATCH button to select the key input source DYNAMICS EQ e Use this window to filter the dynamics key input This is often necessary to properly trigger the dynamics processor For example compress over sibilant vocals by accentuating the mid high frequencies feeding the dynamics key input e This EQ is edited as described for other EQ edit operations e KEY Button This enables use of the D
384. to unity U and fader motors are turned off Previously recorded automation remains in tact However fader and V Pot changes are simply added to or subtracted from existing data This is a good way to edit parts of an automa tion track See Modify Levels on page 55 for level adjusting an entire track D8B Manual e Chapter 2 page 37 Session Setup Section SETUP a QD SAVE SAVE AS NEW GROUP GENERAL PLUG INS DIGITAL Buttons in this section are used for file mainte nance and for setting up system functions such as Virtual Groups Digital I O meter assignment and MIDI parameters SAVE button e Saves the currently active session to the internal hard drive or floppy drive We recommend us ing the floppy only for backup e Saves all snapshot and automation data as well as the status of all digital parameters at the time of saving SAVE AS button e Saves the currently active session under a new name e Uses the V Pots and SELECT buttons in the Fat Channel display to rename and complete the operation e To finish the SAVE AS either press Select beneath SAVE in the onboard Fat Channel dis play or simply press SAVE AS a second time e To quick save the proposed file name simply double click SAVE AS NEW button e Press this button to start a new session This is the same as New Session in the on screen File menu e The New Session menu appears in the onboar
385. trl number or letter both opens and closes these windows Feature View Help View Setup View Snapshots View Surround View Locator View Mix Editor View Fat Channel View Panning View Faders View Event Track View Track Sheet View History List View MIDI Map View Ch 4 View Ch 25 48 View Ch 49 04 View Masters View HUI Layer Enable HUI Mode Close Window Close All View Plugin Configuration Surface HELP Ctrl 1 Ctrl 2 Ctrl 3 Ctrl 4 Ctrl 5 Ctrl 6 Ctrl 7 Ctrl 8 Ctrl 9 Mic Line Tape Effects Masters Shift Masters View Plug in Windows slots 1 9 View Plug in Windows slots 10 16 D8B Manual e Appendices page 160 Keyboard Alt H Ctrl 1 Ctrl 2 Ctrl 3 Ctrl 4 Ctrl 5 Ctrl 6 Ctrl 7 Ctrl 8 Ctrl 9 Ctrl T Ctrl H Ctrl 1 2 4 F5 Shift F5 Ctrl W or ESC Ctrl Ctrl P Alt 1 through Alt 9 Mouse click or pull down Windows gt Help Windows gt Setup Windows gt Snapshot Windows gt Surround Windows gt Locator Windows gt Mix Editor Windows gt Fat Channel Windows gt Panning Windows gt Faders Windows gt Event Track Windows gt Track Sheet Windows gt History List Windows gt MIDI Map Mic Line Tape Effects Master HUI Options HUI Mode File Close Window Window gt Close All Plugins in bottom menu bar or Plugins gt Plugins Alt Shift 0 through Alt Shift 6 Functions on SELECT ed Channel Example Select channel
386. trol key along with the up down arrows on the keyboard to vertically zoom in on the channel parameter list Four Nudge Arrows These arrows are located in the Mix Editor control palette immediately to the left of the Cursor Start and End time windows e When these arrows are clicked with the mouse highlighted data regions are moved back and forth in time left right arrows or values within the highlighted regions are incrementally increased or decreased by using the up down arrows e The resolution of these moves is relative to the current screen resolution so the greater the zoom in value the finer the resolution of any modifications e Using the nudge arrows 15 a good way to toggle mute events on and off by highlighting regions on a mute track and simply nudging up or down to change mute states Time Code Displays e Three time code displays indicate the highlighted region start and end points and the current cursor position displayed in either SMPTE or BBT e Values may be manually entered in the Start End point fields for specific edits e When adjusting an event or cue the cursor display changes to indicate the event or cue start time Auto Follow e This feature causes the Mix Editor to change views on the fly When enabled Auto Follow updates the Mix Editor to focus on any parameter you touch by channel and function Auto Scroll e When enabled Auto Scroll updates the Mix Editor to scroll the screen past
387. trol over channel levels to the subwoofer speaker 4 The pan grid has no effect on this adjustment With this control set to OFF there is no send level to the subwoofer Unity gain is achieved when this control is set to 0 0 71 00 _ MENU SDDS stands for Sony Dynamic Digital Sound which is designed for motion picture sound and optically printed on digital film Notice the speakers are numbered 1 7 3 8 2 5 4 and 6 Speakers 1 and 2 are Front L R speaker 3 is Front Center speaker 4 is the Subwoofer speakers 5 and 6 are Rear L R and speakers 7 and 8 are Front L R Center Divergence This control continuously varies the center image from dead center speaker 3 to a phantom center equally split between speakers 1 and 2 With a Divergence setting of 0 the center panned channel is routed to the center speaker only speaker 3 With a Divergence setting of 100 the center panned channel is routed equally to the front left and right speakers speakers 1 and 2 Note Speakers 7 and 8 are unaffected by the Divergence control Low Frequency Effect This control varies the channel send level to the subwoofer speaker 4 This is the only control over channel levels to the subwoofer speaker 4 The pan grid has no effect on this adjustment With this control set to OFF there is no send level to the subwoofer Unity gain is achieved when this control is set to D8B Manual g
388. ts Highlight from Selection Scroll Mix Editor Zoom Mix Editor Dive Zoom Mix Editor Drag Mix Editor Screen Meters to Pre Fader Meters to Post Fader Meters to Post Mute Fader Clear Over Loads D8B Manual e Appendices page 162 Keyboard Mouse click or pull down Click on name field enter text tab right or shift tab left See clipboard ops Click and drag over area Alt arrow s Ctrl arrow s Z D F6 F7 F8 F10 Click bar right mouse button swipe either direction Click bus any mouse button swipe either direction Click button any mouse button swipe either direction Bypass Automation in Locator window Mouse Click Use Highlighter I Beam tool Options gt Meters gt Meter Type gt Pre Fader Options gt Meters gt Meter Type gt Post Fader Options gt Meters gt Meter Type gt Post Mute Fader Options gt Meters gt Clear Over Loads or click on Overload indicator Appendix E MIDI Implementation Guide Product Mackie Digital 8 Date 4 03 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 5 1 Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks 00000000 Basic Channel Default 00 MIDI Off note 1 00 MIDI off note 1 See 1 under notes Changed 00 00 2 per channel strip Default Poly Poly Exception program Altered Note True voice Reassignable applies Number to mute amp pan messaging Velocity Note ON Mute on 40 Mute on 40 Mute only Note OFF Mute off 01 Mute
389. tup Mix Options window e Run the sequence with the D8B receiving MTC from the sequencer gt Place the sequencer in record mode on the D8B channel as you scroll through snapshots Each of these snapshot changes record into the sequence e Play the sequence back with the D amp B receiving MIDI playback at its MIDI input e Snapshots will playback in the same time and order that you selected them gt To fine tune snapshot placement open the sequence track and adjust the time position in the MIDI sequence Dynamic Automation Dynamic automation is a function of the D8B automation system The power and flexibility offered by the 282 is awesome This one tool can revolutionize the way you do music Each new automation pass helps mold and shape the music into a brilliant work of art Dynamic automation involves real time crafting of the mix with the assistance of a computer processor Where Do Start Automation is somewhat intimidating at first Fortunately it doesn t need to be The power flexibility and ease of use provided by the Mackie designers makes the D amp B painless and intuitive If you ve used other automation systems you have a definite advantage The concepts involved as they apply to the D8B are similar to most automation systems The advantage the D8B offers over most other automation systems is its mind boggling ability to automate virtually every parameter on the console The following is a step b
390. u are making backups of everything right The History List Window Ctrl H Type Action Max Undos 400 mur 5 Paste Events Memory Remaining 294528 e The History List Window lists actions taken in the Mix Editor In addition Automation Passes Clear Automation Delete Global Time Insert Global Time Delete Events and Modify Levels commands are logged as single list items Each of these actions is available for Undo as long as they remain on the History List e Using this list 115 possible to regress to any point in the mix If at some point things went in the wrong direction it s easy to go back to where the mix was on the right track e Highlight any item in the list to deactivate all forthcoming listed actions When the mix is played no actions listed below the selected event will occur 7 15 Type Action Max undas 400 murmu Paste Events e If an event is selected in the list then a change is made in the Mix Editor all events following the selection will be replaced by the new event e Use the Undo command from the Edit Menu Ctrl Z or the control surface to regress through the History List steps one at a time e Use the Clear Edit History command from the Edit Menu to remove all events from the History List This action cannot be undone The MIDI Map Window Ctrl The MIDI Map window offers setup options for bidirectional MIDI control of practi
391. u ll look better if it s already set to go BUS UI 1 8 SURROUND OUT uc r MASTER OUT 4 AAL RAA NSS 27 SS 27 r 1 REN SS NSS 27 CR r NEAR FIELD D ZNAL REA R S SW MASTER OUT L Record a pass on the multitrack Play multitrack back playback should sound identical to tracking and you re ready to print a rough mix D8B Manual e Chapter 4 gt page 107 Sample Tracking Setup This diagram shows a typical hookup for tracking Four microphones are connected to channels 1 4 for vocals Two of them are condenser mics which require phantom power so the 48V PH switch is pushed in on those channels A vocal enhancer is connected to the channel 1 INSERT jack to adda special effect to the lead vocal Note During tracking dynamics control like compression and limiting are often included insert or onboard at the beginning of a signal path Effects like reverb delay and chorus are best left for adjustment during mixdown or during tracking for monitor use only Various instruments are connected to the line inputs of channels 11 14 either directly from their line level outputs or through effects boxes or direct boxes Each input from channels 1 24 is assigned to a tape output which can be connected to an 8 16 or 24 track recorder simply use the appropriate I O card for your setup You can assign any input 1 48 any return FX 1 16 RET 1 8 and B
392. uction o Gate Expansion mode allows reduction of the signal level below the designated threshold by a variable ratio o Adjustable Dynamics Key Types provides a selection of four EQ types that can be applied to the Key Input BAND 4 EQ TO DYN o External MIDI Trigger for the Gate o Channel polarity can be flipped from the console VFD e Advanced Mix Editor features including o Insert Event by placing Event markers in the Mix Editor window time bar o Event markers can be moved edited and locked o Events can be commited to Dynamic Automation for further editing e Independent control of Plug in Source and Destination e Plug in Chaining e Plug ins can now be used on Bus Inserts D8B Manual Preface page 1 Enhanced Surround Sound features o Surround Sound Setup window o Surround Sound Monitor Level control in the Surround window o Mute option for surround monitoring when in Stereo surround mode o Surround mode now selectable from the Surround window o Surround panning appears in Fat Channel Adjustable attenuation for the Control Room DIM switch includes 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB and off Track Sheet stores all pertinent session information with the session itself Track Sheet can be exported as an HTML file or text file Channel Notes window for keeping additional notes about each channel Seriale9 support provides Sony 9 Pin communication with external devices Copy Mix to Bus copies the current L R mix to any consecutive odd even
393. ug in module D8B Manual e Chapter 3 page 49 Channel Layout Reconfiguration The Channel number indicator buttons provide the capability to move channel strips around and reconfigure the channel layout This is a very convenient feature especially during mixdown For example it helps to have all the vocals together so just reconfigure the channels so they re all on adjacent channels Anytime you need to have immediate access to faders from another bank this feature is a life saver Simply click on the channel number and select the desired channel e Click the on screen channel number icon to reveal the Channel List e Drag to select the desired channel for this location and release e When a different channel is selected for a location there is no effect on any other channels For example if you select to move channel 30 to the channel 10 position channel 30 still remains in its original position between 29 and 31 e When channels are moved their numbers turn yellow to make it easy to recognize them gt To reset the channel to its original layout configuration simply select the original channel number Notice the Mackie OS places the original number to the nght of the main list for your convenience Notice the channels below have been moved around to provide a better mixing configuration Tl Ta 7 Tl om TH nm RECORD Recort kEcORD RECORD D8B Ma
394. ure 1 4 adds a mixdown recorder The beauty of this concept lies in its flexibility Start at the beginning middle or end of the signal path it doesn t matter When the routing concept is understood the process is simple Figure 1 2 Simple Microphone Connection Basic Live Setup This setup illustrates the most fundamental use of the D8B A very basic live setting might require only this limited level of complexity 9 3 6 660 6 066 5 5 Channels 1 24 Tracking Mixer Fader Bank 1 Figure 1 3 Setting Up to Track The graphic below highlights the simplicity of the D8B tracking procedure Once levels to tape are set using the Channel Trim controls its typically best to monitor the mix from the TAPE IN Fader Bank throughout tracking Channel 1 24 From Tape to Channel Monitor Outs Mic Line In Tape or Bus Outs to 25 48 Inputs to Speakers Multitrack Inputs FAPRERERFPSESPRERES PERPE PRESSES cnn em eal SES Mu WOOO VOI c
395. urrent play locator then type in the new time on the D8B numeric keypad and press Enter 39 Equals shot button pressed to locate to the newly entered time Won t work with 40 SMPTE View F8 Esc The key pad works 41 D8B Keypad HUI D8B key pad with DEAN snap Corresponds to PC numeric keypad shot button pressed The Enter key works shot button pressed Won t work with snap The Store key works shot button pressed Won t work with snap N A Y Toggles D8B snap Press to enter D8B snapshot mode Type a snapshot number and press Enter to recall a snapshot Press Store Snapshot shot recall mode type a number and press Enter to store a snapshot Exit snapshot mode by pressing Snapshot or Enter me mes mia O 51 Jog amp Shuttle Jog Shuttle Select Y Jog Wheel Jog Wheel Y N N Start Recording Press during playback to punch into record press again to punch out N A J N A N A N A N A Other HUI Mode HUI Layer Notes Global Mode Global functions are always active when HUI Mode is on no matter what D8B bank is active Non global functions are active only when HUI Mode is On and the D8B is displaying the HUI Layer Normal HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays the normal HUI VFD screen exactly as a real HUI would The contents of the VFD depend on the DAW in use and other settings See notes on the VFD above Channel HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays eight channel names in bottom line of VFD Fir
396. us 1 8 to any unused tape out using the ROUTE TO TAPE button in the Bus Assignment Section refer to Chapter 2 for review D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 108 Monitoring Connect the outputs from the recorders to the TAPE Inputs on the Digital 8eBus This allows you to monitor the signal as it s being recorded assuming your recorder has that capability To do this gt Assign channels 25 48 or whatever channels are being used for tape returns to the L R bus e In the Control Room Section assign MASTER L R as the Control Room Source The configuration shown has two external effects devices connected for monitoring Aux 8 send goes to a digital reverb which has stereo outputs that feed into the line inputs of channels 19 and 20 Aux 11 12 goes out to a multi effects stereo processor which then comes back to the Digital 8eBus through the line inputs of channels 23 and 24 In addition Aux 1 and 2 are routed to the internal FX Card which processes the signal with whatever plug in has been downloaded to it The processed signal is returned to the L R bus via the FX 4 channel strips in Fader Bank 3 The signal at the CR MAIN CR NEAR FIELD and the STUDIO OUT is determined by the Control Room Source selection in the Control Room Section You can connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES 1 or 2 jack and monitor the signal there as well Select CONTROL ROOM as the source in the PHONES CUE MIX 1 or 2 Section v
397. useful automation tool and is the primary starting point for the automation process For use in automation this feature sets the current levels of the faders on the selected channels as the default through the range of SMPTE time code Changes to automation data can be selected to retain their adjusted status until another automation move is written or to snap back to the default level upon exiting Write mode see Write Flyback on page 61 Modify Levels Alt M For all selected ader values Tim INCLUDE AUTOMA TIOM Use this control to modify all selected channels for the user selected parameter e Choose the type of parameter in the top pull down button Set the action to Trim Set Min or Max e Trim adds or subtracts the selected value from all selected channels for the selected parameter When Trim Fader is selected the units are calibrated in dB for highly accurate fader adjustments e Set moves the selected parameter to the specified value for all selected channels e Min limits the minimum parameter setting to the specified value for all selected channels e Max limits the maximum parameter setting to the specified value for all selected channels Note The Modify Levels command affects automation data only if the INCLUDE AUTOMATION box is checked If the box is checked levels are modified globally across the complete SMPTE time line on selected channels for the selected parameter Another Note When
398. uses it is assigned to typically the L R Master Fader and the Bus 1 8 output Doesn t affect the signal level to the Tape Out puts unless specifically routed to do so or if console is configured for Faders to Tape mode Channel Meters e Indicate post EQ pre fader levels e The audio level display is scaled in digital dBFS decibels full scale 0 dBFS 20 dBu clipping occurs at 22 dBu e 15 dBFS 5 dBu e The minimum displayed level is 50 dBFS e Markings next to the LED ladders are denoted as 50 dBFS to OL they are similar in func tion to those of digital recorders Each LED segment is accurate within 1 dB Note Typically in digital recording devices such as MDMs HDRs or DATs there is a built in overhead of 3 4 dB above the 0 dBFS mark to match the typical maximum unbalanced analog console bus output value of 22 dBu The OL LED lights at 22 dBu D8B Manual e Chapter 2 page 27 Master Section Description The Master Section everything to the right of channel strip 24 15 divided into 13 subsections They Master Section Master Fader Bank Select Section Master V Pot Section V Pot Assign Section Studio Solo Section eeeeeeeleeeaeeeelelleleleeeelels s le Phones Cue Mix Section 1 Control Room Section Clipboard Section Master Fader Shortcuts Section Bus Assignment Section Automation Section Session Setup Section Transport Section 8
399. ut copy or paste Lock Monitor Levels e Select this option to lock the Monitor Level controls once they have been adjusted to optimize your surround sound monitoring speaker system e The LOCKED LED lights when Lock Monitor Levels is active MEM A MEM B MORPH The Locator Window Ctrl 4 00 01 17 25 NewCue Delete Renumber Store Cue Transport Controls REWind FFWD STOP PLAY RECord These controls operate any connected record or playback devices Devices are controlled through MIDI Machine Control MMC and must be set properly to receive transport control commands Numeric Transport Position Indicator e This window defaults to SMPTE time code position but can also indicate transport position in Bars Beats Ticks or Milliseconds e To change the transport position readout nght click anywhere in its numeric window then scroll and select from the pop up menu or choose from the options just above the cues list SMPTE Bars Beats Ticks or Milliseconds e From the control surface toggle between SMPTE and Bars Beats Ticks by pressing the SMPTE VIEW button next to the POSITION readout Ways to Enter Locator SMPTE Position e Click in desired field Hours Minutes Seconds Frames and drag up to increase and down to decrease Press Enter or click out of the field to complete e Click in the desired field and enter the number from the keyboard number row or numeric keypad Press Enter
400. utomation pass or locator activities Active Tempo e Displays the actual tempo currently in use Device ID selection Sets the Device ID reference for connected record devices such as the HDR24 96 SDR24 96 ADATs or DA Series multitracks Song Offset e Sets the consistent time difference between the record device time code and the D8B reference time code e Generally used to zero reference a song s starting point in BBT It s easier to jump to measure 1 than 2 01 23 usually e Offset can be as little as one frame or as much as 23 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds and 29 frames Pre Roll e Sets the time difference between a Locate point and the actual start point Many record devices require a few seconds to synchronize so the Pre Roll time allows a brief time period in advance of the locate point to ensure transport sync and accuracy FTP Server General Network Digitall O Licensing Mix Opt Surround MIDI 12 Changes take effect immediately Allow FTP Clients Check this option to enable the D8B for inter network communication and file transfer Note To transfer files from your D8B to a computer for backup you need to use an FTP client on your computer to communicate with the D amp B IP Address e Note the D8B IP address displayed The factory default is 10 10 28 20 e Setthe first three fields of the D8B IP address to match your computer s fixed IP address and set the last field to something diff
401. uu k OO 14 Figure DSB Gain Structure Diagram 16 Pe 17 Physical Dimensions a U u 18 s s hu NSS e ls 19 Windows based Computers DIDRANA 19 Macintosh 19 lll Mec 20 Chapter 2 Where 1s RO HERO 2 It s Time to Locate Everything ccssssssscsssssscsscsscssscssssscsssssscssccsscsuscssssscenscssccassssccaccssccaccsscsacessccucencencenesseenes 22 Rear Panel 22 Channels TRL c 22 Channels fuite 22 SeCLIOD 22 Master Input Output SCC EON i 23 AUX 24 Remote CPU 25 Data and synchronization 25 Connecting a Mouse Keyboard and SVGA Monitor 25 Oher Onne Ci Ou absent eee iei deret 25 Control Surface FUNCTIONS aiir 26 Channel SIrIp Si O u uuu eium E E ee OIN D D APUD I 26 Master Section Descrip ON 28 Master Fader Bank Select Section 22 29 28 Master y SC 29 V POrAss oli oodd iden eee 30 Figure 2 1 Aux Sends 1 8 Default Mackie Stereo Effects 4 Cards 1 00
402. v e 13 e me omm Y a remm V m f ES Ka ES Ea shot recall mode and press Enter to store a snapshot Exit snapshot mode by pressing Snapshot or Enter Shuffles backward Goes to the left locator Shuffles forward Goes to the right locator Stop Logic playback p Start Logic playback 51 Jog amp Shuttle Jog Shuttle Select Y sma mm fy _ cr Other HUI Mode HUI Layer Notes Global Mode Global functions are always active when HUI Mode is on no matter what D8B bank is active Non global functions are active only when HUI Mode is On and the D8B is displaying the HUI Layer Y Y Y Y Y Y Start recording in Logic Press once to go into jog press again to go into shuttle and press again to go back to normal Normal move Song Position Locator by one bar Scrub scrub Shuffle shuffle Cuts the selection Copies the selection Paste contents of clipboard Undoes last command in Logic Normal HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays the normal HUI VFD screen exactly as a real HUI would The contents of the VFD depend on the DAW in use and other settings See notes on the VFD above Channel HUI VFD Mode HUI Layer VFD displays eight channel names in bottom line of VFD First two VFD select buttons mirror the Channel L and Channel R functions The name of the selected channel function is displayed in the center of the top VFD line The Onli
403. ve fader bank Master L R Fader 100mm logarithmically tapered fader for smooth fades Remotely controls level via DSP doesn t pass audio like a traditional fader dB level ranges from 10 dB fully on to ee fully off Mixdown Solo level control Provides level adjustment to tape outputs if desired Master V Pot Section a SOLO MASTER V Pot e Acts as the Master level control for the cur rently selected Aux bus In all surround mode settings the MASTER V Pot acts as the front rear pan control for the selected channel provided the PAN button is lit When used along with the channel pan V Pot the D8B acts like an audio rendition of the family favorite Etch A Sketch D8B Manual e Chapter 2 e page 29 MASTER PAN gt Assigns all applicable channel V Pots to act as pan controls channels 1 72 and 81 88 e Stays lit continuously until an Aux Select Level to Tape or Digital Trim button is engaged MASTER SOLO Aux e Solos the currently selected Aux e Only one Aux can be soloed at a time e Master solo can be active at the same time a channel is soloed e Aux bus remains soloed until it is manually disengaged or until the CLEAR SOLO button is pressed e Solo level is post the MASTER V Pot e Master Solo is not affected by the PFL or AFL Solo status selected in the Studio Solo section V Pot Assign Section These buttons e Assign the channel V Pots to control individual
404. vergence are not functional in this mode Quad _ MENU MORPH z FLYBACI e Notice the speakers are numbered 1 2 5 and 6 This provides consistency throughout the available surround configurations Speakers 1 and 2 are always Front L R and speakers 5 and 6 are always Rear L R gt Low Frequency Effect and Divergence are not functional in this mode LCRS L2 e Notice the speakers are numbered 1 3 2 and 4 Speakers 1 and 2 are Front L R speaker 3 is Front Center and speaker 4 is Mono Surround Divergence e This control continuously varies the center image from dead center speaker 3 to a phantom center equally split between speakers 1 and 2 e With a Divergence setting of 0 the center panned channel is routed to the center speaker only speaker 3 e With a Divergence setting of 100 the center panned channel is routed equally to the left and right speakers speakers 1 and 2 Low Frequency Effect e This control is not functional in LCRS mode 5 1 MEMA MEM MENU MORPH FLYBACK e Notice the speakers are numbered 1 3 2 5 4 and 6 Speakers 1 and 2 are Front L R speaker 3 is Front Center speaker 4 is the Subwoofer and speakers 5 and 6 are Rear L R Divergence e This control continuously varies the center image from dead center speaker 3 to a phantom center equally split between speakers 1 and 2 e With a Divergence setting of 0 the center
405. w light illuminate the control surface WRITE button or the on screen channel WRITE icon Start playback device e Verify MTC in the Locator position readout e Verify selection of desired automation parameters for now select FADERS MUTES PAN and ALL Move a channel fader e Assoon as the fader moves the WRITE button illuminates indicating automation data is being recorded Exit Record and Rewind to Beginning of Track e Stop playback or press the WRITE button on the active channels to exit automation record mode Rewind playback Record device to the beginning of the automation pass Start Playback from Beginning of Track gt f you ve followed these directions thoroughly you ll see the fader move that you recorded playback automatically e Welcome to the wonderful world of D8B automation Repeat this Action for More Parameters e sure you ve selected the desired parameter before attempting the automation pass gt Each time you perform new automation pass new data combines with the old in a seamless manner Continue building the mix until everything is just night Note Auto Touch mode does not require any channel selection for automation to record Simply move virtually any parameter on any channel to activate the record status for that channel on that automation parameter Write Ready Mode It s possible to build an entire mix using Auto Touch mode It is easy to use easy to build on and it offers i
406. wer D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 gt page 104 LJ Press Mic button on channels using microphone inputs 241 Configure Auxes for desired Pre Post status select Surround Mode set Mix Options General Network Digitall O Licensing Hf pu Surround MIDI FTP Server Aux Select Mixing Options RECORD SAFE WRITE FLYBACK LINK SPEAKERS Aux 1 12 Pre Post Assign Macros USE PREROLL MIDI SNAPSHOTS FADERS TO TAPE Dim Amount Fader Motors LJ Test each instrument and mic to verify sufficient level at console input meter 56 8 1 Adjust input trim for a reading around 15 on the meter LJ Select L R in the ASSIGNMENT section to confirm Assign lights on for all desired channels or look on screen to verify that all necessary channels have L R button highlighted in Bus Assign section 55 ASSIGN ASSIGN wam Multitrack Tracking Checklist L O OOU Connect multitrack ins and outs to D8B Follow basic power up procedure Select Mic Line fader bank Press phantom power button on the rear of the console as necessary for mic inputs Press Mic button on channels using microphone inputs Set pre fader auxes in Setup Window for monitor use Test each instrument and mic to verify sufficient level at console input meter Adjust input trim for a reading around 15 on the meter Press L R in the ASSIGNMENT section to c
407. wer up Fi Advanced Graphics D8B Manual gt Chapter 4 98 Installation and Connection of Optional 1 0 and Effects Cards The Input Output cards are an essential part of the D8B multitrack system These cards provide up to 24 tape outputs and inputs for use with any common analog and digital formats Since the I O cards are optional and interchange able you probably need to install them before you begin creating hit recordings If you install multiple types of I O cards note which slots they re installed in Making a note of each I O card type and its exact slot will help avoid subsequent problems There are several optional cards available for the Digital 8eBus which you can install into the card cage in the rear panel of the console These cards provide additional inputs and outputs for specific applications or additional digital signal processing power for effects AIO 8 Analog Hookup This card provides 8 analog line level inputs and outputs Connections are made through two 25 D Sub connectors You can install this card in any of the Tape In Out slots or in the ALT I O slot DIO 8 Digital Hookup This card provides 8 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs Connections are provided in both ADAT Multichannel Optical Interface and Tascam T DIF 1 formats You can install this card in any of the Tape In Out slots or in the ALT I O slot You can mix any combination of the 1098 and DIO 8 cards in the T
408. when any of the Auxes are selected in the Master Strip e When the PAN icon is highlighted the Master V Pot functions as a front rear pan position control for any selected channel in all Surround Modes not stereo e The Master V Pot SOLO button solos any selected Aux bus CUE LEVEL and CUE PAN 1 and 2 e These buttons activate the channel V Pots for level adjustments and L R panning for Auxes 9 10 and 11 12 Selecting CUE LEVEL 1 or 2 activates the channel V Pots for individual stereo send levels and the Master V Pot for the selected cue master volume level Selecting CUE PAN 1 or 2 activates the channel pan V Pots for L R placement e Click drag the channel V Pot up to move right click drag down to move left e Control click any channel V Pot to set it to center position in PAN or to unity for LEVEL e Right click a channel V Pot and drag across several channels to copy its level or pan to each AUX buttons 1 8 e Each button activates the channel V Pots for Aux send level adjustment e When any AUX button is highlighted in the Master Strip the Master V Pot is activated to control Master Aux output level e Click on the channel V Pot and drag up to increase level drag down to decrease level e Control click on the channel V Pot to set it to unity gain e Right click a channel V Pot and drag across several channels to copy its level to each DIGITAL TRIM e This button activates the channel V Pot
409. y Woodinville Washington Service for products living outside the United States can be obtained through local dealers or distributors If your console needs service follow these instructions 1 Review the troubleshooting suggestions in your owner s manual see next section Please Call Tech Support at 1 800 258 6883 7am to 5pm PST to explain the problem and request an RA Return Authorization number Have your Digital 8eBus or Remote CPU serial number s ready You must have an RA number before you can obtain service at the factory Set aside the power cord owner s manual or anything else that you ll ever want to see again We are responsible only for the return of the product being repaired DO 4 Pack the product in its original package including the foam end caps and the upper tray This is VERY IMPORTANT When you call for the RA number please let Tech Support know if you need new packaging Mackie is not responsible for any damage that occurs due to non factory packaging Include a legible note stating your name shipping address no P O boxes daytime phone number RA number and a detailed description of the problem including how we can duplicate it Write the RA number in BIG PRINT on top of the box It must appear on the outside of the box Ship the product to us We suggest insurance for all forms of cartage Ship to this address unless told differently by your friendly T
410. y step streamlined procedure to help get you automating To clarify terminology and basic layout refer to Chapter 2 of this manual Automation In Bypass gt Begin by setting up a basic mix with automation off Select BYPASS in the Automation section of the control surface in the Options Automation window or in the on screen Locator window Clear Automation e To avoid errant data select all channels and clear all types of automation data e Select Mic Line bank then Select All Control A e Select Fader bank then Select All Control A e Select Effects bank then Select All Control 4A e Select Masters bank then Select All Control A e Choose Clear Automation from the Edit Menu Check all types of data then OK Save Session As e Name your Mixes in a manner that is easy to reference consecutive revisions For example BigBadBob Mix 1 or BigBadBob rev 1 0 e Using rev 1 x rev 2 x etc provides an easy way to indicate major conceptual changes 1 0 2 0 3 0 etc from minor refinements 1 0 1 1 1 2 etc Setup Rough Mix e Build the basic sound of the mix Include fundamental EQ Pan Surround Dynamics Groups etc e Save frequently or set the D8B for SMART SAVES at regular intervals 88 Manual Chapter 4 page 137 Save Snapshot For Safety As you build the mix save snapshots as soon as the music begins to reveal itself Label the snapshots for your own reference
411. ynamics EQ by stealing the fourth band of EQ from the selected channel s equalizer to filter the Dynamics Key input gt EQ IN Button Activates the Dynamics EQ on the Key signal This can be used to automate the Dynamics EQ Tip These two buttons sound pretty similar in operation so here is the skinny on how they work together If you plan to use Dynamics EQ ona session then enable the KEY button on the desired channel s As stated this steals the channel s fourth EQ band for Dynamics EQ purposes Even though the KEY button is on the Dy namics EQ is not yet affecting the Key signal This only occurs once the EQ IN button is pressed So in most cases you will click both buttons and adjust your Dynamics EQ to taste If you wish to use Dynamics EQ on some sections of a session but not others then automate the EQ IN button but leave the Key button enabled Allowing only a single band of EQ for the Dynamics EQ might not sound like much but this is one flexible band Double click in the DYNAM ICS EQ window to open the expanded EQ view BAND 4 EQ TO DYN for more detailed editing Here you can select the EQ type for the Dynamics EQ Selections include Parametric Para High Shelving Shelf High Pass Filter HP and Low Pass Filter LP The Panning Window Ctrl 7 This window is extremely useful in an active surround mixing environment All the basic surround pan function are available for each channel mics tape
412. zation and phase controls Main Inserts T 6 2 Channel R L racking Kouting 9 Meter 0 AES EBU Out Level to S PDIF Out Pre DSP Post DSP Tape Insert Insert To Outputs Analog Analog to DSP pos oe Master Digital to T Inpute Digital EQ Comp an Bus Fader Analog one CH 1 24 Converter Gate etc e L Assign e Converter u R Bus Inserts Optional Y Bus Master Digital to Bus 1 8 Tape m Analg Outputs Card e Converter Bus 1 5 Aux Send Master Aux Digital to A Level Send Level Analog e e Converter Sende From Aux Sende 1 8 To E B ue n 223 Internal L or K Main Insert Channel P CT T Pre Fost D5F Insert Channel Pre or Post DSP Inserts FX Plugin 22 p LS Lake Sammamish Monitoring or Bus 1 8 i 6 miles From L R Out Main L R Meter 9 Near Field AES EBU DAC ear Fie 2 ale Nearfield Level Out S PDIF DAC Control Room Select Main CR Speaker 2TRK A Main Level Out 2 TRK B Studio Studio Level Out 26 Ea Cue Mix 1 Phones 1 Auxes 9 10 Auxes 11 12 Level Out Cue Mix 2 Phones 2 Level Out 3 When using the V Pot to adjust a parameter ee pm make sure it s assigned to make the change you Gs EZ need Since the V Pot is a multifunction 1 48 13 51 AUX 9 10 AUX 11 12 control it s easy to assume it s doing the Job you want when it might be changing a completely LEVEL TO TAPE

Mackie 8Bus User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents